GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND

TRAINING
Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI

Globally Competitive
CURRICULUM (FOR NEW COURSE)
For Polytechnic Diploma Courses
in Andhra Pradesh

3 YEAR
DIPLOMA IN
COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER NETWORKING
ENGINEERING

1
 CURRICULUM
FOR NEW COURSES

3 YEAR
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER
NETOWRK ENGINEERING

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI

2
 CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA COURSES IN ANDHRA PRADESH

PREAMBLE

The proposed programme intends to develop a skilled technician to support the industries
both nationally or globally. It also helps to kindle the spirit of entrepreneurship with necessary skills
and theoretical inputs aligning with the National policy of ‘Make in India’. The programme also
provides for accomplishing higher education goals for those who wish to enrich their theoretical
concepts further.

The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been offering Diploma
programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake holders: industries, students,
academia, parents and the society at large.

The AICTE has brought The New Education Policy (NEP-2020). NEP-2020 approved by the
Union Cabinet is set to bring a slew of major changes. One of the stated aims of the policy is to
develop knowledge, skills, values, and dispositions that support responsible commitment to human
rights, sustainable development and living, and global well-being.

The NEP-2020 identified the demand for courses on Artificial Intelligence (AI), Internet of
Things (IoT), Machine Learning, Block Chain, Robotics, Quantum Computing, Data Sciences, Cyber
Security, 3D Printing & Design and other emerging technological areas. Hence to keep the curriculum
of SBTET,AP on par with recommendations of NEP-2020 it is decided to introduce new emerging
courses.

As per the G.O.RT.No.97 dt.1/10/2021 and G.O.RT.No.98 dt.1/10/2021 of SKILL

DEVELOPMENT &TRAINING(TE-I) DEPARTMENT,AP, it is decided to include the additional diploma
programmes in the curriculum of SBTET,AP like Artificial Intelligence And Machine Learning
Engineering,Cloud Computing And Big Data Engineering ,Communication and Computer Networking
Engineering,Artificial Intelligence Engineering,Web Designing etc.,

The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed throughout the
design of this curriculum and it is designed to meet the requirements of NBA Accreditation, too.

Inclusion of emerging courses is approved by BoG of SBTET for implementation with effect
from 2020-21 as part of Curriculum C-20.

Highlights of Curriculum C-20:

1. Duration of course for regular Diploma and for sandwich Diploma is 3 years and 3½ years
respectively.
2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is maintained as Year-
wise pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses and 6 months
Industrial Training is introduced for 3 ½ years Sandwich Diploma courses.
4. Updated subjects relevant to the industry are introduced in all the Diploma courses.
5. CISCO course content has been incorporated into the ECE, CME and CME allied programmes
for certification from CISCO in lieu of industrial training when students are unable to get
Industrial Training placement in any industry.

3
 6. The policy decisions taken at the State and Central level with regard to environmental science
are implemented by including relevant topics in Chemistry. This is also in accordance with the
Supreme Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
7. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills which is playing a major role in
the success of Diploma Level students in the industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Further as emphasized in
the meetings, Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
8. CAD specific to the branch has been given emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
9. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, it is found that the theory content is found to
have more weightage than the Practical content. In C-20 curriculum, more emphasis is given
to the practical content in Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical
skills.
10. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all
the subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional
procedure based.
11. Curricula of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the
suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment
available in the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical
sessions are identified to confirm to the field requirements of industry.
12. An exclusive section for assessing Higher order Thinking skills (HOTS) has been introduced in
summative evaluation.

Acknowledgements:

It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum C-20.
A workshopis conducted by NITTTR, AP Extension Centre, Vijayawada involving faculty from
Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges & Industries to frame the structure and the contents of
various courses of Diploma in Communication and computer Networking Engineering to design C-
20 Curriculum under the guidance of Dr C. R. Nagendra Rao, Professor & Head, NITTTR-ECV. The
efforts & support extended by NITTTR to bring out final Curriculum C-20 by incorporating needs,
aspiration & expectations of all stake holders is highly appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.

The Members of the working group are grateful to Dr. Pola Bhaskar, I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education, Chairman of SBTET, AP and Smt. G. Jaya Lakshmi, I.A.S. Principal Secretary,
Department of Skill Development and Training, for their guidance and valuable inputs during
process of framing and developing the Curriculum C-20.

The Members acknowledge with thanks the guidance & inspiration provided by Sri K Vijaya
Bhaskar, Secretary , SBTET, Andhra Pradesh and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education
and the State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh, experts from industry, academia from
the universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who
are directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.

4
 RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-20 CURRICULUM

1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES

All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
or 3½ years duration of academic instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on year wise pattern in the first year, and the
remaining two or two & half years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of few courses
like Diploma in Bio-Medical course, the training will be in the seventh semester. Run-through
system is adopted for all the Diploma Courses, subject to eligibility conditions.
2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this regard from
time to time.
a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET)
conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh,
Vijayawada.
Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
b) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of their
Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to production of
proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally at
the time of admission.
c) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra Pradesh
from time to time.
d) For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for
admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy

3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in
sessional work and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for
promotion etc., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each admitted
candidate to maintain academic records.

5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER / YEAR:

a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic
Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180 days
excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any
reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to complete the syllabus.

5
6 ELIGIBILITY (ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION)
a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all subjects, if he or
she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and
below 75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1st year and
not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end examination of
that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-admission for
that semester / 1st year when offered in the next subsequent academic semester/year.
f) For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the
student shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.
7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/
Regional Joint Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D. Pharmacy
course or first year course in Engineering and Non Engineering Diploma streams).
Otherwise such cases shall not be considered for readmission for that semester / year
and are advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent eligible academic year.
The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated from
the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester, as officially
announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported
to the class work.

8. SCHEME OF Evaluation
a) First Year
THEORY Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with examination of 3
hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional
marks). However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessional
Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40/20 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional
marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying
60/30 marks. However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessional.

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

THEORY Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with examination of 3
hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional
marks). However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessional.
Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40/20 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional
marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying
60/30 marks. However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessional.

6
9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME
a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding sessional marks
on the dates specified. Three unit tests shall be conducted for I year students and two
Unit Tests for semesters.
Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40 marks.
For each test
The average of marks of all the tests, reduced to 20 shall be taken as final sessional in
any case.
b) Practical Courses:

(i) Drawing Courses:

The award of sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the following table

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)

Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks

From the Average From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
of THREE Unit Assessment of Regular TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular
Tests. Class work Exercises. Class work Exercises.

All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further scrutiny by a
competent authority

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during the year/
semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.

Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than drawing courses:

i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)
hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of tasks performed
by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP &
NITTTR- ECV and posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task based and shall be
prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses be prepared
as per SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the course
of study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned
Teacher.

d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners. External
examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective Head of
Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry

7
 ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways,
BSNL,APSRTC,APSEB etc.,
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoDs from Govt.Polytechnic

Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in (c)
above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in respect of
drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments / exercise
prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing, trouble shooting,
repair, assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical Courses
are to be maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and
Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:

Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
1.The faculty
Learning outcomes as given in
1 12 weeks concerned and 120
the scheme of assessment, for
2. Training Mentor of
Industrial Training
2 20-22 weeks the industry 120
1.The faculty member 1.Demonstration of any one of
concerned, the skills listed in learning 30
3.Final
outcomes
summative 23 weeks
2.HoD concerned and 2.Training Report 20
Evaluation
3.An external
3.Viva Voce 10
examiner
TOTAL 300

10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

THEORY EXAMINATION:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end examination marks
put together.
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:
For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting and short
hand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for typewriting and
Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.

INDUSTRIAL ASSESSMENT:
Pass marks is 50% in assessment at Industry ( I and II assessments put together) and also
50% in final summative assessment at institution level

11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT

8
 Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from First Year
to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.
b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the
succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the duration
including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the year of first
admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or
Industrial Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations hold good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under Mal-
practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall deposit the
original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original Diploma Certificate to
the Board. If there is improvement in performance of the current examination, the revised
Memorandum of marks and Original Diploma Certificate will be issued, else the submitted
originals will be returned.

12. RULES OF PROMOTION FROM 1ST YEAR TO 3,rd, 4,th 5th ,6th and 7th SEMESTERS:
A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided
he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto
10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%
and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate
who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time
before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee
as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training AP from time to
time before commencement of 4th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) Should not have failed in more than four Courses in 1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if
he/she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if
he/she clears at least two Courses in third semester.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

9
 A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
The first backlog exam in 5th semester will be conducted only in
instant/supplementary diploma examination.
For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pay the examination fee/
promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.

A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-

voce)
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th semester
Industrial Training
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th semester
Industrial Training.
b) should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.

B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he / she puts
in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds up to 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay
the 1st year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 rd
semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she
a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b). Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of attendance,

10
 which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-VOCE examination at
the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 7th semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.

A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th semester Examination.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
b) Should not have failed more than four backlog Courses of 3rd Semester

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this course. The
industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6 months) after the 6 th
semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%)
i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%
and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the 3rd semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester.

11
 b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 3rd
Semester.

v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 6th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.

vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee
prescribed by SBTET from time to time before commencement of the 7th semester
(Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
Important Note:
Seminar/Viva-voce should not be conducted for Not-Eligible Candidates, till the candidate
gets eligibility. However, the record of internal Assessment for Industrial Training for 260
marks shall be maintained at Institution Level for all candidates and the data is to be
uploaded only for eligible candidates. For not eligible candidates the data is to be
uploaded as and when the candidate gets eligibility.

OTHER DETAILS
a) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
b) The First spell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after the completion of
the last theory examination of 4th Semester.
c) The Second spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10 days after the
completion of first spell of Industrial training.

13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of pass.

12
 a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall
aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60% marks and
above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall aggregate of
below 60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for computing
overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3 rd and subsequent
Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into diploma
course at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of (100%) marks
secured at the 3rd and subsequent semesters of study shall be taken into
consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks secured by the
candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in the
regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations, from the year of first
admission.

14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical
Education and Training, AP from time to time.

15. STRUCTURE OF EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three unit tests for first year and two unit tests for semesters shall be conducted with a
duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of part A and
Part B.

Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions first
question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase answer/filling-in the
blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question. The other four questions are
short answer questions and carry three marks each.

Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice i.e., Either/Or
type , and each question carries 8 marks.

The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.

b) For drawing Courses:

For I year:
Three unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks shall be
conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.

Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries four
marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).

Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the student shall
answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each question in this part carries
a maximum marks of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).

13
 The sum of marks obtained in 3 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving
at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based
on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.

For semester: Two unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40
marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2 unit test marks shall be
reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are
awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performance during regular class
exercise

c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded based on
continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes and the remaining
50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the students in two tests.

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All questions are
to be answered and each carries 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.

Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 40 contains 5 essay type questions including Numerical
questions (without any divisions in the question), with internal choice(Either/or type),
each carrying 8 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 8 = 40.

Section ‘C’ with Max marks of 10 contains single essay type, Higher order Thinking skills
question (HoTs)including Numerical questions, without choice (without any divisions in
the question),

Thus the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.

b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.

Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in section
‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, i.e. 4 x 5=20.

Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall answer
any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question carries 10
Marks, i.e. 4 x 10 = 40.

c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick up a
question paper distributed by Lottery System.

14
 Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.

d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on

Drawing) hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the
Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared
by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per SBTET
rules in vogue.

16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of marks
without any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original memorandum of
marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from time to time.
17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:
Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-
engineering courses.
18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years & not more
than 6 / 7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the
course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

15
 i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years & not
more than 4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their
seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING& REVERIFICATION:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.

B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT

i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’ and
Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with Course
experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them in the
already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded separately,
without making any changes on the already valued answer script. The marks
awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).
II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the answer
script(s) placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12% of
maximum marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the result of the
candidate, such cases will not be referred to the next level i.e., for 2-Tier
evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than 12% of
maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12% of
maximum marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-verification, then the
status of the candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks
on Re-verification and if the marks secured on re-verification are still less
than the minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate remain FAIL only.

16
 (vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if any
therein on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are
revised, the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the candidate
has to forfeit the fee amount.

Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer

script would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted
to Malpractice in that examination.

20. MAL PRACTICE CASES:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be
booked and the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations in
vogue.
21. DISCREPANCIES/ PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP
within one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be
entertained in any manner.

22. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA

If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be
issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a
duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P., on
payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a First Class
Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceable certificate from the Department of Police. In case of
damage of original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by
surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of prescribed fee to the State
Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date
of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the SBTET AP
from time to time.

23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the
candidates who intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.

24. Equivalence with CME branch:

On comparison 80% of the curriculum is common for both DCME and DCCNE branches. It is
therefore recommended that the candidates with DCCNE may also be considered eligible for
lateral entry into the higher education on par with DCME.

25. GENERAL

i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students,

17
 for whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent
authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training,
AP are within the jurisdiction of Vijayawada.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.

COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

VISION

Develop Communication and Networking Engineers to be technologically adept, innovative,

self-motivated and responsible citizen with human values , high quality skills and to
contribute significantly towards ever changing Communication and Computer Networking
Technologies.

MISSION

M1 To provide opportunity to Diploma students who are capable of playing

pivotal role in wide aspects of modern Communication and Computer
Networking.
M2 To make the students understand basic concepts underlie in Communication
and Computer Networking and able to apply them creatively in different fields
of Network Engineering
M3 To train the student sensitive to the Environment, safety and economic
context.
M4 To produce technically skilled students through intensive training in
Communication and Computer Networkingtools and application and to
prepare the students for professional career as Network Engineers, Network
Administrators etc., `and further research.

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVIES(PEOs)

Communication and Computer Networkingprogramme is ever changing to transform students
into competent professionals with qualities, ethics and human values. On completion of the
integrated programme, the students should have acquired the following characteristics
PEO1 To produce best DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER
NETWORKING ENGINEERINGtechnicians by correlatinggrowing need of the
industries in modern topics with the academic input and giving the technical
knowledge for further learning.
PEO2 To prepare the students as productive Communication and Computer
Networking Engineers, possessing supportive and leadership skills in
multidisciplinary domains, expertise in Practical orientation, Communication
Skills and latest developments.

18
PEO3 To give the depth of related skills and expertise in a single field, and the ability
to collaborate with other disciplines and work at the Supervisory cadre.
PEO4 To promote the students in professionalism, by successful completion of the
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING
ENGINEERINGby emphasizing Field Practices in industry oriented activities.
PEO5 To sensitize the students on social and economic commitment and to inculcate
a nature to guard the values of community and protect environment.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

PSO1 Foundation of Communication and Computer Networking system: Ability to

understand the principles and working of computer, communication and Networking
systems and to assess the Communication and Computer Networkingaspects.
PSO2 Foundations of Software development: Ability to understand the structure and
development methodologies of software systems. Possess professional skills and
knowledge of software design process. Familiarity and practical competence with a
broad range of programming language and open source platforms.
PSO3 Foundation of mathematical concepts: Ability to apply mathematical methodologies to
solve computation task, model real world problem using appropriate data structure
and suitable algorithm, methodologies in developing Communication and computer
network related problem solutions as well as apply them in establishing new firms in
small scale with the help of experience gained as part of industrial training.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

Students completing DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

are anticipated to have the following abilities
PO1 Basic and Discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic mathematics, science
and engineering fundamentals and engineering specialization to solve the engineering
problems.
PO2 Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering problems using codified
standard methods.
PO3 Design/ development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined technical problems
and assist with the design of systems components or processes to meet specified needs.
PO4 Engineering Tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern engineering tools and
appropriate technique to conduct standard tests and measurements.
PO5 Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment: Apply appropriate
technology in context of society, sustainability, environment and ethical practices.
PO6 Project Management: Use engineering management principles individually, as a team
member or a leader to manage projects and effectively communicate about well-
defined engineering activities.
PO7 Life-long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engage in updating in the
context of technological changes.

19
 MAPPING OF PEOs WITH MISSIONS

PEO M1 M2 M3 M4
To produce best DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND    
COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERINGtechnicians by
correlating
growing need of the industries in modern topics with the
academic input and giving the technical knowledge for
further learning.
To prepare the students as productive Computer Engineers,    
possessing supportive and leadership skills in
multidisciplinary domains, expertise in Practical orientation,
Communication Skills and latest developments.
To give the depth of related skills and expertise in a single    
field, and the ability to collaborate with other disciplines
and work at the Supervisory cadre.
To promote the students in professionalism, by successful    
completion of the DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND
COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERINGby emphasizing
Field Practices in industry oriented activities.
To sensitize the students on social and economic    
commitment and to inculcate a nature to guard the values
of community and protect environment.
NOTE :

In some of the courses PO5,PO6 and PO7 strength is between 1 and 2,to strengthen
them, the following remedial measures for all the courses are suggested.

20
Short fall Remedial measures
in PO
By conducting
1)Guest lectures on motivational aspects and ethics
2) Concerned teacher will educate the students to follow ethics and morals in
developing solutions
PO5 3)Providing access to Online courses like Swayam program
4)Seminars by senior students to the junior students to assimilate the methods
followed by them to the juniors
5)Head of section will frequently visit and observe the activities being followed by the
students to correct their behaviour and to inculcate morals and ethics
They can achieve this from industrial training module scheduled in 6th semester of
this curriculum by observing, analyzing and applying the mathematical and scientific
PO6
fundamentals in solving the real time problems that will arise in day to day activities in
industry.
1. Providing access to Online courses like Swayam program
2. By utilizing Learning Management System(LMS) established by SBTET
PO7 3. By subscribing e-magazines/ print magazines to the institute library and made
them accessible to the students.
4. By arranging Guest lectures from the technical experts.

21
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(FIRST YEAR)

Instruction
Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week Total
Sub Code Name of the Subject Periods End
Per Year Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS

CCN-101 English-I 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

CCN-102 Engineering Mathematics - I 5 - 150 3 20 80 100

CCN-103 Engineering Physics 4 - 120 3 20 80 100

Engineering Chemistry and

CCN-104 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Environmental studies

Basics of Communication and

CCN-105 Computer Networking 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
Engineering

CCN-106 Programming in C 5 - 150 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100

CCN-108 Programming in C Lab 6 180 3 40 60 100

Physics Lab - 1.5 20 30 50

3 90
CCN-109
Chemistry Lab - 1.5 20 30 50

CCN-110 Computer Fundamentals Lab 3 90 3 40 60 100

Total 24 18 - 1000

CCN-101,102,103,104,107,109,110 common with all branches

CCN-106,108 common with DIT,DCME,DAIE,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE branches

22
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(III Semester)

Instruction
Total Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject End
Per Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Semester Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS

CCN-301 Mathematics –II 4 60 3 20 80 100

CCN-302 Python Programming 5 - 75 3 20 100

80

CCN-303 Operating systems 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Data Communication and

CCN-304 6 - 90 3 20 80 100
Computer Networks

CCN-305 DBMS 6 - 90 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-306 Python Programming Lab - 3 45 3 40 60

100

Computer Hardware and 90

CCN-307 - 6 3 40 60 100
Network Maintenance Lab

CCN-308 DBMS Lab 4 60 3 40 60 100

CCN-309 Multimedia Lab 4 60 3 40 60 100

Total 25 17 630 260 640 900

CCN-301 common with all branches
CCN-302common with DAIME,DCBDE branches&CM-505 of DCME,IT-404 of DIT,WD-505 of DWDE
CCN-303 common with DAIME,DCME,DIT,DWDE branch
CCN-305 common with DCME,DIT,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE branches& AI-404 of DAIE
CCN-306common with DAIME,DCBDE branches& CM-507 of DCME,IT—407 of DIT
CCN-307 common with DAIME,DCBDE branches
CCN- 308common with DCME,DIT,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE branches& AI-409 of DAIE
CCN-309 common with DCME,DIT,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE branches& AI-507 of DAIE

23
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(IV Semester)

InstructionPeriods/
Scheme Of Examinations
Week Total
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject End
Per Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Semester Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY SUBJECTS

CCN-401 Mathematics III 3 - 45 3 20 80 100

CCN-402 Web Technologies 5 75 3 20 80 100

-
Digital Electronics and
CCN-403 6 - 90 3 20 80 100
Computer Organisation

CCN-404 Java Programming 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

Cryptography and
CCN-405 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Network Security

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-406 Web Technologies Lab 6 90 3 40 60 100

-
Java Programming Lab
CCN-407 6 90 3 40 60 100
with mini-Project -

CCN-408 Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

Computer Networks and

CCN-409 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Security Lab
Total 23 19 630 - 260 640 900

CCN-401&408 common with all branches

CCN-407 common with DAIME,DCBDE branches
CCN-403 common with AI-405 of DAIE
CCN-404 common with DAIME,DCBDE branches& CM/IT-502 of DCME & DIT,WD-502 of DWDE,AI-
303 of DAIE
CCN-402,406 common with DCME,DIT,DAIME,DCBDE branches

24
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(V Semester)

Instruction
Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week Total
Sub Code Name of the Subject Periods Per End
Semester Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY SUBJECTS
Industrial Management
CCN-501 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
and Entrepreneurship

CCN-502 Wireless Networks 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

CCN-503 Software Engineering 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

CCN-504 Internet Of Things 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

CCN-505 High Speed Networks 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-506 Wireless Networks Lab - 4 60 3 40 60 100

Advanced Computer
CCN-507 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Networks Lab
CCN-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
CCN-509 Project work - 6 90 3 40 60 100

Total 25 17 630 - 260 640 900

CCN-501 common with DCME,DIT,DAIE,DAME,DCBDE,DWDE

CCN-503 common with DCME,DIT,DAME,DCBDE
CCN-504 common with DCME,DIT,DAIE,DAME, DCBDE,DWDE
CCN-508 common with all branches

25
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(VI Semester)

CCN-601 Industrial Training

SI. Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First outcomes by
Assessment at both the
120
Industry (After faculty and
12 Weeks) training
mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the
the Industry 120
faculty and
(After 22
Industrial 6 months training
1 weeks))
Training mentor of the
industry
Final Training
20
Summative Report
assessment at Demonstration
institution level of any one of
30
the skills listed
in learning
outcomes

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

 The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
 If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training.
 Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the
concerned section in the institution.

26
 The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at
industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level
put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.
 If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level,
the student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.
 Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including Head of
the section, External examiner and Faculty members who assessed the students during
Industrial Training as members.

27
FIRST YEAR

28
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(FIRST YEAR)

Instruction
Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week Total
Sub Code Name of the Subject Periods End
Per Year Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS

CCN-101 English-I 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

CCN-102 Engineering Mathematics - I 5 - 150 3 20 80 100

CCN-103 Engineering Physics 4 - 120 3 20 80 100

Engineering Chemistry and

CCN-104 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Environmental studies

Basics of Communication and

CCN-105 Computer Networking 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
Engineering

CCN-106 Programming in C 5 - 150 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100

CCN-108 Programming in C Lab 6 180 3 40 60 100

Physics Lab - 1.5 20 30 50

3 90
CCN-109
Chemistry Lab - 1.5 20 30 50

CCN-110 Computer Fundamentals Lab 3 90 3 40 60 100

Total 24 18 - 1000

CCN-101,102,103,104,107,109,110 common with all branches

CCN-106,108 common with DIT,DCME,DAIE,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE branches

29
 Marks
Course Code Course Title No. of Periods/Week Total No. of Periods Marks for SA
for FA

CCN- 101 English 3 90 20 80

No of Periods COs Mapped

S. No. Unit Title

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

Total Periods 90

To improve the skills of English Language use by enriching vocabulary and

learning accurate structures for effective communication.
Course Objectives
To comprehend themes for value based living in professional and personal
settings.

30
 CO No. Course Outcomes

Applies perceptions of themes related to societal responsibility of adolescents towards

their surroundings.
CO1

Demonstrates knowledge of form and function of ‘grammar items’ and use them in
CO2 both academic and everyday situations.
Demonstrates effective English communication skills with competence in listening,
CO3 speaking, reading and writing in academic, professional and everyday contexts.

Displays positivity and values of harmonious living in personal and professional spheres
CO4
as reflected through communication.

CO-PO Matrix

Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 90

CCN-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 4

Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of

Remarks
POs with CO Column 1 Mapping
No. Number Percentage (1,2,3)

PO1
Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities that
PO2 use content from science and technology relevant to the
PO3 Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for
communication in the Course.
PO4

CO1, CO2, >50%: Level 3

PO5 20 22
CO3, CO4

CO1, CO2,
PO6 52 58 21-50%: Level 2
CO3, CO4

CO1, CO2,
PO7 18 20
CO3, CO4 Up to 20%: Level 1

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

31
Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7

CO 1
  
CO 2
  
CO3
  
CO 4
  

NOTE: CO-PO groups shall be fulfilled through activities that use content from science and
technology relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for
communication in the Course.

PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.

PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be

planned and conducted.

PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

32
 Blue Print of Question Paper:
Marks Wise Question Wise
CO's
Distribution of Distribution of
S. Periods Weightage Mapped
Name of the Unit Weightage Weightage
No. Allocated Allocated
A
R U Ap An R U Ap
n
English for 1 CO1, CO2,
1 8 3
Employability CO3, CO4
1 1* CO1, CO2,
2 Living in Harmony 8 3
17 8* 1* CO3, CO4

3 Connect with Care 8 3 CO1, CO2,

CO3, CO4
Humour for 1 CO1, CO2,
4 8 3
Happiness 1* CO3, CO4
14
8*
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 3 1 CO1, CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1, CO2,
6 Preserve or Perish 9 3
1 CO3, CO4
14 8* 1*
The Rainbow of CO1, CO2,
7 8 3
Diversity 1 CO3, CO4
New Challenges - CO1, CO2,
8 8
Newer Ideas CO3, CO4
8*+
CO1, CO2,
9 The End Point First! 8 8* 3+3 1* 4
1 CO3, CO4
+3
35 10* * CO1, CO2,
10 The Equal Halves 8
CO3, CO4
CO1, CO2,
Dealing with
11 9 CO3, CO4
Disasters
TOTAL 90 80 6 30 34 10 2 5 8 1

PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks All Questions are compulsory : 60 minutes
PART-B: 5 Questions 8 marks each =40 Marks Internal choice : 90 minutes
Part-C: 1 Question 10 marks =10 Marks
(Higher Order Question) No choice, one compulsory question : 30 minutes

NOTE: * indicates questions can be given from any of the corresponding lessons in the blue print.
Question Paper Pattern for Unit Tests

Part A: 16 marks: 4 questions with 1 mark each (FIB, True/false, one word/phrase, etc.)
4 questions with 3 marks each (short answer/ descriptive/ applicative questions)
Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions 8 marks each with internal choice

33
Learning Outcomes

1. English for Employability

1.1. Explain the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences

2. Living in Harmony

2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships

2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually

3. Connect with Care

3.1. Use social media with discretion

3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues for everyday situations

4. Humour for Happiness

4.1. Explain the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Display reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Explain the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary step
for writing a good paragraph.

5. Never Ever Give Up!

5.1. Practice to deal with failures in life
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking and
writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills

6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Describe the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment
6.4. Write e-mails

7. The Rainbow of Diversity

34
7.1. Illustrate and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. Use different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations

8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas

8.1. Explain the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. List the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Explain latest innovations and get motivated

9. The End Point First!

9.1. Illustrate the importance of setting a goal in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life

10. The Equal Halves

10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing

11. Dealing with Disasters

11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Write different kinds of reports

Textbook: INTERACT (A Textbook for I Year English) - Published by SBTET, AP

Reference Books:
Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised
ByN.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT Books, S.
Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan

35
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION- A.P
Model Question Paper
C20-COMMON-101- ENGLISH
Time: 3hrs Max.Marks:80
PART-A 10X3=30 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries three marks.

1. a) Fill in the blanks with suitable articles:

I have seen _____________ European at ____________local market.
b) Fill in with proper form of adjective given in the bracket:
China is the ___________country in the world. (Populous, more populous, mostpopulous)
c) i) Choose the synonym from the following for the word : ‘filthy’
Dirty/ clean/ hygienic/ tidy
ii) Choose the antonym from the following for the word: ‘exterior’
External/ internal/ open/ interior
*(Question1: Remembering- Mapping with CO2 &CO3)

2. a) i) Give prefix for the word: ‘popular’

ii) Write suffix for the word : ‘king’
b) He was married ______ her ______ January 2015. (Fill in with appropriate preposition)
c) Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B:
Column-A Column-B
i) Dynamic a) tasty
ii) Gloomy b) active
c) sad
d) proud

*( Question 2 : Remembering- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

3. a) The old man hunted for his spectacles. ( Give the contextual meaning of the word
in italics)
b) The committee / have submitted / its report / to the President. ( identify the
part which contains an error )
c) recently has a scooter purchased Shanthi. ( Rearrange the jumbled words to
make a meaningful sentence.)
*( Question 3 : Understanding- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

4. a) Use the following primary auxiliary verb in sentence of your own:

‘ does’
b) Fill in the blank with proper modal auxiliary verb based on the clue in the bracket:
Harish __________ speak four languages. ( ability)
c) Rakesh wants two hundred rupees from his father. ( Write the sentence how he requests his
father)
*( Question 4 : Applying - Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

5. Fill in the blanks with suitable form of the verb given in brackets:

36
 a) He ______ (go) for a walk daily.
b) The bus ________ ( arrive) just now.
c) We _______ (live) in Chennai since 2005.
*( Question 5 : Applicative- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

6. Change the voice of the following sentences:

a) English is spoken all over the world.
b) They watched a movie yesterday.
c) The Chief Minister will inaugurate the exhibition.

*( Question 6 : Applicative- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

7. a) It is a beautiful rainbow. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence)

b) C.V. Raman won the Nobel Prize in 1930. ( Frame a question using ‘When’)
c) He can swim across the river. ( change into ‘Yes / No’ question )

*( Question 7 : Applicative- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

8. Change the speech of the following:

a) He said, “I will go to Delhi tomorrow.”
b) Ravi said to Ashok, “ Where are you going?”
c) She told him to mind his own business.

*( Question 8 : Applicative- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

9. Rewrite as directed:
a) In spite of being busy he attended the meeting. ( Rewrite the sentence using ‘though’ )
b) She is poor. She is honest. ( combine the two sentences using ‘but’)
c) On seeing the tiger, he climbed a tree. ( split into two simple sentences)

*( Question 9 : Applicative- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

10. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections:

a) We have gone to picnic yesterday.
b) Suresh watched T.V when I went to his house.
c) They left Gujarat before the earthquake occurred.

*( Question 10 : Applicative- Mapping with CO2 & CO3 )

PART-B 5X8=40

37
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
11. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on what you do daily.
OR
Write a paragraph in about 100 words on the uses and misuses of social media.

*( Question 11 : Understanding - Mapping with CO1, CO3 & CO4 )

12. Construct a dialogue of at least five turns between an American and you about places worth
visiting in your city.
OR
Compose a dialogue of at least five turns between two friends, one favouring homemade food and
the other, fast food.

*( Question 12 : Applying - Mapping with CO1, CO3 & CO4 )

13. Write a letter to your parents about your preparation for year-end examinations.
OR
Write a letter to the editor of a newspaper about the inconvenience caused due to loud speakers in
your area.

*( Question 13 : Understanding - Mapping with CO1, CO3 & CO4 )

14. Write an essay in about 120 words on measures to prevent water pollution.
OR
Write an essay in about 120 words on importance of gender equality.
*( Question 14 : Applying - Mapping with CO1, CO3 & CO4 )
15. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
A farmer in ancient China had a neighbour who was a hunter, and who owned ferocious and poorly
trained hunting dogs. They jumped over the fence frequently and chased the farmer's lambs. The
farmer asked his neighbour to keep his dogs in check, but this fell on deaf ears. One day the dogs
again jumped the fence, attacked and severely injured several of the lambs.
The farmer had had enough, and went to town to consult a judge who listened carefully to the story
and said: "I could punish the hunter and instruct him to keep his dogs chained or lock them up. But
you would lose a friend and gain an enemy. Which would you rather have, friend or foe for a
neighbour?" The farmer replied that he preferred a friend. “Alright, I will offer you a solution that
keeps your lambs safe, and which will keep your a neighbour a friend." Having heard the judge's
solution, the farmer agreed.
Once at home, the farmer immediately put the judge's suggestions to the test. He took three of his
best lambs and presented them to his neighbour's three small sons, who were beside themselves
with joy and began to play with them. To protect his son's newly acquired playthings, the hunter
built a strong kennel for his dogs. Since then, the dogs never again bothered the farmer's lambs. Out
of gratitude for the farmer's generosity toward his sons, the hunter often shared the game he had
hunted with the farmer. The farmer reciprocated by sending the hunter the cheese he had made.
Within a short time the neighbours became good friends.
a) What kind of dogs does the neighbour have?

38
 b) When did the farmer consult the judge?
c) What would be the consequence if the judge punished the neighbour?
d) What was the solution suggested by the judge?
e) What did the neighbour’s sons do with the gifts they received?
f) How did the dogs stop bothering the farmer’s lambs?
g) What items are exchanged happily between the two neighbours?
h) Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘a closed shelter for dogs’.
OR
Read the following short poem and answer the questions that follow:
Crisp in the winter’s morning,
Softly all through the night,
What is this without warning,
Falling and white?

I have never seen snow,

But I can imagine it quite –
Not how it tastes, but I know,
It falls and is white.

One morning I’ll open the door,

To bring in the morning’s milk,
And all around there’ll be snow –
Fallen and still.

How I’ll roll in the stuff!

How I’ll tumble and spin!
Until the neighbours cry,
Enough!And send me back in.
Q.1. What is the poem about?
2. How does snow fall?
3. Did you ever touch snow? How did you feel?
4. a) Pick the word from the poem that means ‘slip and fall’
b) Write the antonym for the word ‘soft’
*( Question 15 : Understanding - Mapping with CO1, CO3 & CO4 )

SECTION – C 1X10=10 Marks

16. Write a report on the blood donation camp organized by International Red Cross Society in your
college. Use the following clues: date, time, place, arrangements, donors, equipment, doctors,
response, sponsors, snacks, volunteers, help others, save lives…etc.
*( Question 16 : Applying - Mapping with CO1, CO3 & CO4 )

39
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C20-COMMON-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-1
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40
PART-A 4X4= 16 marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR Marks.
1. Rewrite / Fill in the blank as directed. Each question carries ½ Mark. (CO1,CO2)
a) Write the antonym of ‘cruel’ CO2
b) Write the synonym of ‘love’ CO2
c) Give prefix to ‘adventure’. CO2
d) Give suffix to ‘ liberate’ CO2
e) It is _______ universal truth. (Fill in with suitable article) CO1
f) The boy is fond ____ ice-cream. ( Fill in the blank with proper preposition) CO1
g) He ____not like sweets. (Fill in the blank with correct primary auxiliary verb.) CO1
h) We ________ respect our national flag. ( Fill in with a proper modal verb) CO1
2. Rewrite the sentences as directed. Each question carries One mark. 4X1=4 Marks CO1
a) No other metal is so useful as iron. ( Change into superlative degree)
b) Very few students are so clever as Ramesh. ( Change into comparative degree)
c) Guess the contextual meaning of the italicized word in the following sentence.
“The CBI officer has interrogated the bank employees in connection with the scam.”
d) only sings plays Prasanth not also well but cricket. ( Rearrange the jumbled words)
3. Fill in the blanks with proper form of the verb given in brackets. 4X1 = 4 marks CO1
The IPSGM _________(hold) in our college last month. Nearly all the colleges in our zone
______(participate) in the event. The prizes ________ (distribute) by the district collector.
Next year, Government Polytechnic, Vijayawada __________ (conduct) the games meet.
4. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: 4X 1= 4 Marks CO1
a) The police has arrested the culprit.
b) Three hundred miles are a long distance.
c) The Principal along with the Heads of Sections have visited the laboratories.
d) Either he or I is to blame.
PART-B 3X8=24 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions and each question carries EIGHT marks.
5. Write a dialogue of at least five turns between a shopkeeper and customer about buying a mobile
phone. CO3

6. Make an analysis and write a paragraph in around 100 words about your strengths and
weaknesses in learning and using English and also the measures to improve it. CO3

7. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on how to overcome low esteem and negativity. CO3

40
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C20-COMMON-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-II
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40

PART-A 4X4= 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR marks.
1. Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B CO2
Column A Column B
a) Deserve i) continuous
b) hidden ii) protect
c) Preserve iii) worthy
d) Incessant iv) praise
v) unseen
vi) affection
2. Rewrite as directed: CO1
a) You ask your Mom to give you another chocolate. ( Change into a request)
b) The baby fell down and got injured. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence)
c) The match was very interesting. ( Frame a question using ‘how’)
d) Hemanth submitted his project report last week. (Frame Yes-No question)
3. Fill in the blanks with appropriate forms of verbs given in brackets: CO1
a) The Sun ______ (set) in the west.
b) Balu ______ (sing) for over fifty years in the films.
c) We _________ (see) a camel on the road yesterday.
d) They _______(enter) the stadium before the gates were closed.
4. Change the voice of the following: CO1
a) Marconi invented the radio.
b) Sravanthi has been offered a job.
c) Pragathi can type the letter.
d) The Chief Guest will be received by the Final year students.

PART-B 3X8=24 Marks

Answer all the questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. CO3
5. Write a letter to your younger brother motivating him to deal with failures and hurdles in life.
6. Write an essay in around120 words on the role of robots in the modern world.
7. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
The greatest enemy of mankind, as people have discovered, is not science, but war. Science
merely reflects the social forces by which it is surrounded. It was found that when there is peace,
science is constructive when there is war, science is perverted to destructive end. The weapons
which science gives us do not necessarily create war. These make war increasingly more terrible.
Until now, it has brought us on the doorstep of doom. Our main problem, therefore, is not to curb
science, but to substitute law for force, and international government for anarchy in the relations of
one nation with another. That is a job in which everybody must participate, including the scientists.
Now we are face to face with these urgent questions: Can education and tolerance, understanding

41
and creative intelligence run fast enough to keep us side by side without our mounting capacity to
destroy? That is the question which we shall have to answer, one way or the other, in this
generation. Science must help us in the answer, but the main decision lies within ourselves. The hour
is late and our work has scarcely begun.
a. What is the chief enemy of man?
b. What does science reflect?
c. When is science perverted?
d. What makes war more terrible?
e. Why do we need international government?
f. What are the four aspects that may stop destruction?
g. Have we really started our work to fight the problem discussed?
h. Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘replace with other one’

42
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C20-COMMON-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-III
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40
PART-A 4X4 = 16 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question caries Four marks.
1. Give the meaning of the word in italics: CO1 CO2
a) When the girls laughed in the class, the teacher was furious.
b) He was rusticated from the school for his misbehaviour.
c) Vikramaditya was a benevolent Indian King.
d) We should not show any discrimination between boys and girls.
2. Change the speech of the following: CO2
a) He said, “I am sorry.”
b) The teacher said to the boys, “Why are you late?”
c) Sushma said that she had submitted her report recently.
d) Pratap requested Priya to give him her pen.
3. Rewrite as directed: CO2
a) Though he was weak, he took the test. ( change into a simple sentence)
b) You must work hard to achieve success. ( change into a complex sentence)
c) If you run fast, you will catch the bus. ( change into a compound sentence)
d) The fog disappeared when the Sun rose. ( Split into two simple sentences)
4. Locate eight errors from the following passage and correct them. CO3, CO1

Once upon a time there live a king who was very kind to his people. In his council of
ministers, there is a wise man. He had a son called Sumanth who was a educated and highly
learned. Once the wise minister fall sick. All the physicists in the country could not heal him. Then
Sumanth will go in search of medicine in Himalayas. He bring the special medicinal roots to cure his
father’s sickness. Sumanth looked before his father carefully and healed him. The king rewarded
Sumanth with rich gifts.

PART- B 3X8 = 24 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions and each one carries eight marks. CO3
5. Read the following paragraph and make notes first and then its summary.
Astronauts are people who travel on space ships. They need to have a very clean home. They
travel far from Earth. We need clean kitchens everywhere on earth and in space. Astronauts
have to solve two problems: how to get food and how to keep their spaceship clean. Here is how
they solved the food problem. At first, the astronauts took tubes of food with them into space.
They would squeeze a tube and eat semi-liquid food. It did not taste great, but since they did not
need to take dishes or silverware with them, they had no dishes to wash. Today’s spaceships
have a bigger menu. Astronauts can eat from bowls. In fact, they take cereal and other standard
foods with them. The foods are packaged in special containers to keep them fresh. They use
knives, forks, and spoons. One unusual item on their table is a pair of scissors. They use the
scissors to open the food packages. They can eat right from the package. They have a kitchen on
the spaceship. Its oven can heat food to 170 degrees. The kitchen has water and sets of meals

43
that come on trays. The astronauts choose their menu before they go into space. They take a lot
of food with them. The astronauts keep bread and fresh fruits and vegetables in a special food
locker. How do they keep the kitchen clean? They do not have to worry about mice or other
rodents. They make sure that there are no rodents before the ship leaves. But sometimes mice
travel on the ship. Those mice are part of experiments. They live in cages. How do astronauts
keep their trays clean? That is another health problem the astronauts solve. They need to stay
healthy in space. To carry a lot of water to wash trays would be a lot of extra weight. They pack
wet wipes in plastic bags. They use them to clean trays. So, their kitchen is clean and they stay
healthy.
6. Write an essay in about 120 words on the importance of goal setting and your short and long
term goals.
7. Write a report about the bush fire that raged in Australia recently by using the following
clues: forest, natural disaster, wild fire, dried leaves, no rain fall, wild animals, burnt alive,
loss of flora and fauna, fire fighters, uncontrollable, moderate rains, environmental
pollution, measures to protect...etc.

44
 Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Title
Code Periods/week periods FA SA

Engineering
CCN-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Algebra 31 CO1

2 Trigonometry 44 CO2

3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3

4 Differential Calculus 33 CO4

5 Applications of Differentiation 19 CO4, CO5

Total Periods 150

(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-Ordinate

Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
Course Objectives (ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.

CO1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve

problems on matrices.
Course Outcomes
CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions,
their inverses and complex numbers.

CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and
conic sections in coordinate system.

CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

CO5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using

differentiation.

45
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I

COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES

Learning Outcomes

UNIT - I

C.O. 1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices.

L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pairs and Cartesian product - examples.

1.2 Explain Relations and functions – examples

1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.

1.4 Classify types of functions (into, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective).

1.5 Define inverse functions - examples.

1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.

1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned
below into partial fractions

f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )

f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2

1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix

1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square
matrices).

1.10 Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as associative, distributive,
commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.

1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties;

46
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples Resolve square
matrix into a sum of a symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices and provide
examples.

1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix, minor, co-factor of an element of a

3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix

using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of determinants
to solve problems.

1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse of

a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.

1.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and
matrix inversion method

47
 UNIT - II

C.O.2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and
complex numbers.

L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle.

2.2 List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified values.

2.3 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions

2.4 Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.

2.5 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),

tan(A±B) and cot(A±B)

2.6 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,

cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.

2.7 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.

2.8 Solve simple problems on compound angles.

2.9 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles

A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.

2.10 Derive useful allied formulas like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.

2.11 Solve simple problems using the above formulae

48
 Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

2.12 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two

trigonometric ratios into a product and vice versa, examples on these
formulae.

2.13 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or

product of three or more terms.

2.14 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by

selecting an appropriate domain and range.

2.15 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains
and ranges.

2.16 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given

A= sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions

with examples.

2.17 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like


sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc.
2

 x y 
2.18 Apply formulae like tan 1 x  tan 1 y  tan 1   , where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc.,
 1  xy 
to solve Simple problems

2.19 Explain what is meant by solutions of trigonometric equations and find the
general solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.

2.20 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0, a cos x + b sin x=c etc., and
problems using simple transformations.

49
2.21 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.

2.22 Explain the formulae for sin A/2, cos A/2, tan A/2 and cot A/2 in terms of semi-
perimeter s and sides a,b,c and solve problems.

2.23 List various formulae for the area of a triangle.

2.24 Solve problems using the above formulae.

2.25 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.

2.26 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.

2.27 Define complex number, its modulus, conjugate and list their properties.

2.28 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.

2.29 Define amplitude of a complex number

2.30 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude

(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.

2.31 Write DeMoivre’s theorem (without proof) and illustrate with simple
examples.

50
 UNIT - III

Coordinate Geometry

C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in
coordinate system.

L.O. 3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form,
slope- intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form or
perpendicular form.

3.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms

3.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines,
intersection of two non parallel lines and distance between two parallel
lines.

3.4 Define locus of a point and define a circle.

3.5 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.

3.6 Find the equation of a circle given (i) centre and radius, (ii) two ends of a
diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear
points.

3.7. Define a conic section.

3.8 Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a
conic with illustrations.

3.9 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given

3.10 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on above.

Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

51
C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x)  l and state the
xa

properties of limits .

f ( x) f ( x)
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and lim
x l g ( x) x  g ( x)

xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
4.3 Mention the Standard limits lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x
1 x
ex 1  1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1   (without proof) and solve the problems
x 0 x x 0 x   x
using these standard limits.

4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval

with some examples whether a given function is continuous or not.

4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle
as lim f ( x  h)  f ( x) and also provide standard notations to denote the
h 0 h
derivative of a function.

4.6 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.

4.7 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x,
tanx,Secx,Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.

4.8 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.

52
 4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.

4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)

with illustrative examples.

4.11 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples using the
Trigonometric transformations.

4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another

function and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.

4.13 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.

4.14 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with
examples.

4.15 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with
examples like [f(x)]g(x).

4.16 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third
order with examples.

4.17 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.

4.18 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n

4.19 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple
problems.

53
C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.

L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the
curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.

5.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the
equation of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.

5.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on
the curve y=f(x) .

5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the
velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.

5.5 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities
like volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.

5.6 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.

5.7 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or
decreasing with illustrative examples.

5.8 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function
of single variable- simple problems yielding maxima and minima.

5.9 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes
etc.

5.10 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in simple
problems.

Syllabus for Unit test-III completed

54
 CO/PO – Mapping

CCN- PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
102

CO1 3 2 1 2 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1

CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 1

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 2.6 2.5 2 3 2.4 2

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

Note:

PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.

PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be

planned and conducted.

PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.

PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.

PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

55
 C-20

Engineering Mathematics – I

PO- CO – Mapping strength

CO periods addressing PO in
Mapped with Level
PO no column I Remarks
CO no (1,2 or 3)
No %

CO1, CO2,
1 150 100% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5
>40% Level 3
CO1, CO2,
2 138 92% 3 Highly
CO3,CO4,CO5
addressed
CO1, CO2,
3 133 88.6% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5
25% to 40%
CO1, CO2,
4 120 80% 3 Level 2
CO3,CO4,CO5
Moderately
5 addressed

7 5% to 25%
Level 1 Low
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, addressed
150 100% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5

PSO 2 CO1, CO2,

135 90% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 <5% Not
addressed
PSO 3 CO1, CO2,
125 83.3% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5

56
 C-20

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra

1. Relations and Functions:

Define Set, Ordered pairs, Cartesian product, Relations, functions, domain & range of functions.
Describe types of functions (in-to, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective) and inverse
functions – examples.

2. Partial Fractions:

Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational fractions in to
their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.

f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii )
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )

f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x 2  a 2 )(bx  c) ( x 2  a 2 )( x 2  b2 )

3. Matrices:

Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two

matrices, sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-
Symmetric, skew symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a
square matrix-Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non singular
matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix- examples-System of linear
equations in 3 variables-Solutions by Cramers’s rule and Matrix inversion method-
examples.

Unit-II

Trigonometry

4.Trigonometric ratios:

Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified

values, draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.

57
5. Compound angles:

Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B),and related identities with problems.

6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:

Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and submultiple angle A/2

with problems.

7.Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa simple problems

8. Inverse trigonometric functions:

Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.

9. Trigonometric equations:

Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations :

sinx =k , cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations,
equations involving usage of transformations- problems.

10.Properties of triangles:

Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and
projection rule-area of a triangle- problems.

11. Hyperbolic functions:

Definitions of hyperbolic functions, identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic

functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.

12. Complex Numbers:

Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex number,

Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitue (polar) form ,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number- Problems. DeMoivre’s theorem.

UNIT-III

Coordinate geometry

13 Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular distance
from a point, distance between parallel lines-examples.

58
14. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three
non collinear points - general equation of a circle – finding centre, radius.

15. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity
are given. properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.

UNIT-IV

Differential Calculus

16. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple Problems-
Continuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.

17. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives of

elementary functions- problems. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse trigonometric
functions, derivative of a function with respect to another function, derivative of parametric
functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems
in each case. Higher order derivatives - examples – functions of several variables - partial
differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple problems.

UNIT-V

Applications of Derivatives:

18. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a curve at
any point. Lengths of tangent, normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve at any
point - problems.

19. Physical applications of the derivative – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate

measure –Problems.

20. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing
functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.

21. Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the absolute error,
relative and percentage errors and approximate values due to errors in measuring.

59
Textbook:

Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:

1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand&Co.

2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4 th Edition,
Schaum’s Series

3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.

4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series

60
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question

S. Chapter/ Weightage COs
No of Periods distribution of wise distribution
No Unit title Allotted mapped
weightage of weightage
Unit - I : Theor An A
Practice R U Ap R U Ap
Algebra y n

Relations and
1 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1
Functions

2 Partial Fractions 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1

Matrices and
3 10 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO 1
Determinants

Unit - II :
Trigonometry

Trigonometric
4 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Ratios

Compound
5 3 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Angles

Multiple and
6 Submultiple 4 4 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
angles

7 Transformations 3 3

Inverse 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
8 Trigonometric 3 2
Functions

Trigonometric
9 3 2
Equations
8 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 CO2
Properties of
10 3 2
triangles

Hyperbolic
11 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Functions

Complex
12 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Numbers

Unit III : Co-ordinate Geometry

13 Straight Lines 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO3

14 Circle 3 2 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO3

61
15 Conic Sections 8 4

Unit – IV : Differential Calculus

Limits and
16 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO4
Continuity

17 Differentiation 17 10 14 3 11 0 0 1 2 0 0 CO4

Unit - V : Applications of Differentiation

Geometrical
18 3 2
Applications

Physical
19 2 2
Applications
10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 CO5
Maxima and
20 3 4
Minima

Errors and
21 2 1
Approximations

Total 89 61 80 15 39 16 10 5 8 2 1

R: Remembering Type : 15 Marks

U: understanding Type : 39 Marks

Ap: Application Type : 16 Marks

An: Analysing Type : 10 Marks

Engineering Mathematics – I

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.11

Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.12 to L.O. 3.10

Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.10

62
 Unit Test I C –20, CCN-102
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: CCN-102
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each.

1. Answer the following.

a. If f ( x)  x 2 and domain  1,0,1 , then find range. (CO1)

1 2
b. If A  , then find 3A. (CO1)
3 4 
0
c. Write the value of Sin120 (CO2)
d. Write the formula for tan 2A in terms of tan A (CO2)

2. If f : R  R is defined by f ( x)  3x  5 , then prove that f ( x) is onto. (CO1)

1 3   2 4
3. If A  B  then find 2 A  3B (CO1)
 4 9   3 1 
,

3
4. Prove that Sin2 450  Sin2150  (CO2)
4
sin 2 A
5. Prove that  cot A (CO2)
1  cos 2 A

Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks

(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation

is the content but not the length of the answer.

2x
6. A) Resolve into partial fractions.(CO1)
( x  1)( x  3)
63
 or

x4
B) Resolve into partial fractions.(CO1)
x  3x  2
2

7. A) Using cramer’s rule to solve

x  y  z  2,2x  3 y  4z  4,3x  y  z  8 (CO1)

or

bc bc 1
B) Prove that ca c  a 1  (a  b)(b  c)(c  a) (CO1)
ab a  b 1

 1 2 2 
8. A) Find the adjoint of Matrix  1 3 5  (CO1)
 
 2 7 4 
or

 2 3 4  3 1 5
B) If A  5 7 9 ; B   2 1 4  , find AB and BA and verify if AB  BA .
 
   
 2 1 3   0 3 1 
(CO1)

-o0o-

64
 Unit Test II C –20, CCN-102

State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P

First Year
Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: CCN- 102
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following.

CD CD
a. sin C  sin D  2cos   sin   : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
 2   2 
b. If z  2  3i , then find z (CO2)

e x  e x
c. sinh x  : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
2
d. Write the eccentricity of rectangular hyperbola. (CO3)

2. Express (3  4i)(7  2i) in terms of a  ib (CO2)

3. Find the perpendicular distance from (1,1) to the line 2 x  3 y  1  0 (CO3)
4. Find the angle between lines 2 x  y  3  0 and x  y  2  0 (CO3)
Find the centre and radius of the circle x  y  2 x  4 y  4  0 (CO3)
2 2
5.
Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks

(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation

is the content but not the length of the answer.

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6

6. A) Prove that  tan 4 .(CO2)
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
or

65
 1 1 1 
tan 1  tan 1  tan 1 
B) Prove that 2 5 8 4 (CO2)

7. A) Solve 2sin 2   sin   1  0 (CO2)

or

In any ABC , If B  60 then

c a
B)
0
  1 (CO2)
ab bc

8. A) Find the equation of circle with (2,3) and (6,9) as the end points of diameter and
also find centre and radius of circle. (CO3)
or

A) Find the equation of ellipse whose focus is (1, 1) , directrix is x  y  3  0 and
eccentricity is 1/2.(CO3)

-o0o-

66
 Unit Test III C –20, CCN-102
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: CCN-102
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following.

x2  1
a. Find lim (CO4)
x 1 x  5

sin 2
b. lim  2 : State TRUE/FALSE (CO4)
 0 
c.
d
dx
 3tan 1 x   ? (CO4)
d. Formula for percentage error in x is _________ . (CO5)

x5  32
2. Evaluate lim 2 (CO4)
x 2 x  4

Find the derivative of 3tan x  4log x  7 w.r.t. x (CO4)

x
3.
4. Differentiate x 2 sin x w.r.t. x (CO4)
2x  3
5. Find the derivative of (CO4)
3x  4
Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks

(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation

is the content but not the length of the answer.

 2x   2x 
6. A) Find the derivative of sin 1  2 
w.r.t. tan 1  2 
(CO4)
 1 x   1 x  .
or

dy
if y  x
cos x
B) Find (CO4)
dx

67
 x4  y 4
7. A) Verify Euler’s theorem when u ( x, y )  (CO4)
x y
or

Find the equation of tangent and normal to the curve 3 y  x  6 x  17 at (4,3)

2
B)

(CO5)

8. A) Circular patch of oil spreads on water and the area is growing at the rate of
8 sqcm / min .
How fast is the radius increasing when radius is 5cm . (CO5)
or

Find the maxima and minima values of f ( x)  x  6 x  9 x  15. (CO5)

3 2
B)

-o0o-

68
 END-EXAM MODEL PAPERS

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS CCN- 102

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A

Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

    
1. If A  0, , , ,  and f : A  B is a function such that f ( x)  cos x, then find
 6 4 3 2
the range of f . CO 1
x
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions. CO 1
 x 1 x  2
3. If A  
3 9 0
and B  
4 0 2
 , find A  B and A  B. CO1
1 8  2  7 1 4 

4. Show that cos16  sin16  tan 610.

0 0
CO2
cos160  sin160
sin 2
5. Prove that  cot . CO2
1  cos2

6. Find the modulus of the complex number  1  i  . CO2

 2i 

7. Find the distance between parallel lines x  2 y  3  0 and x  2 y  8  0. CO3

8. Find lim sin77 x . CO4

x0 sin11x
9. Differentiate 3tan x  4log x  7 x2 w.r.t. x. CO4
10. If x  at 2 , y  2at , then find dy . CO4
dx

69
 PART-B

Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

3 3 4

11 A) Find the inverse of the matrix  2 3 4  . CO1
0 1 1 

Or

B) Solve the system of equations x  y  z  6, x  y  z  2 and 2x  y  3z  9 by

Cramer’s rule. CO1

12 A) If cos x  cos y  3 and cos x  cos y  2 , then show that CO2

5 7

x y  x y
21tan   10cot    0.
 2   2 

Or

1 1 1
B) If tan x  tan y  tan z   then show that
x  y  z  xyz. CO2

13 A) Solve 3cos  sin 1. CO2

Or

B) In any  ABC, Show that cot A  cot B  cot C  s .

2
CO2
2 2 2 

14 A) Find the equation of the circle with  4,2 and 1,5 as the two ends of its
diameter and also find its centre and radius. CO 3

Or

B) Find the centre, vertices, equation of axes, lengths of axes, eccentricity, foci, equations

of directrices and length of latus rectum of the ellipse 4x2 16 y2  1. CO 3

70
15 A) Find the derivative of sin 1  2 x  w.r.t. tan 1  2 x  CO4
 1 x   1 x 
2 2

Or

  y3 
3
u u
B) If u  tan 1  x  , then prove that x y  sin 2u. CO4
 x  y  x y

PART-C

Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them so that the sum of their squares is minimum.

CO 5

71
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS CCN- 102

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- II MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A

Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

1. If f : R  R is a bijective function such that f ( x)  ax  b, then find f 1 ( x). CO 1

1
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions.
 x  1 x  2 CO 1

 0 1 3 
 
3. If A   1 0 7  is a skew-symmetric matrix, find the value of x. CO 1
 3 x 0 
0 0
4. Find the value of sin 2 82 1  sin 2 22 1 . CO2
2 2
cos3 A
5. Prove that  cos A. CO2
2cos 2 A  1
6. Find the conjugate of the complex number 3  2i  . 4  7i  CO2

7. Find the equation of the line passing through the points 1,2 and 3, 4. CO3
8. Find lim x5  32
x2 x  2
. CO4

9. Differentiate x  sec x  log x w.r.t. x. CO4

10. If u( x, y)  x3  3axy  y 3 , then find u and u . CO4
x y

72
 PART-B

Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

1 1 1
11 A) Show that a b c   a  b  b  c  c  a  . CO1
a 2 b2 c2

Or

B) Solve the system of equations x  2 y  3z  6,3x  2 y  4z  5 and x  y  z  1

using matrix inversion method. CO1

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6

12 A) Prove that  tan 4 . CO2
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6

Or

1 1 1 1 
B) Prove that tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  . CO2
3 5 7 8 4

13 A) Solve 2cos2   3cos   1  0. CO2

Or

B) In any  ABC, Show that a 3

cos( B  C )  3abc. CO2

14 A) Find the equation of the circle passing through the points  0,0 ,  6,0 and  0,8 . CO3
Or
B) Find the equation of the rectangular hyperbola whose focus is 1,2  and directrix is

3x  4 y  5  0. CO3

15 A) If sin y  x sin(a  y), then prove that dy  sin (a  y ) . CO4

2

dx sin a

Or

B) If y  tan 1 x, then prove that (1  x2 ) y2  2 xy1  0. CO4

73
 PART-C

Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16 Show that the semi-vertical angle of the cone of maximum volume and of given slant
1
height is tan 2.
CO4

74
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods per Periods
week

CCN-103 Engineering 4 120 20 80

Physics

S.No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped

Units and
1 08 CO1
Dimensions

Elements of
2 12 CO1
Vectors

3 Dynamics 12 CO2

4 Friction 10 CO2

Work, Power and

5 12 CO3
Energy

Simple harmonic
6 12 CO3
motion

Heat and
7 12 CO4
Thermodynamics

8 Sound 10 CO4

9 Properties of 10 CO5
matter

Electricity and
10 12 CO5
Magnetism

11 Modern physics 10 CO5

Total 120

75
  Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Physics

Course Objectives 1. To familiarize with the concepts of Physics involved in the process
of various Engineering, Industrial and Daily life Applications.
2. To understand and apply the basic principles of physics in the field
of engineering and technology to familiarize certain natural
phenomenon occurring in the day to day life
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises

 Course outcomes
Explain S.I units and dimensions of different physical quantities, basic
CO1 operations among vector quantities.

Explain the motion of objects moving in one dimensions and two

dimensions, the causes of motion and hindrance to the motion of the
CO2
objects especially with respect to friction.

Explain the mechanical energy of bodies like PE, KE and conservation law
CO3 of energy, the properties of simple harmonic motion.

Explain gas laws, ideal gas equation, Isothermal and adiabatic processes,
Course
Specific heats, to study the laws of thermodynamics. Causes,
Outcomes
CO4 consequences and methods to minimise noise pollution, explain beats,
Doppler effect, Reverberation, echoes.

Explain certain properties of solids, liquids like elastic properties, viscosity

and surface tension. Explain Ohm’s law, to study Kirchoff’s laws, to study
the principle of Wheatstone’s bridge and its application to meter bridge.
To study the magnetic force and understand magnetic field. To compute
CO5
magnetic field strength on axial and equatorial lines of a bar magnet. To
familiarise with modern topics like photoelectric effect, optical fibres,
superconductivity and nanotechnology.

 Learning Outcome
 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 1

CO2 3 2 2

CO3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 2

3 = strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped

76
  Model Blue Print with weightages for Blooms category and questions for chapter
and Cos mapped

Marks wise Question wise

Weigh distribution of Mapped
No of distribution of
S.N Unit t age weightage with CO
Period weightage
o Title/Chapter of
s
marks R U Ap A R U
A A
n p n

Units and 0 0
1 08 03 3 0 0 1 0 0 CO1
Dimensions

Elements of 0
2 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 CO1
Vectors

3 Dynamics 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 * CO2

4 Friction 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO2

Work, Power 0 0
5 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
and Energy

Simple harmonic 0 *
6 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
motion

Heat and 0 *
7 12 11 0 8 3 0 1 1 CO4
Thermodynamics

8 Sound 10 11 0 8 3 0 0 1 1 0 CO4

Properties of 0 0
9 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5
matter

Electricity and 0 0
10 12 14 6 0 8 2 0 1 CO5
Magnetism

0 0

11 Modern physics 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5

*
Total 120 110 24 64 22 0 8 8 4
10

*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 3 or 6 or 7

77
Learning Outcomes

1.0 Concept of Units and dimensions

1.1 Explain the concept of Units , Physical quantity, F u n d a m e n t a l physical quantities

and D erived physical quantities

1.2 Define unit, fundamental units and derived units, State SI units with symbols

1.3 State Multiples and submultiples in SI system, State Rules of writing S.I.units, State
advantages of SI units

1.4 Define Dimensions, W r i t e Dimensional formulae of physical quantities

1.5 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities

1.6 State the principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions

1.7 State the applications and limitations of Dimension alanalysis

1.8 Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error, significant
figures

1.9 Solve problems

2.0 Concept of Elements of Vectors

2.1 Explain the concept of scalars, Vectors and give examples

2.2 Represent vectors graphically, Classify the Vectors, Resolve the vectors

2.3 Determine the resultant of a vector by component method, represent a vector in

Space using unit vectors (i,j,k)

2.4 State and explain triangle law, parallelogram law, polygon law of addition of

vectors

2.5 Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work done, Power), Mention the

Properties of dot product

2.6 Define cross products of two vectors with examples (Torque, Linear velocity)

Mention the properties of Cross product.

2.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

78
3.0 Concept of Dynamics

3.1 Write the equations of motion in a straight line Explain the acceleration due to

gravity

3.2 Explain vertical motion of a body and derive expressions for a) Maximum Height,

b) time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of flight

3.3 Derive height of at ower when a body projected vertically upwards from the top of

a tower.

3.4 Explain projectile motion with examples

3.5 Explain Horizontal projection and Derive an expression for the path of a projectile in
horizontal projection

3.6 Explain oblique projection and derive an expression for it. Derive formulae for

a) Maximum Height, b) time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of flight

e) Horizontal Range, f) Maximum range

3.7 Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular velocity, angular

acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque

3.8 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

4.0 Concept of Friction

4.1 Define friction and classify the types of friction.

4.2 Explain the concept to f Normal reaction

4.3 State the laws of friction

4.4 Define coefficients of friction, Angle of friction and Angle of repose

4.5 Derive expressions for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane (upwards

and downwards)

4.6 List the Advantages and Disadvantages of friction

4.7 Mention the methods of minimizing friction

4.8 Explain why it is easy to pull a lawn roller than to push it

4.9 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

79
5.0 Concepts of Work, Power, and Energy

5.1 Define t h e t e r m s W ork, Power and Energy. State SI units and dimensional

formulae

5.2 Define potential energy and give examples, derive an expression for P.E

5.3 Define Kinetic energy and give examples, derive an expression for K.E

5.4 State and derive Work-Energy theorem

5.5 Derive the relation between Kinetic energy and momentum

5.6 State the law of conservation of energy and Verify it in the case of a freely

Falling body

5.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

6.0 Concepts of Simple harmonic motion

6.1 Define Simple harmonic motion, Give examples, State the conditions

6.2 Explanation of uniform circular motion of a particle is a combination of two

perpendicular SHMs.

6.3 Derive expressions for displacement, velocity, acceleration, Frequency, Time

period of a particle executing SHM.

6.4 Define phase of SHM

6.5 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive expression for Time period of simple
pendulum

6.6 State the laws of motion of simple pendulum

6.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

7.0 Concept of Heat and thermodynamics

7.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases

7.2 State and explain Boyle’s and Charles laws.

7.3 Define absolute zero temperature, absolute scale of temperature

7.4 Define ideal gas and distinguish from real gas

7.5 Derive I deal gas equation. Define Specific gas constant and Universal gas

Constant, write S.I unit and Dimensional Formula. Calculate the value of R.

7.6 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases

80
 7.7 State and Explain Isothermal process a n d adiabatic process

7.8 State first and second laws of thermodynamics and state applications

7.9 Define specific heats & molar specific heats of a gas, Derive CP-CV =R

7.10 Solve t h e r e l e v a n t n u m e r i c a l problems

8.0 Concept of Sound

8.1 Concept of the sound, Wave motion (longitudinal and transverse wave)

8.2 Distinguish between musical sound and noise

8.3 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity level of sound

8.4 Explain causes, effects and methods of minimizing of noise pollution

8.5 Explain the phenomenon of beats State the applications

8.6 Define Doppler effect, List the Applications

8.7 Define reverberation and reverberation time and Write Sabine’s formula

8.8 Define and Explain echoes state its applications

8.9 State conditions of good auditorium

8.10 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

9.0 Concepts of properties of matter

9.1 Explain the terms Elasticity, stress, strain and types of Stress and Strain

9.2 State and explain Hooke’s law

9.3 Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus (K),

Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (),

9.4 Define surface tension and give examples

9.5 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory

9.6 Define angle of contact and capillarity and write formula for Surface Tension

9.7 Explain the concept of Viscosity; give examples, Write Newton’s formula.

9.8 Define co-efficient of viscosity and write its units and dimensional formula and

State Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity

9.9 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases

9.10 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

81
10.Concepts of Electricity and Magnetism

10.1 E xplain Ohm’s law in electricity a n d w r i t e t h e f o r m u l a

10.2 Define specific resistance, conductance and state their units

10.3 Explain Kichoff’s laws

10.4 Describe Wheat stone’s bridge with legible sketch

10.5 Describe Meter Bridge for the determination of resistivity with a circuit diagram

10.6 Explain the concept of magnetism. State the Coulomb’s inverse square law of

magnetism

10.7 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force and write the properties of
magnetic lines of force

10.8 Derive an expression for the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field

10.9 Derive equations for Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line

and on the equatorial line of a bar magnet.

10.10 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

11.0 Concepts of Modern physics

11.1 State and Explain Photo-electric effect and Write Einstein‘s photoelectric

equation

11.2 State laws of photo electric effect

11.3 Explain the Working of photo electric cell, write its applications.

11.4 Recapitulatere fraction of light and its laws, critical angle, Total Internal

Reflection

11.5 Explain the principle and working of Optical Fiber, mention different types of

Optical Fibre, state the applications

11.6 Define super conductor and superconductivity and mention examples

11.7 State the properties of super conducting materials and list the applications

11.8 Nanotechnology definition, non materials, applications

82
COURSECONTENT

1. Units and Dimensions:

Introduction – Physical quantity – Fundamental and Derived quantities – Fundamental and

Derived units- SI units –Multiples and Sub multiples – Rules for writing S.I. units-
Advantages of SI units – Dimensions and Dimensional formulae- Dimensional
constants and Dimensionless quantities- Principle of Homogeneity- Advantages and
limitations of Dimension alanalysis-Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error,
percentage error, significant figures-Problems.

2. Elements of Vectors:

Scalars and Vectors–Types of vectors(Proper Vector, NullVector,UnitVector,Equal, Negative

Vector, Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and Position Vector).Addition of
vectors-Representation of vectors- Resolution of vectors - Parallelogram, Triangle and
Polygon laws of vectors–Subtraction of vectors- Dot and Cross products of vectors-Problems

3. Dynamics

Introduction-Concept of acceleration due to gravity-Equations of motion for a freely falling

body and for a body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal and Oblique projections-
Expressions for maximum height, time of flight, range-Define force, momentum, angular
displacement, angular velocity, angular acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia,
torque–problems

4. Friction:

Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of friction- Angle of repose-Angle of

friction- rough inclined plane- Advantages and disadvantages of friction-Methods of
reducing friction–Problems

5. Work, Power and Energy:

Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential energy- kinetic energy-
Derivations of Potential and Kinetic energies-K.E and Momentum relation - Work-Energy
theorem- Law of Conservation of energy- Problems

6. Simple Harmonic Motion:

Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples- Expressions for displacement,

velocity, acceleration, Time period, frequency and phase in SHM- Time period of a simple
pendulum- Laws of simple pendulum-seconds pendulum-Problems

7. Heat and Thermodynamics:

Expansion of Gases-Boyle’s law-Absolute scale of temperature- Charles laws- Ideal gas

equation- Universal gas constant- Differences between r and R-Isothermal and adiabatic
processes- Laws of thermodynamics- Specific heats - molar specific heats of a gas -Different
modes of transmission of heat Laws of thermal conductivity, Coefficient of thermal
conductivity-Problems

83
8. Sound:

Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion -musical sound and noise- Noise pollution –
Causes &effects- Methods of reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler effect- Echo-
Reverberation-Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula-Conditions of good auditorium-
Problems

9. Properties of matter

Definition of Elasticity –Definition of stress and strain -th e u n i t s a n d d i m e n s i o n a l

f o r m u l a e f o r s t r e s s a n d s t r a i n - T he Hooke’s law-Definitions of Modulus of elasticity,
Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus(K), Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (), relation
between Y, K, n and (equations only no derivation)

Definition of surface tension-Explanation of Surface tension with reference to molecular

theory - Definition of angle of contact -Definition of capillarity -The formula for surface
tension based on capillarity - Explanation of concept of Viscosity - Examples for surface
tension and Viscosity - Newton’s formula for viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of
viscosity- The effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseuille’s equation
for Co-efficient of viscosity- Th e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

10. Electricity & Magnetism:

Ohm’s law and explanation-Specific resistance-Kirchoff’s laws- Wheat stone’s bridge-

Meter bridge-Coulomb’s inverse square law magnetic field- magnetic lines of force-
Magnetic induction field strength- magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial
line - magnetic induction field strength at a point on the equatorial line–problems.

11. Modern Physics;

Photoelectric effect –Einstein’s photoelectric equation-laws of photoelectric effect-photo

electric cell–Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal reflection- fibre optics- -
principle and working of an optical fibre -types of optical fibres - Applications of optical
fibres- superconductivity–applications-Nanotechnology definition, non-materials,
applications

REFERENCEBOOKS

1. Telugu Academy ( English version ) Intermediate physics Volume-I & 2

2. Dr. S .L Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha Unified physics Volume 1,2,3 and 4

3.Resnick& Holiday Text book of physics Volume I

4. Dhanpath Roy Text book of applied physics

5. D.A Hill Fibre optics

6. XI & XII Standard NCERT Text Books

84
  Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 4.9

Unit Test – 2 From 5.1 to 8.10

Unit Test – 3 From 9.1 to 11.8

 Model question paper for Unit Test with COs mapped

85
 UNIT TEST –I

Model Question Paper (C-20)

ENGINEERING PHYSICS (103)

TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40

PART-A 16 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries 4 marks and others carry 3 marks each.
(3) Answers for Question Numbers 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to

The point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) The dimensional formula of force is ___________ (CO1)

ii) which of the following is a scalar (CO1) [ ]

a) force b) work c) displacement d) velocity

iii) we can add a scalar to a vector (Yes / No) (CO1)

iv) Friction is a self-adjusting force. [True / False] (CO2)

2. Define dot product. Give one example. (CO1)

3. A force of 150 N acts on a particle at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. Find

the horizontal and vertical components of force (CO1)

4. Define projectile. Give two examples.(CO2)

5. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain (CO2)

86
 PART—B 3x8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions. Each question carries 8marks.

(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criteria for

evaluation is content but not the length of the answer.

6) (A)Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of resultant of two

vectors using parallelogram law of vectors (CO1)

OR

(B) Write any four properties of dot product and any four properties of

cross product (CO1)

7) (A) Show that path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique

Projection. (CO2)

OR

(B) Derive the expression for range and time of flight of a projectile (CO2)

8) (A) State and explain polygon law of vector addition with a neat diagram (CO1)

OR

(B) Derive the equation for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane (CO2)

87
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–20)

FIRST YEAR EXAMINATION

Common–103, ENGINEERING PHYSICS

Time : 3 hours ] [ Total Marks : 80

PART—A 3×10=30

Instructions : (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.

(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple

sentences.

1. Write the dimensional formula of the following physical quantities (CO1)

(a) Velocity (b) Force (c) Angular momentum

2. Write any three properties of scalar product.(CO1)

3. Define projectile. Give two examples.(CO2)

4. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain.(CO2)

5. Define potential energy and kinetic energy. (CO3)

6. For a body in simple harmonic motion velocity at mean position is 4m/s, if the time period is

3.14 s, find its amplitude. (CO3)

7. State first and second laws of thermodynamics. (CO4)

8. Write any three conditions of good auditorium (CO4)

9. Define ohmic and non-ohmic conductors.(CO5)

10. State Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.(CO5)

88
 PART—B 8 ×5= 40

Instructions : (1) Each question carries eight marks.

(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer.

11. A) Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of the resultant of twovectors using

parallelogram law of vectors. (CO1)

OR

B) Show that path of a projectile is parabola in case of oblique projection and derive
expression for maximum height.(CO2)

12. A) Derive expression for acceleration of a body sliding downwards on a rough inclined
plane.(CO2)

OR

B) Verify the law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body.(CO3)

13. A) Derive an expression for velocity and acceleration of a particle performing simple
harmonic motion. (CO3)
OR

B) Define ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.(CO4)

14. A) Two tuning forks A and B produce 4 beats per second. On loading B with wax 6
beats are produced. If the quantity of wax is reduced the number of beats drops to 4.
If the frequency of A is 326 Hz, find the frequency of B.(CO4)

OR

B) Explain surface tension based on molecular theory. Write three examples of

surface tension. (CO5)

15. A) Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheat stone’s bridge with a neat
circuit diagram.(CO5)
OR

B) Explain principle and working of optical fibres. Write any three applications (CO5).

PART C 1 x 10 = 10

16) Derive relationship between Cp and Cv and hence show that Cpis greater than Cv. (CO4)

89
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods per Periods
week

Engineering
Chemistry and
CCN-104 4 120 20 80
Environmental
Studies

S.No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped

Fundamentals of
1 18 CO1
Chemistry

2 Solutions 10 CO1

3 Acids and bases 10 CO1

4 Principles of Metallurgy 8 CO1

5 Electrochemistry 16 CO2

6 Corrosion 8 CO2

7 Water Treatment 10 CO3

8 Polymers 12 CO4

9 Fuels 6 CO4

10 Chemistry in daily life 6 CO4

11 Environmental Studies 16 CO5

Total 120

90
  Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies

Course Objectives 4. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the

process of various Engineering Industrial Applications.
5. To know the various natural and man-made environmental issues
and concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that include
physical, chemical, biological and socio cultural aspects of
environment.
6. to reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises

 Course outcomes
Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole
CO1 concept, acids and bases,PH metallurgical process and
alloys
CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell,emf and corrosion
Synthesise of Plastics and rubber and industrial
CO3
applications of fuels
Course Outcomes
Describe the methods of treatment of water and give
CO4 the information about chemical compounds used in
our daily life
Explain the causes, effects and control methods of air
CO5 and water pollution and measures to protect the
environment

 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

CCN-104 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 1 2 3

CO2 3 2 2 1

CO3 3 2

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 3

3 = strongly mapped

2= moderately mapped

1= slightly mapped

91
  Model Blue Print with weightages for Blooms category and questions for each
chapter and COs mapped
Marks wise Question wise
Weight distribution of distribution of
Unit No of Mapped
S.No age of
Title/Chapter Periods Weightage Weightage with CO
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Fundamentals
1 18 19 8 8 3 1 1 1 CO1
of Chemistry

2 Solutions 10 11 0 0 8 3 1 1 CO1

3 Acids and bases 10 11 0 8 0 3 1 1 CO1

Principles of
4 8 8 8 0 0 1 CO1
Metallurgy

5 Electrochemistry 16 11 8 3 0 1 1 * CO2

6 Corrosion 8 8 0 8 0 1 CO2

7 Water Treatment 10 11 8 3 0 1 1 CO3

8 Polymers 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 * CO4

9 Fuels 6 3 3 0 0 1 CO4

Chemistry in
10 6 3 0 0 3 1 CO4
daily life

Environmental
11 16 14 3 11 0 1 2 CO5
Studies

*
Total 120 110 12 6 6 6 20 35 5
10

*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 5 or 8

92
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to learn out

ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1.0 Atomic structure

1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron)
and the concept of atomic number and mass number.

1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.

1.3 Explain t he s i g n i f ic a n c e o f fo u r Quantum numbers.

1.4 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 Pauli’s exclusion principle 3 Hund’s rule.

1.5 Define Orbital of an atom , draw the shapes of s,pandd- Orbitals and draw the shapes of s ,p
and d-Orbitals.

1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30

1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding

1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.

1.9 Define and explai n Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl ,MgO, *H2,*O2 and
*N2.(* Lewis dot method)

1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish
between their properties.

1.11 Structures of ionic solids-define a) Unit cell b) co-ordination number and the structures of
NaCl and CsCl unit cells.

2.0 Solutions

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Soluteand 3.Solvent

2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state and solubility

2.3 Define mole and problems on mole concept.

2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2. Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight and

calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids.(HCl,H2SO4,H3PO4)Bases

(NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3)

93
2.5 Define molarity and normality and numerical problems on molarity and normality

a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality if weight of solute and volume of solution are

given

b) Calculate the weight of solute if Molarity or normality with volume of solution are given

c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated

solutions

3.0 Acids and bases

3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases and give the limitations of Arrhenius theory of
Acids and Bases.

3.2 Explain Bronsted– Lowry theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Bronsted–
Lowry theory of acids and bases.

3.3 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Lew is theory of acids and
bases.

3.4 Explain the Ionic product of water

3.5 Define pH and explain PH scale and solve the Numerical problems on pH(Strong Acids and
Bases)

3.6 Define and explain buffer solution and give the examples of buffer solutions.

3.7 State the application of buffer solutions

4.0 Principles of Metallurgy

4.1 List out the Characteristics of Metals and non-metals

4.2 Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals

4.3 Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4.Flux 5.Slag

4.4 Describe the methods of concentration of Ore; 1.Handpicking, 2.Levigation and 3. Froth

Floatation

4.5 Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.

4.6 Explain the purification of Copper by Electrolytic Refining

94
4.7 Define an Alloy and Write the composition and uses of the following alloys.

1. Brass

2. Germen silver

3. Nichrome.

5.0 Electrochemistry

5.1 Define the terms1. Conductor

2. Semiconductor

3. Insulator

4. Electrolyte

5. Non–electrolyte. Give two examples each.

5.2 Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction

5.3 Explain electrolysis by taking example used NaCl

5.4 Explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis

5.5 Define 1 . C hemical equivalent (E) 2 . E lectrochemicalequivalent (e) and their relation.

5.6 Solve the Numerical problems on Faraday’s laws of electrolysis and applications of
electrolysis (Electro plating)

5.7 Define Galvanic cell and explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.

5.8 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell

5.9 Explain the electrode potentials and standard electrode potentials

5.10 Explain the electro chemical series and its significance

5.11 Explain the emf of a cell and solve the numerical problems the cell based on standard
electrode potentials.

6.0 Corrosion

6.1 Define the term corrosion.

6.2 state the Factor sin fluencing the rate of corrosion

6.3 Describe the formation of a) composition cell b)stress cell c)concentration cell during
corrosion.

6.4 Define rusting of iron and explain theme chanism of rusting of iron.

95
6.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion

a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings)

b) Cathodic pro tectio n (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process)

7. 0 Water Treatment

7.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.

7.2 Define and Classify the hardness of water.

7.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water (with Formulae)

7.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.

7.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L) or( ppm).

7.6 Explain the method so f softening of hard water: a) Ion-exchange process, b)Permuted
process or zeolite process

7.7 State the essential qualities of drinking water.

7.8 Chemistry involved in treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, deflouridation)

7.9 Explain Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis with examples.

7.10 State the applications of Reverse Osmosis.

8.0 Polymers

8.1 Explain the concept of polymerization

8.2 Describe the methods of polymerization a) additionpolymerization of ethylene

b)condensation polymerization of Bakelite(Only flowchart)

8.3 Define the term plastic and classify the plastics with examples.

8.4 Distinguish between thermo plastics and the rmo setting plastics

8.5 List the Characteristics of plastics and state the disadvantages of using plastics.

8.6 State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials.

8.7 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:

1. PVC, 2.Teflon, 3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6

8.8 Explain processing of Natural rubber and write the structural formula of Natural rubber.

8.9 List the Characteristics of raw rubber

8.10 Define and explain Vulcanization and List out the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber.

96
 8.11 Define the term Elastomer and describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic
rubbers a) Buna-s and b)Neoprene rubber.

9.0 Fuels

9.1 Define the term fuel

9.2 Classify the fuels based on physical state and based on occurrence.

9.3 List the characteristics of good fuel.

9.4 State the composition and uses of gaseous fuels.

a)water gas b)producer gas, c)natural gas, d) Coal gas, e)Biogas.

10.0 Chemistry in daily life

10. Give the basic chemical composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of

a) soaps, and detergents

b)vinegar

c) Insect repellent sand

d) activated charcoal

e) Soft drinks

11.0 ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES

11.1 Define the term environment and explain the scope and importance of environmental
studies

11.2 Define the segments of environment 1).Lithosphere, 2).Hydrosphere, 3).Atmosphere,

4).Biosphere,

11.3 Define the following terms 1)Pollutant, 2).Pollution, 3).Contaminant, 4)receptor, 5)sink, 6)
particulates, 7)dissolved oxygen (DO), 8)Threshold limit value (TLV), 9).BOD,10).COD 11)
eco system1 2 ) Producers1 3 ) C onsumers 14) Decomposers with examples

11.4 State the renewable and non renewable energy sources with examples.

11.5 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity

11.6 Define air pollution and classify the air pollutants-based on origin and physical state of
matter.

11.7 Explain the causes, effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals and control
methods of air pollution.

11.8 State the uses of forest resources.

11.9 State the deforestation and its causes and effects.

97
 11.10 Explain the 1.) Green house effect, 2) Ozone layer depletion and 3) Acid rain

11.11 Define Water pollution, explain the causes, effects and control methods of Water pollution.

COURSE CONTENT

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundamentals of Chemistry

Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers

–Aufbau principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d
orbitals - Electronic configurations of elements

Chemical Bonding: Introduction – types of chemical bonds – Ionic and

covalentbondwithexamples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds- structures of ionic
crystals (NaCl and CsCl).

2. Solutions

Introduction of concentration methods – mole concept, molarity and normality – Numerical

problems on mole, molarity and normality.

3. Acids and Bases

Introduction – Theories ofacids and bases and limitations – Arrhenius theory-Bronsted –

Lowry theory – Lewis acid base theory – Ionic product of water- pH related numerical
problems–Buffer solutions, action of buffer and its applications.

4. Principles of Metallurgy

Characteristics of Metals and non-metals –Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals,

Define the terms i) Metallurgy ii) ore iii) Gangue iv) flux v) Slag - Concentration of Ore –Hand
picking, Levigation, Froth floatation – Methods of Extraction of crude Metal – Roasting,
Calcination, Smelting – Alloys – Composition and uses of brass, German silver andni chrome.

5. Electrochemistry

Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – electrolysis –

Faraday’s laws of electrolysis-application of electrolysis(electroplating) -numerical problems
on Faraday’s laws – Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential – electrochemical series–emf
and numerical problems on emf of a cell .

6. Corrosion

Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - composition, stress and concentration cells–

rustingofiron and its mechanism – prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic
protection methods.

7. Water technology

98
 Introduction–soft and hard water–causes of hardness–types of hardness

–disadvantages of hard water – degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – softening methods –
per mutit process – ion exchange process– qualities of drinking water –Chemistry involved in
treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, deflouridation) - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis –
Applications of Reverse osmosis.

8. Polymers

Introduction – polymerization – types of polymerization – addition, condensation with

examples – plastics – types of plastics – advantages of plastics over traditional materials-
Disadvantages of using plastics – Preparation and uses of the following plastics i).PVC ii)
Teflon iii) Polystyrene iv) .Nylonn 6,6 –Processing of natural rubber - Vulcanization –
Elastomers- Preparation and applications of Buna-s, Neoprene rubbers.

9. Fuels

Definition and classification of fuels–characteristics of good fuel-composition and uses of

gaseous fuels.

10. Chemistry in daily life

Basic composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of soaps and
detergents, vinegar, insect repellants, soft drinks, activated charcoal.

11. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES

Introduction– environment –scope and importance of environmental studies – important

terms related to environment– renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Concept of
ecosystem – Biotic components –Forest resources – Deforestation -Biodiversity and its
threats-Air pollution – causes-effects–Global environmental issues – control measures –
Water pollution – causes – effects – control measures.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit test 1, unit test 2 and unit test 3

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 4.7
Unit Test - 2 From 5.1 to 8.11
Unit Test - 3 From 9.1 to 11.11
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi- Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry

 Model question paper for Unit Test with Cos mapped

99
 UNIT TEST –I

Model Question Paper (C-20)

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (104)

TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40

PART-A

16 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries 4 marks and each of rest carries 3 marks.
(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and
shall not exceed five simple sentences.

1. a. Number of neutrons in 11Na23 is ----------(CO1)

b. The molarity and normality of HCl is the same (True or False)(CO1)
c. What is the pH range of base?(CO1)
d. Graphite is a good conductor of electricity (Yes or No)(CO1)
2. Define Covalent bond. Explain the formation of covalent bond in Oxygen and Nitrogen
molecules.(CO1)
3. Define mole. Calculate the number of moles present in 50 gm of CaCO3 and 9.8 gm of
H2SO4.(CO1)
4. Define PH. Calculate the PH of 0.001M HCl and 0.01M NaOH solution.(CO1)
5. Write the composition and applications of German silver and Nichrome.(CO1)

PART – B
3x8M = 24M
Answer either (A) or (B) from each questions from Part-B.
Each question carries 8 marks.

6. A) Explain Postulations of Bhor’s atomic theory. Give its limitations.(CO1)

(OR)

B) Explain the significance of Quantum numbers.(CO1)

7. A) Express molarity normality with mathematical equation. Calculate the molarity and
normality of 10gm of NaOH present in 500 ml solution.(CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronsted-Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations.(CO1)

8. A) Explain Froth floatation process.(CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain Electrolytic refining processing of copper.(C01)

Model Question Paper (C-20)

100
 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (104)

TIME: 3hrs Total Marks:80

PART-A

Instructions: (1)Answer all questions.

(2) each question carries 3 marks.

Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks. 3x10=30M

1. Draw the shapes of s and p orbitals. (CO1)

2. Define mole. Find the mole number of 10 g of CaCO3 (CO1)
3. Define Buffer solution.. Give any two examples. (CO1)
4. Define chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent. Give their relation.
(CO2)
5. State name of the salts and their formulae that cause hardness. (CO3)
6. Write any three disadvantages of using plastics. (CO4)
7. Classify the fuels based on their occurrence. (CO4)
8. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
9. List out any three threats to biodiversity. (CO5)
10. Define pollutant and contaminant. Give an example each. (CO5)

PART – B
Each question carries eight marks. 8x5=40M

11. A) Explain Bhor’s atomic theory and give its limitations. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain ionic bond formation and covalent bond formation with one example
each(CO1)

12. A) Calculate the molarity and normality of 250 ml of sodium carbonate solution
that contains 10.6 gm of sodium carbonate. (CO1)

(OR)

B) Explain Bronstead and Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations.(CO1)

13. A) Explain froth floatation and electrolytic refining of copper with neat diagrams.(CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the construction and working of galvanic cell. (CO2)
14. A) Explain Cathode protection methods. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain ion-exchange of softening of hard water with a neat diagram. (CO3)

15. A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each.(CO4)

(OR)

101
 B) Explain the causes and effects of air pollution. (CO5)

PART –C
Question carries ten marks 10x1 =10M

16. Describe methods of preparation and applications of Polystyrene and Teflon. (CO4)

102
 No. of
Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course code Course Title Periods/
periods FA SA
Weeks
Basics of
Communication and
CCN-105 3 90 20 80
Computer Networking
Engineering

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Fundamentals of Computers 15 CO1, CO3,CO4
2. Programming Methodology 10 CO2
3. Operating System basics 20 CO1,CO3
Computer Hardware and Networking
4. 25 CO1,CO4,CO5
Basics
Basics of Data structures
5. andEmerging Trends in Computer 20 CO2,CO4
Technologies
Total Periods 90

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i) know the fundamentals of Computers
ii)familiarize programming methodologies like algorithms and
Course Objectives
flowcharts
iii) understand Operating system basics
iv) To familiarize basics of data structures andEmerging Technologies

At the end of the course the student able to learn following:

CO1 CCN-105.1 Explain computer fundamentals

Analyse various flowchart, algorithms for
Course CO2 CCN-105.2
various applications
Outcomes
Apply the features of Basic Computer
CO3 CCN-105.3
operating systems
Explain functioning of various Hardware
CO4 CCN-105.4 components and Network
communication in computers
Explain basics of data structures and
CO5 CCN-105.5 emerging technologies in communication
and computer network engineering.

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CCN-105.1 3 3 1 1
CCN-105.2 1 2 2 1 3 1 3 1
CCN-105.3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
CCN-105.4 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
CCN-105.5 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2
Average 2.6 1.5 2.3 1.3 1 1.6 1 2.2 1.6 1.4

3=stronglymapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

103
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Fundamentals of Digital Computer
1.1. Define various terms related to computers – Computer, Hardware , Software, Firmware,
High Level Language , Low Level Language
1.2. Draw and explain block diagram of a Computer in detail
1.3. Describe the current family of CPUs used in Computers.
1.4. State the use of storage devices used in a Computer.
1.5. List the two types of memory used in a Computer.
1.6. State the importance of cache memory.
1.7. Explain the generations of computers.
1.8. Classification of computers - based on a) size, b) processor.
1.9. State the importance of binary number system for use in Digital Computers
2.0 Implement Programming Methodology.
2.1. State the different steps involved in problem solving.
2.2. Define algorithm.
2.3. List four characteristics of algorithm.
2.4. Define a program
2.5. Differentiate between program and algorithm.
2.6. State the steps involved in algorithm development.
2.7. Differentiate between algorithm and flowchart.
2.8. Develop algorithms for simple problems.
2.9. Draw the symbols used in flowcharts.
2.10. Draw flowcharts for simple problems.
3.0 Operating Systems basics
3.1. Describe the need for an operating system.
3.2. List the various operating systems used presently.
3.3. List and explain
3.3.1.Types of dos commands
3.3.2.Any 10 Internal Commands
3.3.3.Any 5 External Commands
3.3.4.Features of Windows desktop.
3.3.5.Components of a Window.
3.4. State the function of each component of a Window.
3.5. Describe the Method of starting a program using start button
3.6. Explain usage of maximize, minimize, restore down and close buttons.
3.7. State the meaning of a file, folder.
3.8. Describe the Method of viewing the contents of hard disk drive using Explorer
3.9. Describe the Method of finding a file using search option.
3.10. Use control panel for
3.10.1. installing and uninstalling software
3.10.2. installing and uninstalling hardware
3.10.3. Changing the system date and time
3.10.4. Installing a printer
3.11. Explain Drive space using system tool option of Accessories group
3.12. Explain Disk defragmentation using System tools
3.13. Explain the procedure for changing resolution, colour, appearance, screensaver options of
the display
4.0 Computer Hardware, communication and Networking Basics
4.1 Hardware Basics
4.1.1 Identify hardware used for I/P, O/P & inside computer case, system board
Components used for communication among devices
4.1.2 Software - 3 types of Software:ROM BIOS, OS, application software
4.1.3 Explain Functions of BIOS

104
 4.1.4 Explain boot process
4.1.5 Explain POST and important beep codes
4.1.6 Describe about different connectors.
4.2 Computer Communication Basics
4.2.1.Define Data communications
4.2.2.Explain the four fundamental characteristics of Data communication.
4.2.3.List the components of the Data communications.
4.2.4.Explain different ways of representing Data.
4.2.5.Explain Modes of communication (simplex, half-duplex, and full-duplex)

4.3 Networking Basics

4.3.1 Explain meaning of a computer network.
4.3.2 Describe the concept of a Local Area Network, Wide Area Network
4.3.3 Compare Internet and Intranet
4.3.4 Describe about internet service provider.
4.3.5 Explain the role of a modem in accessing the Internet.
4.3.6 Describe address format and IP address
4.3.7 What is browser and List various browsers
4.3.8 Explain the role of search engines with examples.
4.3.9 Explain Internet Security.

5.0 Basics of data structures and Emerging Computer Technologies.

5.1. Overview of Data Structures
5.1.1. Define Data structures.
5.1.2.Classify Data Structures.
5.1.3.Stack Concepts (Definition,operations,Applications)
5.1.4.Queue Concepts (Definition,operations,Applications)
5.1.5.List(Definition,Types-Single,Double,Circular,Operations-Insertion,Deletion,Search,Sort)
5.1.6.Define the terms Searching and sorting
5.1.7.Illustrate Linear search
5.1.8.List various sorting techniques
5.1.9.List the applications of searching and sorting.
5.2.1.Define the terms Tree,Binary Tree,Graph,Root,Internal node,Sibling node,Leaf
Node,Degree of a Node and Height of Tree
5.1.10. List the application of trees and graphs.

5.2. Introduction to Machine Learning

5.2.1.Define Machine Learning, Compare Traditional Programming with Machine Learning
5.2.2.List the applications and key elements of Machine Learning
5.2.3.Define the terms in relation to approaches to Machine Learning(Decision tree learning,
Association rule learning, Artificial neural networks, Deep Learning, Inductive Learning,
Genetic algorithms, Clustering)
5.2.4.Explain Inductive Learning
5.2.5.Classify the Machine Learning

5.3. Introduction to Big data

5.3.1.Define and list sources of Big data
5.3.2.Evolution of data/big data
5.3.3.List and explain the characteristics of big data – the three V‘s of big data
5.3.4.Describe Storing and selecting of Big Data
5.3.5.State the Need of Big Data

105
 5.3.6.List types of tools used in Big Data
5.3.7.List applications of big data

5.4. Basics of Ethical Hacking

5.4.1.Define Ethical Hacking and List the categories of Hackers
5.4.2.Describe Roles and responsibilities of Ethical Hackers
5.4.3.List and explain the phases in Ethical Hacking and Explain Penetrate testing

COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Fundamentals of Digital Computer
Block diagram of a digital computer, functional parameters of CPU, Clock speed and word
length, Functional blocks of a CPU: ALU and Control unit, types of memory RAM, ROM, purpose of
cache memory
2.0 Programming Methodology.
Steps involved in problem solving - Define algorithm , Program - Characteristics of algorithm
- Differentiate between program and algorithm- Steps involved in algorithm development -
Differentiate algorithm and flowchart - Algorithms for simple problems - Symbols used in flowcharts
-Flowcharts for simple problems.
3.0 Understand Operating Systems
Need for an operating system - List the various operating systems - Types of commands,
Internal & External Commands Features of Windows desktop - Components of a Window -
Function of each component of a Window - Method of starting a program using start button -
Maximize, minimize, restore down and close buttons- Meaning of a file and folder -Viewing the
contents of hard disk drive using explorer -Finding a file - Formatting a floppy disk using explore
option - Installing and uninstalling new software using control panel - installing and un
installing a new hardware using control panel - Drive space - disk defragmentation - Installing a
printer - Changing resolution, colour, appearance and screensaver options of the display - Changing
the system date and time

4.0 Computer Hardware and Networking Basics

Hardware Basics- I/P, O/P - inside computer case- system board components - 3 types of Software
- BIOS- boot process - POST - different connectors.

Data Communication -characteristics-components-Data Representation-Modes of communication.

Networking Basics - computer network - Local Area Network - Wide Area Network - Compare
Internet and Intranet - internet service provider - role of a modem - address format and IP address -
browser - search engines with examples -Describe Internet Security.

5.0 Basics of Data structures and Emerging Computer Technology

Overview of Data Structures-Definition-Classification- concepts of Stacks,Queues,Lists,Trees and

Graphs.
Introduction to Machine Learning - Compare Traditional Programming with Machine Learning-
applications -know the key elements- Define the terms - learning, Association rule learning,Artificial
neural networks,Deep Learning,Inductive Learning,Genetic algorithms,Clustering- Explain Inductive
Learning- Classify the Machine Learning -List the applications

Introduction to Big data - Big data-Evolution -characteristics – the three V‘s -Storing -Selecting -
Need of Big Data -sources of big data -types of tools used - applications

106
Basics of Ethical Hacking - categories of Hackers - Penetrate testing -Roles and responsibilities of
Ethical Hackers- phases in Ethical Hacking

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Information Technology - Curtin.
2. Computer Science Theory & Application - E. Balaguruswamy, B. Sushila
3. Introduction to Computers (Special Indian Edition) - Peter Norton
4. Cloud Computing : Principles and Paradigms -RajkumarBuyya, James Broberg and
AndrzejGoscinski
5.Big Data Basics part1 and 2 in www.mssqltips.com
6.http://www.ijeset/media(for Basics of EthicalHacking)
7.Brief-Introduction-of-Virtual-Reality-its-Challenge by SharmisthaMandalnternational Journal of
Scientific & Engineering Research, Volume 4, Issue April-2013)
8. Data Structures using ‘C’ - Tenenbaum, Langsam and Augenstein (PHI).

Model Blue Print:

S.No Chapter/Unit No.of Weightag Marks Wise Question wise CO’s

. title period e Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
s Allocated Weightage Weightage

R U A An R U A A
p p n

1 Fundamentals 15 14 3 1 1 2 CO1,CO3,CO
of Digital 1 4
Computers
2 Programming 10 14 3 3 8 10 1 1 1 * CO2
Methodologie *
s
3 Operating 20 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO1,CO3
system basics
4 Computer 25 14 3 1 10 1 2 * CO1,CO4,CO
Hardware and 1 * 5
Networking
Basics
5 Basics of Data 20 14 6 8 2 1 CO2,CO4
structures
andEmerging
Computer
Technologies
Total 90 70 + (10*) 1 3 16 10 6 7 2 1
8 6 *

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from any one of starred chapters.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

107
 Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.3
Unit test-2 From 3.4 to 4.1
Unit test-3 From 4.2 to 5.4
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER
BASICS OF COMPUTER ENGINEERING
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-105
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES
PART-A 16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and each question of remaining carries
3marks.

1. a) All computer physical components are treated as software(True/False) (CO1)

b) --------------------is the fastest memory in the computer (CO2)
c) Step by step procedure to solve problem is --------------------- (CO2)
d) Which one of the following is not an internal command [ ] (CO3)
i)FORMAT ii)RD iii)COPY iv)CLS
2) State the importance of binary number system for use in Digital Computers (CO1)
3)List different steps involved in problem solving (CO2)
4) What is the need for an operating system? (CO3)
5)Write about analog computers. (CO1)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer.

6. a)Draw and explain block diagram of computer in detail (CO1)

Or
b) Explain various generation of computers (CO1)
7. a) Draw the flow chart to find biggest of three numbers (CO2)
Or
b) Write an algorithm to find the area of triangle when base and height are given.( (CO2)
8. a) Explain any three external commands in detail (CO3)
Or
b) Explain components of a window. (CO3)

108
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER – YEAR END EXAMINATION
BASICS OF COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-105
MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3HOURS
PART-A
10X3=30Marks
Note: Answer all questions
1. Define terms Hardware and Software. (CO1)
2. State the importance of binary system usage in Digital Computers (CO1)
3. Define algorithm (CO2)
4. State the different steps involved in problem solving (CO2)
5. List the features of Windows desktop (CO3)
6. State the meaning of a file and folder (CO3)
7. Define Data communications (CO4)
8. List components of the Data communications. (CO4)

9. Define Data structure. Give an example. (CO5)

10. List the sources of big data. (CO6)
PART-B
5x8=40Marks
Note: Answer all questions
11. 11. A.Explain the generations of computers? (CO1)

OR

11.B i) State the use of storage devices used in a Computer. (CO1)

ii) State the importance of cache memory. (CO1)

12.A.Differentiate algorithm and flowchart with suitable examples? (CO2)

OR

12.B. Explain in detail the characteristics of an algorithm. (CO2)

13.A.Explain about atleast 10 Internal Commands and 5 External Commands. (CO3)

OR

13.B. Explain the procedure for changing resolution, color, appearance, screensaver options of the
display. (CO3)

14.A.Explain 3 types of Softwares in detail. (CO4)

109
 OR

14.B. Explain Modes of communication (simplex, half-duplex, and full-duplex) (CO4)

15.A. Explain the classification of data structures? (CO5)

OR

15.B.Explain the phases in Ethical Hacking and Explain Penetrate testing? (CO5)

PART-C

1X10=10Marks

16. Write an Algorithm to find the all possible roots of a quadratic equation. (CO2)

110
 Course No. of Total No. of
Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods

CCN-106 Programming in C 5 150 20 80

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction to C Language 20 CO1,CO2

2. Input and output statements, Operators 25 CO1,CO2,CO3

and Expressions In C.
3. Decision making, iterative and other 40 CO1,CO2,CO3
control statements
4. Arrays and strings, Structures and Unions 30 CO1,CO2,CO3

User defined functions, pointers, file

5. management and pre-processor 35 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
directives.
Total Periods 150

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Relate basics of programming language constructs using C Language

Course Objectives 2. Classify and implement data types, derived data types, pointers, files,
statements
3. Analyse and develop effective modular programming
4. Construct mathematical, logical and scientific problems and real time
applications using C-language

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO1 CCN-106.1 Develop, compile and debug programs using C-

fundamentals and different programming statements in
C language.

Course CO2 CCN-106.2 Use various operations using primary and derived data
Outcomes types inC.

CO3 CCN-106.3 Analyse programs using predefined functions, modules and

recursive techniques

CO4 CCN-106.4 Write scientific and logical programs using pointers, file
pointers

111
 CO5 CCN-106.5 Develop programs using information passing

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-106.1 3 2 2 3 2

CCN-106.2 2 3 3

CCN-106.3 2 3 3 3 1 2

CCN-106.4 3 1 1 2 3 2 2

CCN-106.5 2 2 2 2 3 2 3

Average 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2.3

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Objectives
1.0 Introduction to C-Language
1.1 Describe the history of C-language, structure of C-language program
1.2 Describe the programming style of Clanguage
1.3 Explain the steps involved in Editing, compiling ,executing and debugging of Cprogram
1.4 Describe character set, C-Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers, Constants, Variables
1.5 Define DataType
1.6 Classify Data Types and explain them with examples.
1.7 Explain declaration of constants and variables
1.8 Explain initializing values to variables in declaration
1.9 Explain about user defined data types with a simple program
1.10 Explain the usage of type qualifiers
2.0 Input and output statements, Operators and ExpressionsinC
2.1 Explain the importance of Pre-processor Directive#include
2.2 Illustrate
2.2.1 Reading a character usinggetch(),getche() and getchar()
2.2.2 writing a character usingputch(), putchar()
2.2.3 Formatted input usingscanf()& write sample programs using it.
2.2.4 Formatted output usingprintf()& write sample programs using it.
2.3 Explain character functions
2.4 Define an operator, an expression
2.5 Explain
2.5.1 Various arithmetic operators and explain the evaluation of arithmetic
expressions with example.
2.5.2 Various relational operators and discuss evaluation of relational expressions
2.5.3 Various logical operators and discuss evaluation of logical expressions
2.6 Explain the difference between unary and binary operators
2.7 Describe various assignment operators, increment and decrement operators

112
2.8 Illustrate nested assignment
2.9 Explain conditional operators with an example
2.10 Explain
2.10.1 Bit-wise operators and explain each with an example
2.10.2 Special operators with examples
2.10.3 Precedence and Associativity of operators
2.11 Describe evaluation of compound expression
2.12 Illustrate type conversion techniques
2.13 Write sample programs by using all the operators

3.0 Decision making, iterative and other control statements

3.1 Explain decision making statements and its need in programming
3.2 Explain
3.2.1 Simple if and if-else statement with syntax and sample program
3.2.2 Nested if..else statements with syntax and sample program
3.2.3 if-else-if ladder with syntax and sample program
3.2.4 switch statement with syntax and sample program
3.3 State the importance of break statement with switch and illustrate
3.4 Compare
3.4.1 Conditional operator with if-else statement
3.4.2 if-else with switch statement
3.5 Define looping or iteration
3.6 List and explain iterative statements with syntax and examples
3.7 Compare different loop statements
3.8 What is nested loop and illustrate.
3.9 Explain the usage of goto, break and continue statements with loop statements
3.10 Differentiate break and continue statements.
3.11 Define structured programming.
4.0 Arrays, strings, Structures and Unions
4.1 Define Array
4.2 Describe
4.2.1 Declaration and initialization of One Dimensional (1D) Array with
syntax and sample programs.
4.2.2 Accessing the elements in 1D-Array with sample programs.
4.2.3 Reordering an array in ascending order.
4.3 Explain declaration and initialization and usage of two Dimensional (2D)Arrays.
4.4 Illustrate the concept of arrays with sample programs on matrix
addition, subtraction and matrix multiplication
4.5 Define String
4.6 Describe
4.6.1 Declare and initialize of String variables.
4.6.2 gets() and puts()
4.6.3 Reading and displaying of strings from terminal with sample programs.
4.6.4 Explain about various String handling functions with sample programs.
4.7 Explain Character arithmetic.
4.8 Define a structure.
4.9 Explain
4.10 Initializing structure, Declaring structure, Declaring Structure Variables.
4.11 Accessing of the structure members
4.12 Structure assignment.
4.13 How to find size of a structure.
4.14 Nested structureconcept.
4.15 Structures containing arrays

113
 4.16 Array of structures
4.17 Define Union, declare, initialize and use of union.
4.18 Distinguish between Structures and Unions
4.19 Write sample programs for all the concepts of structures and unions
5.0 User defined functions, pointers, file management and preprocessor directives

5.1 Explain
5.1.1 Need of user defined functions
5.1.2 Advantages of the functions
5.1.3 Elements of function
5.1.4 Return values and their types
5.2 Define a functioncall, function prototype
5.3 Explain
5.3.1 Function declaration in programs
5.3.2 Functions with no arguments and no return values with sample
programs
5.3.3 Functions with arguments with no return values with sample
programs
5.3.4 Functions with arguments with return values with sample programs
5.3.5 Functions with no arguments with return values with sample
programs
5.3.6 Functions that return multiple values with sample programs
5.3.7 Recursion with sample programs
5.3.8 Passing arrays to functions with sample programs
5.3.9 Structure as function arguments and structures as function values.
5.3.10 Structures containing pointers.
5.3.11 Self referential structures with examples.
5.3.12 Storage classes-auto, register, static, extern
5.3.13 Scope, visibility and lifetime of variables in functions
5.4 Differentiate Local and Externalvariables
5.5 Define Globalvariable
5.6 Discuss passing the global variables as parameters using sampleprograms
5.7 Explain
5.7.1 Declaration and initialization of Pointers.
5.7.2 Accessing the address of a variable using &operator
5.7.3 Accessing the value of a variable through pointer
5.7.4 Pointer Arithmetic
5.7.5 Precedence of address and de-referencingoperators.
5.7.6 Relationship between arrays and pointers.
5.7.7 Accessing array elements using pointers
5.7.8 Pointers as functionarguments
5.7.9 Pointer arrays withexamples.
5.8 Differentiate between address and de-referencingoperators.
5.9 Explain
5.9.1 Dynamic memory management functions withexamples.
5.9.2 Structures containingpointers.
5.9.3 Pointer tostructure.
5.9.4 Self referential structures withexamples.
5.10 Explain
5.10.1 Files and how to declare file pointer to afile
5.10.2 Illustrate the concept of file opening using variousmodes
5.10.3 Illustrate the concept of closing of afile

114
 5.10.4 Illustrate the concept of Input / Output operations on afile
5.10.5 Illustrate the concept of random accessingfiles
5.10.6 Explain different file handling functions
5.10.7 ExplainPre-processordirectives
5.10.8 State Need of pre-processor directives.

5.11 Write Simple programs using pre-processor directives.

5.12 Simple program using command line arguments(argc and argv)

COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction to CLanguage: History of C language - importance of C Define language -
structure of C language - programming style of C language - steps involved in executing the C
program-Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and Variables - Data
Types and classification - declaration of constants and variables-initializing values to
variables-user defined data types-usage of type qualifiers.
2. Input and output statements, Operators and Expressions inC:importance of Pre-processor
#include-reading and writing asingle character functions- formatted input and output
statements-operators-classification of operators-operator precedence and associativity-
expressions and expression evaluation-type conversion techniques.
3. Understand Decisionmaking, iterative and other control statements:simple if, if-else, if else
ladder, nested if-else-switch statement - else if, nested if , else if ladder, switchstatements-
Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do.. while statement ram - for
loop statement - nesting of loops- Comparisons of different loop statements –goto
statement-break and continue statements –concept of structuredprogramming
4. UnderstandArrays and strings , basics of Structures and Unions: Arrays -One Dimensional
Arrays – array programs -two Dimensional Arrays- programs on matrix - Strings –- String
handling functions - Structure- Array of structures - Nested structures- pointer to structure
Self referential structures - Union and illustrate use of a union – difference between
Structures and Union
5. Understand User definedfunctions, basics of pointers, file management and pre-processor
directives: Function – user defined functions – Advantages - Recursion concept - parameter
passing –storage classes - scope, visibility and lifetime of variables in functions- Local and
External variables -Global variable- - Pointer - Differentiate address and de-referencing
operators - Pointer Arithmetic- precedence of address and de- referencing operators - -
Relationship between Arrays and Pointers - Pointers as Function Arguments - Dynamic
memory management-
6. Files - file pointers - file opening in various modes - Concept of closing of a file –operations
on files - Need of Pre-processor directives - Various Pre-processor directives- Macros –
Command line arguments

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Programming inANSI C E.Balaguruswamy TataMcGrawHill
2 Programming withC Gottfried Tata McGraw Hill
3 C Thecomplete Reference Schildt Tata McGrawHill

115
 Marks Wise Question wise
No.of Weightage
S.No. Chapter/Unit title Distribution of Distribution of CO’s Mapped
periods Allocatd
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An
Introduction to C CO1,CO2
1 20 14 6 8 2 1
Language
Input and output CO1,CO2,C3
statements,
2 25 14 6 8 * 2 1 *
Operators and
Expressions in C
Decision making, CO1,CO2,CO3
3 iterative and other 40 14 6 8 * 2 1 *
control statements
Arrays and strings, CO1,CO2,CO3
4 Structures and 30 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 *
Unions
User defined CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,
5 functions, pointers, 35 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO5
file management

Model Blue Print

116
and pre-processor
directives
Total * 150 70 +10(*) 12 26 32 10* 4 7 4 1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from any one of starred chapters.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 2.13
Unit test-2 From 3.1 to 4.6
Unit test-3 From 4.7 to 5.12

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
PROGRAMMING IN C
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-106
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and each question of remaining carries
3marks

1. a)Int is a Data type in C language.(True/False) (CO1)

b) ‘a’ is an example for ________ constant. (CO1)
c)scanf() is used for __________. (CO2)
d) Which one of the following is aRelationaloperator [ ] (CO2)
I)+ II)- III)* IV)>=
2. List any three data types of C language. (CO1)
3. Define a) Keyword b) Identifier c) Constant (CO1)
4. Write a sample program using Conditional operator? (CO2)
5. Distinguish between pre-increment and post-increment operators. (CO2)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks

117
 Instructions:1) Answer all questions
2)Each question carries 8 Marks
3)Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer

6.a)Write the C-Programming structure and explain each part of it (CO1)

(Or)
b)Explain various generation of computers (CO1)
7.a) Explain Arithmetic, Relational, Logical operators with examples. (CO2)
(Or)
b) Evaluate the following C-Expression and write the final value (CO2)
X= (( 2 + 6 / 2 + 3 * 6 ) – ( (4 + 6 ) / 2 +5) /10) + 1) / 5.0
8. a) Illustrate Type Conversion techniques in detail (CO2)
Or
b) Write the C-program using formatted input and output functions. (CO2)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER - END EXAMINATION
PROGRAMMING IN C

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-106

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS
PART-A
Note: Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks 10 X 3=30M

1. Define an identifier and write two valid identifiers CO1

2. Write a short note on type qualifiers CO1
3. Write the syntax of formatted output statement CO1
4. Write a program to print the biggest of two numbers using conditional operators CO3
5. Differentiate between break and continue CO3
6 What is nesting? Give an example. CO2
7 What is an array? How to declare an array? CO2
8 List any three sting functions CO2
9 Define a pointer. Write the syntax to declare a pointer variable CO4
10 State the importance of “void”. CO4

PART-B
Note: 1. Answer all the question and making use of internal choice.
2. Each question carries 8 marks 5 X 8=40M

11(a).Write the C-Programming structure and explain each part of it . CO1

118
 OR
11(b).List and explain different data types supported by C-Language CO1
12(a).Explain all the operators supported by C-language with examples CO2
OR
12(b).Evaluate the following C-Expression and write the final value CO2
X= (( 2 + 6 / 2 + 3 * 6 ) – ( (4 + 6 ) / 2 +5) /10) + 1) / 5.0
13(a).Write a program to print the following pattern CO3
1
1 2 1
1 2 3 2 1
“ “ up to nth level
OR
13(b) Explain any four control statements in C-language. CO3

14(a).Write eight differences between structures and unions CO3

(OR)
14(b). Write a C-program to input 3X4 matrix and print in the form of matrix CO3
15(a). Write a program to calculate the factorial of a function using recursive concept with the help
of parameter passing and return value CO3 & CO5
(OR)
15(b). Explain any four file handling functions. 2X4=8 CO4

PART-C

Note: Answer the following question, this question carries 10 Marks 1 X10=10M
16. “Is it possible to compile an assembly language program using C compiler” Justify. (CO3)
ENGINEERING DRAWING
Subject Title : Engineering Drawing
Subject Code : CCN–107
Periods/Week : 06
Periods Per Year : 180
TIME SCHEDULE
No.
of No. Short Essay
S.N Marks to
Drawi Of Answer type
o Major Topics be Ques
ng Perio Questions
awarded
plates ds tions

Importance of
1 Engineering -- 01 - - -
Drawing
Engineering
2 Drawing 01 05 - - -
Instruments
Free hand
01
3 lettering & 06 05 1 -
Numbering
Dimensioning
4 01 09 05 1 -
Practice

119
 Geometrical
5 03 24 15 1 1
constructions
Projections of
Points, Lines,
6 Planes & 03 21 05 1
Auxiliary Planes

Projections of
7 01 12 10 1
Solids
Sections of
8 01 21 10 - 1
Solids
Orthographic
9 01 30 10 - 1
Projections

10 Isometric Views 01 30 10 - 1
Development of
11 01 21 10 - 1
surfaces
Total 14 180 80 04 06

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Course Upon completion of the course the student shall able to understand the basic
Objectives graphic skills and use them in preparation of engineering drawings, their
reading and interpretation

CO1 CCN-107.1 Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments

Familiarise with the conventions to be followed in engineering

CO2 CCN-107.2
drawing as per BIS

Course Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering

CO3 CCN-107.3
Outco curves
mes Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of i) Points ii) Lines
CO4 CCN-107.4
iii) Regular Planes iv) Regular Solids V) Sections of Regular Solids

CO5 CCN-107.5 Visualise and draw the isometric views of machine components

Draw the developments of surfaces of regular solids and use

CO6 CCN-107.6
them to make the components used in daily life

PO-CO Mapping
Course Course Title: ENGINEERING DRAWING No. of Periods:

120
 Code : Number of Course Outcomes: 06 180
CCN-107
CO Periods
Mapped with CO addressing PO in Level
POs Remarks
No. Column 1 (1,2,3)
No %
CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5, >40%
PO1 50 42 3
CO6 Level 3
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, Highly addressed
PO2 30 25 2
CO5, CO6 25% to 40%
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, Level 2
PO3 30 25 2
CO5, CO6 Moderately
PO4 Addressed
PO5 5 to 25%
PO6 Level 1
Low addressed
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, <5% Not
PO7 10 08 1 addressed
CO5, CO6

CCN-
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
107
CO1 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO6 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

1.0 Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing

1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of
Mechanical Engineering.

2.0 Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments

2.1 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines / curves.
2.2 Use correct grade of pencil to draw different types of lines and for different purposes
2.3 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.4 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
2.5 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.

121
 2.6 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
Drawing Plate 1: (Having two exercises)

3.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers

3.1 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height.
3.2 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height.
3.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications.
Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)

4.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice

4.1 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of dimensioning in
engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
4.2 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of dimensioning.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 08 to10 exercises)

5.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions

5.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like i) dividing a line into equal parts
ii) exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles
iii) tangent arcs to two given lines and arcs
5.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when i) side length is given
ii) inscribing circle radius is given iii) describing circle radius is given
5.2 Draw the conics using general and special methods,
5.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid iii) helix
5.4 Identify the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involute, cycloid and helix
6.0 Projections of points, lines, planes & auxiliary planes
6.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
6.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
6.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
6.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
6.5 Identify the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
6.5 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component .

Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points and Lines (15 exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6 exercises)
Drawing Plate -9: Having problems on auxiliary planes (Having 4 exercises)

7.0 Draw the Projections of Solids

7.1 Visualise and draw the projections of regular solids like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder,
Cone...(up to axis of solids parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
Drawing plate No.10: Having problems of projection of solids (10 exercises)

8.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views

8.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
8.2 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
8.3 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids by applying the principles of

122
 hatching.
Drawing Plate–11: Having problems of section of solids (6 exercises)

9.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection

9.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
9.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given object fully.
Drawing Plate 12 : (Having 10 to 12 exercises)

10.0 Prepare pictorial drawings

10.1 identify the need of pictorial drawings.
10.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
10.3 Prepare Isometric views from the given orthographic drawings.
Drawing plate 13: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)

11.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids

11.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
11.2 Draw the development of simple engineering objects and their truncations (cubes, prisms,
cylinders, cones, pyramid)
11.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like
i) funnel ii) 900 elbow iii) Tray
Drawing plate No. 14: (Having 05 exercises)

Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No Major topic Key Competency

 Explain the linkages between Engineering

1. Importance of Engineering Drawing drawing and other subjects of study in
Diploma course.
2. Engineering Drawing Instruments  Select the correct instruments to draw
various entities in different orientation
 Write titles using sloping and vertical
3. Free hand lettering & Numbering lettering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau
of Indian standards)
 Dimension a given drawing using standard
4. Dimensioning Practice notations and desired system of
dimensioning
 Construct ellipse, parabola, rectangular
5. Geometrical construction hyperbola, involute, cycloid and helix from
the given data.

Projection of points, Lines, Planes &  Draw the projections of points, straight lines,
6.
Solids planes & solids with respect to reference
planes (HP& VP)

123
  Draw the auxiliary views of a given
7. Auxiliary views Engineering component
 Differentiate between Auxiliary view and
apparent view
 Differentiate between true shape and
8. Sections of Solids apparent shape of section
 Apply principles of hatching.
 Draw simple sections of regular solids
9. Orthographic Projection  Draw the minimum number of views needed
to represent a given object fully.
 Differentiate between isometric scale and
10. Isometric Views
true scale.
 Draw the isometric views of given objects,.
 Prepare development of Surface of regular
11. Development of surfaces solids and other components like i) funnel
ii) 900 elbow iii) Tray

124
 COURSE CONTENTS:
NOTES:
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.

1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing

Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance
as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-46 –1988 –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering drawing
and other subjects of study.

2.0 Engineering drawing Instruments

Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales
reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet
Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the
Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,

3.0 Free hand lettering & numbering

Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils

4.0 Dimensioning practice

Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape

description of an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size description -Location of

features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning,
dimension line extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be
observed in the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional
system ( SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard, features “Circles
(holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.

5.0 Geometric Construction

Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts
Construction of tangent lines: to draw interior and exterior tangents to two circles of given radii
and centre distance
Construction of tangent arcs:
i) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right and
obtuse angles).
ii)Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
iii)Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given circles internally and externally.
Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon by general method for given side
length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscribing circle radius

Conics: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a loci of a
moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their Engg. Applications viz., Projectiles, reflectors,
Cooling Towers, P-V Diagram of a Hyperbolic process - Construction of any conic section of given

125
 eccentricity by general method - Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method, Oblong
Method and Arcs of circles method - Construction of parabola by rectangle method and Tangent
method - Construction of rectangular hyperbola

General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point, their
engineering application, viz., Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. – their construction

6.0 Projection of points, lines and planes & auxiliary views

Classification of projections, Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection, Reference Planes,
Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first angle and third angle
projections
Projections of points in different quadrants
Projections of straight line -
(a) Parallel to both the planes.
(b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
(c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes

Projections of regular planes

(a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes
(b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
Auxiliary views
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary
views explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane - Partial auxiliary view.

7.0 Projections of regular solids

(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.

8.0 Sections of Solids

Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular solids
inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane

9.0 Orthographic Projections

Meaning of orthographic projection - Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of engg
objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle
projection - Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an object –
Use of miter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method of
representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe an object fully.
10.0 Pictorial Drawings

Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and perspective
and their use - Isometric drawings: Isometric axes, angle between them, meaning of visual
distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric scale, and
true scale - difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection - Isometric and non-
Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features like rectangles, circular - shapes, non-
isometric lines – Drawing the isometric views for the given orthographic projections -Use of box
/ offset method

126
11.0 Development of Surfaces

Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work-Concept of true
length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel to the
plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -Development of simple
solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid and truncation of these solids-Types of
development: Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of drawing development of
funnels, 900 elbow pipes, Tray.

REFERENCE BOOKS
Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.
SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.

127
 C-20-CCN-107

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DME – I-YEAR
ENGINEERING DRAWING
Instructions: 01. All the dimensions are in mm
02. Use first angle projections only
03. Due weitage will be given for the dimensioning and neatness

PART – A 05 x 04=20
01. Answer all the questions
02. Each question carries FIVE marks

01. Write the following in single stroke capital vertical lettering of size 10mm
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
02. Redraw the given fig. and dimension it according to SP-46:1988.Assume suitable
scale

03. Draw internal common tangents to two unequal circles of radii 26mm and
20mm.The distance between the circles is 75mm.
04. Draw the projections of a regular pentagon of side length 40 mm inclined to the
H.P. by 300 and perpendicular to V.P. using auxiliary plane method

PART – B
10 X 04 = 40
01. Answer any FOUR of the following questions
02. Each question carries TEN marks

05. Draw the involute of a circle of diameter 30 mm and also draw a tangent to the
curve at a distance of 60 mm from the centre of the circle.
06. A right circular cone of height 80 mm and base radius 60 mm is resting in the H.P.
on one of its generators and its axis is parallel to V.P. Draw the projections of the
solid.
07. A regular hexagonal prism of height 80 mm and base side 40 mm is resting in the
H.P. on its base. It is cut by an auxiliary inclined plane of 600 inclination passing
through the axis at a distance of 30 mm from the top base. Draw the sectional
views of the solid and the true section.

128
 08. A pentagonal pyramid of height 80 mm and base side 40 mm is resting in the H.P.
on its base such that one of the sides of the base is perpendicular to the V.P. It is
cut by a section plane perpendicular to the V.P. and inclined to the H.P. by 600 and
passing through the axis at a distance of 25 mm from the base. Draw the
development of the lateral surface of the truncated pyramid.
09. Draw the front view, top view and left side view of the object shown in the fig.

10. Draw the isometric view of the component whose orthographic projections are given below

Curriculum Gaps identified in this subject:

1. Chapters 8, 10 and 11 are not required and they may be removed
2. The remaining chapter 1 to 7 & 9 are required and they can be taught only in 90 periods (out
of 180 periods allotted)
3. Instead of chapters 8,10 & 11, Basic 2D and 3D animation practical course may be included
for remaining 90 Periods(3 Periods per week)

129
 No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title
periods/week periods for FA for SA

CCN-108 Programming in C Lab 06 180 40 60

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

1. Fundamentals and Input/Output 15 CO1,CO2

statements
2. Control statements 45 CO1,CO2,CO4
3. Arrays, structures and unions 60 CO1,CO2,,CO3,CO4
User defined functions, storage CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5,
4. 60
classes, pointers, files and macros CO6
Total 180

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Edit, compile and debug execution of C-Programs
2. Learn the syntax of all the statements, keywords, user defied
identifiers and usage of writing statements in C-Program.
3. Evaluate all the expressions using different primary types of data,
derived data, operators and with their precedence,
COURSE
4. Write C-programs using I/O statements, decision making
OBJECTIVES
statements.
5. Write structured and modular C-programs
6. Write C-programs on text files using different file operating modes
and file pointers.
7. Write C-programs to implement dynamic memory allocation using
pointer concepts

Course Outcomes Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO 1 CCN-108.1 Perform Edit, compile and debug and execution of C-Programs

CO 2 CCN-108.2 Develop programs using different predefined functions, keywords,
user defined identifiers
CO 3 CCN-108.3 Write different expressions using available C-operators and valid
data supported by C-language
CO 4 CCN-108.4 Develop C-programs using control statements, array’s, structures,
unions, files
CO 5 CCN-108.5 Develop C-programs using user defined functions and recursion
CO 6 CCN-108.6 Develop C-programs to implement dynamic memory concept

130
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-108.1 2 2 1 2

CCN-108.2 2 3 2 2 2

CCN-108.3 2 2 3

CCN-108.4 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2

CCN-108.5 2 2 3 2 2 2

CCN-108.6 2 3 2 2

Average 2 2.5 3 2 2.4 2.5 2 2 2 2.2

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Fundamentals and Input / Output statements
1. Exercise on structure of C Program
2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on escape sequence characters
Control statements
(Note: Every statement must be repeated with at least 5 different applications)
10. Exercise on simple if statement
11. Exercise on if..else statement
12. Exercise on if..else..if ladder statement
13. Exercise on switch statement
14. Exercise on conditional operator comparing with if-else statement
15. Exercise on while statement
16. Exercise on for statement
17. Exercise on do. While statement
Arrays, structures and unions
18. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
20. Exercise on strings
21. Exercise on structure
22. Exercise on union
23. Exercise on array of structures
User defined functions, storage classes, pointers, files,and macros
24. Exercise on user-defined function
25. Exercise on storage classes

131
26. Exercise on parameter passing techniques
27. Exercise on recursion
28. Exercise on pointers
29. Exercise on text files
30. Exercise on macros

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment
1 Exercise on For a given C program,  Identify different building block in a C
structure of C identify the different program
program building blocks
2 Exercise on For a given C program  Identify different keywords
Keywords and identify the keywords  Check whether the keywords are in
identifiers and identifiers lowercase
 Differentiate identifiers and keywords
3 Exercise on For a given C program  Identify the constants
constants and identify the constants  Identify the variables
variables and variables  Declare variables with proper names
 Know the assignment of values to
variables
4 Execution of Execute a simple C  Acquaint with C program editing
simple C program program  Compile the program
 Rectify the syntactical errors
 Execute the program
5 Exercise on Write a C program that  Identify different arithmetic operators
operators and uses different arithmetic  Build arithmetic expressions
expressions operators  Identify the priorities of operators
 Evaluate arithmetic expression
 Compile the program
 Rectify the syntactical errors
 Execute the program
 Check the output for its correctness
6 Exercise on Write a C program that  Identify different special operators
special operators uses special operators  Build expressions using special
operators
 Compile the program
 Rectify the syntactical errors
 Execute the program
 Check the output for its correctness
7 Exercise on input Write a C program for  Know the use of get char() function
and output of reading and writing  Know the use of put char() function
characters characters  Compile the program
 Rectify the syntactical errors
 Execute the program
 Check whether the correct output is

132
 printed for the given input
8 Exercise on Write a C program using  Know the use of format string for
formatted input formatted input and different types of data in scan f()
and output formatted output function
 Know the use of format string for
different types of data in print f()
function
 Check whether the data is read in
correct format
 Check whether the data is printed in
correct format
9 Exercise on Write a C program using  Know the use of Escape sequence
Escape Sequence Escape Sequence characters
Characters Characters  Use the Escape sequence characters
 Check whether the data is read in
correct format
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Check the output for correctness
10 Exercise on Write a C program using  Build a relational expression
simple if simple if statement  Use the if statement for decision making
statement  Rectify the syntax errors
 Check the output for correctness
11 Exercise on Write a C program using  Build a relational expression
if..else statement if..else statement  Use the if..else statement for decision
making
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Check the output for correctness
12 Exercise on Write a C program using  Use else..if ladder statements with
else..if ladder else..if ladder statement correct syntax
statement  Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check the output for correctness
13 Exercise on Write a C program using  Use switch statement with correct
switch statement switch statement syntax
 Identify the differences between switch
and else..if ladder
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check the output for correctness
14 Exercise on Write a C program using  Build the three expressions for
conditional ( ? : ) conditional conditional operator
operator operator  Use conditional operator with correct
syntax
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Differentiate conditional operator and
if..else statement

133
15 Exercise on while Write a C program using  Build the termination condition for
statement while statement looping
 Use while statement with correct syntax
 Check whether correct number of
iterations are performed by the while
loop
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
16 Exercise on for Write a C program using  Build the initial, increment and
statement for statement termination conditions for looping
 Use for statement with correct syntax
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check whether correct number of
iterations are performed by the for loop
 Differentiate for and while statements
17 Exercise on Write a C program using  Build the termination condition for
do..while do statement looping
statement  Use do statement with correct syntax
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check whether correct number of
iterations are performed by the while
loop
 Differentiate do..while, while and for
statements
18 Exercise on one Write a C program to  Create a one dimensional array with
dimensional create and access one correct syntax
arrays dimensional array  Store elements into array
 Read elements from array
 Validate boundary conditions while
accessing elements of array
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
19 Exercise on two Write a C program to  Create a two dimensional array with
dimensional create and access two correct syntax
arrays dimensional array  Store elements into array
 Read elements from array
 Validate boundary conditions while
accessing elements of array
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input

134
20 Exercise on Write a C program for  Declare and initialize string variables
strings reading and writing  Read strings from keyboard
strings  Print strings to screen
21 Exercise on Write a C program using  Define a structure with correct syntax
structure structure  Identify different members of a
structure
 Declare a structure variable
 Access different members of structure
 Observe the size of the structure
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
22 Exercise on union Write a C program using  Define a union with correct syntax
union  Identify different members of a union
 Declare a union variable
 Access different members of union
 Observe the size of the union
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
23 Exercise on array Write a C program to  Define a structure with correct syntax
of structures create an array of  Identify different members of a
structures and store and structure
retrieve data from that  Declare a structure variable
array  Create an array of structure
 Access individual element of the array of
structure
 Access different members of structure
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
24 Exercise on user- Write a C program to  Identify the different parts of function
defined function define and call user- declaration
defined functions  Define function with correct syntax
 Classify functions based on it
parameters and return types
 Identify parameters passed
 Identify parameter passing method used
 Identify return value
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input

135
25 Exercise on Write a C program using  Know the use of different storage
storage classes different storage classes classes
 Use the different storage classes
 Check whether the scope of variables is
correctly defined or not.
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Check the output for correctness
26 Exercise on Write a C program using  Know the use of parameter passing
parameter parameter passing  Use the different parameter passing
passing techniques techniques
techniques  Check whether the parameters passed
correctly or not.
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Check the output for correctness
27 Exercise on Write a C program using  Identify where recursive call is made in
recursion recursion the function
 Validate the termination condition
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
28 Exercise on Write a C program using  Declare pointer variable
pointers pointer data type  Initialize pointer variable
 Access a variable through its pointer
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
29 Exercise on text Write a C program to  Define a file pointer
files create a text file, write  Use the various modes of file opening
data into it and read  Close the file
data from it  Write text into file
 Read text from file
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input
30 Exercise on Write a C program using  Know the need of macros
macros macros  Use the macros/pre processor directives
 Rectify the syntax errors
 Debug logical errors
 Check for the correctness of output for
the given input

136
E -1
PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE
(C-20 CURRIUCULUM COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

SubjectTitle : Physics Laboratory

SubjectCode : CCN-109 A
Periodsperweek : 03
Totalperiodsperyear : 45

TIMESCHEDULE

S.No Name of the Experiment No.of

1. Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers 03
Periods
2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge 03
3. Verification of Parallelogram law of forces and Triangle law of forces 03
4. Simple pendulum 03
5. Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method) 03
6. Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & Combination) 03
7. (Single lensindex
Refractive only)of solid using travelling microscope 03
8. Boyle’s law verification 03
9. Meter bridge 03
10. Mapping of magnet lines of force and locate null points 03
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
11. Surface tension of liquid using travelling microscope 03
12. Coefficient of viscosity by capillary method 03
Revision 06
Test 03
Total: 45
Objectives:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes and areas of a cylinder and sphere
and their comparison etc .
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate, cross sectional area
of a wire and volumes of sphere and also their comparison etc
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum
5.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
centigrade
6.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using distant object method , U-V
method , U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V
graph methods and their comparison.
7.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope
8.0 Verify the Boyle’s law employing a Quill tube
9.0 Determine the specific resistance of material of a wirel using Meter Bridge
10.0 Drawing magnetic lines of force under N-S and N-N methods and locate null points
11.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling Microscope (Demo)
12.0 Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method (Demo)

137
 Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Competencies Key competencies
Experiment
(No of Periods)

1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Calipers(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate the
 Read the scales requisite physical
 Calculate the physical quantities of given
quantities of given object objects
2. Hands on practice on Screw  Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass  Calculate cross section
place and cross section of of wire and other
wire and other quantities quantities

3. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

law of forces and Triangle law  Note the positions of equilibrium point
of forces(03) threads on drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium parallelogram
point
 Construct parallelogram  Construct triangle
 Compare the measured  Compare the ratios of
diagonal force and length
 Construct triangle
 Find the length of sides
 Compare the ratios

4. Simple pendulum(03)  Fix the simple pendulum to  Find the time for
the stand number of oscillations
 Adjust the length of  Find the time period
pendulum  Calculate the
 Find the time for number of acceleration due to
oscillations gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration
due to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph

138
5. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir
level
–Resonance method (03)  Arrange the resonance  Find the first and
apparatus second resonanting
 Adjust the reservoir level for lengths
booming sound  Calculate velocity of
 Find the first and second sound at room
resonanting lengths temperature
 Calculate velocity of sound  Calculate velocity of
sound at 00 C

6. Focal length and Focal power  Calculate the focal

of convex lens (Separate  Fix the object distance length and power of
&Combination) (03)  Find the Image distance convex lens
 Calculate the focal length  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
and power of convex lens graphs
and combination of convex
lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
graphs

7. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of  Read the scale
vernier on microscope  Calculate the
traveling microscope(03)  Place the graph paper below refractive index of
microscope glass slab
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab
8. Boyle’s law verification (03)  Note the atmospheric  Find the length of air
pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort  Find the pressure of
stand enclosed air
 Find the length of air column  Find the value P x l
 Find the pressure of
enclosed air
 Find and compare the
9. . Meter bridge(03)  Make the circuit connections  Find the balancing
calculated value P x l
 Find the balancing length length
 Calculate unknown  Calculate unknown
resistance resistance
 Find the radius of wire  Calculate the specific
 Calculate the specific resistance
resistance

139
10. Mapping of magnet lines of  Draw magnetic meridian
 Placed the bar magnet
force(03) in NN and NS directions  Draw magnetic lines
 Draw magnetic lines of of
force force
 Locate the neutral  Locate the neutral
points along equatorial points
and axial lines
11. Surface tension of liquid  Find the least count of  along
Read theequatorial
scale
usingtraveling microscope(03) vernier on microscope  and axial linesof
Calculate height
 Focus the microscope to the liquid rise
lower meniscus & bent pin  Calculate the surface
 Read the scale tension of water
 Calculate height of liquid rise
 Calculate the surface tension
of water
12.. Coefficient of viscosity by  Find the least count of  Find the pressure head
capillary method(03) vernier  Calculate rate of
 Fix the capillary tube to volume of liquid
aspiratory bottle collected
 Find the mass of collected  Find the radius of
water capillary tube
 Find the pressure head  Calculate the viscosity
 Calculate rate of volume of of water
liquid collected
 Find the radius of capillary
tube
 Calculate
Scheme of Valuation for end Lab Practical Examination :
the viscosity of
water using capillary method

A. Writing Aim, Apparatus, Formula, Graph, Precautions carries 10 (Ten) Marks

B. For Drawing the table, taking Readings, Calculation work,
Drawing the graph, finding result carries 15 (Fifteen) Marks

C. Viva Voice 05 (Five) Marks

Total 30 (Thirty) Marks

140
 CHEMISTRYLAB PRACTICE

(C-20 curriculum common to all Branches)

Subject Title : Chemistry Laboratory

Subject Code : CCN-109-B

Periods per week : 03

Total periods per year : 45

CO1 Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of

standard solution
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable precipitation
CO5 Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations with
instrument for investigation of water pollution parameters

TIMESCHEDULE

S.No Name of the Experiment No.of Mapped

Periods with COs
1. a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in 03
the laboratory by senses. CO1

b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis

2. Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions of different 03 CO1
3. EstimationofHClsolutionusingStd.Na
dilution solution. 2CO3solution 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaO Husing Std. HCl solution 03 CO2
5. Estimation of H 2 SO 4 usingStd.NaOH solution 03 CO2
6. Estimation of Mohr’s Salt usingStd.KMnO4 03 CO3
7. Determination of acidity of water sample 03 CO2
8. Determination of alkalinity of water sample 03 CO2
9. Determination of total hardness of water using Std. EDTA 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample
solution 03 CO4
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O)in water sample 03 CO5
12. Determination of pH using pHmeter 03 CO5
13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic 03 CO5
14. strength required
Determination level. of water
of turbidity 03 CO5
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample 03 CO5
Total: 45

141
Objectives:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask,
burettes) and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making
dilutions, etc To identify the chemical compounds and solutions by senses.

2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.

3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor
estimation of HCl

4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.HCl solution for estimation of
NaOH

5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. NaOH solution for
estimation of H 2 SO 4

6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4solution for
estimation of Mohr’s Salt

7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given samples
of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)

8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)

9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution

10.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the
given samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)

11.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open
container / tap water)

12.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to
determine their pH using standard pH meter

13.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions

a) To determine conductivity
b) To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
14.0 Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non coloured) to determine
their turbidity in NTU
15.0 To determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one
surface / tap water)

142
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)

Familiarization of methods for Volumetric -

analysis. Recognition of chemical substances --
And solutions(03)

 Weighing the salt to  Weighing the salt to

the accuracy of .01 mg the accuracy of .01 mg
 Measuring the water  Measuring the water
with volumetric flask, with volumetric flask,
Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions
measuring jar, measuring jar,
of different dilution(03)
volumetric pipette and volumetric pipette and
graduated pipette graduated pipette
 Making appropriate  Making appropriate
dilutions dilutions

Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)

Estimation of HCl solution using Std.

Na2CO3solution (03)
 Cleaning the glassware
and rinsing with
Estimation of NaOH using Std. HCl solution (03) appropriate solutions
 Making standard
Estimation of H 2 SO 4 usingStd. solutions
NaOH solution (03)  Measuring accurately
the standard solutions  Making standard
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt usingStd.KMnO4 (03) and titrants solutions
 Filling the burette with  Measuring accurately
titrant the standard solutions
Determination of acidity of water sample (03) and titrants
 Effectively Controlling
Determination of alkalinity of water sample  Fixing the burette to the flow of the titrant
(03) the stand  Identifying the end
 Effectively Controlling point
the flow of the titrant  Making accurate
Determination of total hardness of water using  Identifying the end observations
Std. EDTA solution (03) point
 Making accurate
observations
 Calculating the results

Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O)in water

EstimationofChloridespresentinwatersample
sample
(03) (By titration method) (03)

143
  Familiarize with
 Prepare standard
Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O)in water instrument
solutions / buffers,
sample (By electrometric method) (03)  Choose appropriate
etc.
‘Mode’ / ‘Unit’
 Standardize the
 Prepare standard
instrument with
Determination of pH using pH meter (03) solutions / buffers,
appropriate
etc.
standard solutions
 Standardize the
 Plot the standard
instrument with
Determination of conductivity of water and curve
appropriate
adjusting ionic strength to required level (03)  Make
standard solutions
measurements
 Plot the standard
accurately
curve
 Make
measurements
Determination of turbidity of water (03) accurately
 Follow Safety
precautions

Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)

 Measuring the
accurate volume  Measuring the
and weight of accurate volume
sample and weight of
 Filtering and air sample
drying without  Filtering and air
Estimation of total solids present in water
losing any filtrate drying without
sample (03)
 Accurately losing any filtrate
weighing the filter  Accurately
paper, crucible and weighing the filter
filtrate paper, crucible and
 Drying the crucible filtrate
in an oven

SCHEME OF VALUATION
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus ,principle and procedure 5M
B) Demonstrated competencies 20M
Making standard solutions
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants
Effectively Controlling the flow of the titrant
Identifying the end point
Making accurate observations
C) Viva-voce 5M
Total 30M

144
 Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks
Course Title
code Periods/Weeks periods FA for SA
CCN-110
Computer
(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)

Time schedule:

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of sessions No.of Periods

each of 3 periods
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90

Course i)To know Hardware Basics

Objectives ii)To familiarize operating systems
iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.

At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 CCN-110.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 CCN-110.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word
processing software
Course CO3 CCN-110.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to draw
Outcomes various graphs / charts.
CO4 CCN-110.4 Use Power point software to develop effective presentation
for a given theme or topic.
CO5 CCN-110.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop

145
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-110.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

CCN-110.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

CCN-110.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

CCN-110.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

CCN-110.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

Average 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

I. Computer Hardware Basics

1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections

b).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly

c).To check the software details of the computer

2. To check the hardware present in your computer

II. Windows’s operating system

3. To Explore Windows Desktop

4. Working with Files and Folders

5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint

III. Practice with MS-WORD

6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word

Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.

7. To practice Word Processing Basics

8. To practice Formatting techniques

9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns

10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks

11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word

12. To use Equations and symbols features

146
IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells

15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells

16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data

17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells

18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations

19. To sort and filter data in table.

20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.

21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.

22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print

V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT

23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.

24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation

25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint

26. To insert Text and Objects

27. To insert a Flow Charts

28. To insert a Table

29. To insert a Charts/Graphs

30. To insert video and audio

31. To practice Animating text and objects

32. To Review presentation

VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop

33.To familiarize with standard toolbox

34. To edit a photograph.

35. To insert Borders around photograph.

36. To change Background of a Photograph.

147
 37. To change colors of Photograph.

38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.

39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.

40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.

Key competencies:

Expt Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies

No

1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to

Computer system and Computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power Switch
vi) Start Button vii) Reset
Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
(b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
(c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using
b. Access application programs Start menu
using Start menu, Task b. Use taskbar and
manager Task manager
c. Use Help support

2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed
the details

3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
present in your computer speed manager and find
b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and

148
 Control Panel and check the Select icon related
status of devices like mouse to the details
and key board required
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename ,
b. Use copy / paste move arrange and search
commands to organize files for the required
and folders folder/file
c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted files
size, type, Modified from Recycle bin
Working with Files and d. Search a file or folder and find
Folders its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
Continued.... folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
5. Accessories: Calculator accessories and
b. Access Calculator using Run select correct text
Calculator – Notepad – command editor based on the
WordPad – MS Paint c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and create and save in the
.jpeg, .bmp files using MS required format.
Paint
6. To familiarize with Ribbon a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document
layout of MS word. – b. Use Save and Save as features and name
Home – Insert- page c. Work on two Word appropriately and
documents simultaneously save
layout- References-Review-
d. Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
View Printing options print options
7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and
Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace c. Use spell check/
features in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar

149
8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and
techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers
9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of rows fields – Deleting rows and word document and
and columns columns –inserting sub table – edit
marking borders. Merging and b. Use sort option for
splitting of cells in a Table arranging data.
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows / columns
features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order
10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks
and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.
11. To Use Mail merge feature a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical
symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and
b. Insert a symbol in the text Equations in the word
c. Insert mathematical equations
document
in the document

13. To Practice with MS-EXCEL a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with

spreadsheet and familiarize excel layout and
with MS Excel 2007 layout like use
MS office Button- b. Use various

150
 b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- features available
Title Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets- in toolbar
Formula Bar-Status Bar
14. To access and Enter data in a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap by various
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a addressing
File-Close Excel methods
b. Enter data and edit

15. To edit spread sheet Copy, a. Insert and Delete Columns Format the excel
Cut, Paste, and selecting and Rows-Create Borders- sheet
cells Merge and Center
b. Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in
Formulae Enter formula for
c. Use Automatic updating automatic calculations
function of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help
18. To Create Excel Functions, a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , involving cross
Count and Count If Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations

19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a
worksheet by
selecting specific
choice

151
20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and
graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports of Create Lab reports using MS a. Insert Practical
respective discipline Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet in a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
Excel, page setup and print b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers
symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Ribbon Use various options in Access required
layout &features of PowerPoint options in the tool bar
PowerPoint 2007. a. Home
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint Presentation PowerPoint PowerPoint
b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipAr
c. PowerPoint Bullets t and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master Slide in a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
PowerPoint and add notes Template and format
b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation

152
26. To Insert Text and Objects a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
b. Set Indents and line spacing Objects
c. Insert pictures/ clipart
d. Format pictures Use 3d features
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects

27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational

Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art

28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and

b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend

29. To insert a Charts/Graphs a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background

30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in
b. Adjust the volume in the appropriate
Add narration to the slide settings format.
c. Insert video file in the format b. Add narration to
supported by PowerPoint in a the slide
slide c. Use hyperlinks to
d. Use automatic and on click switch to
options different slides
e. Add narration to the slide and files
f. Insert Hyperlinks

31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects

effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit

153
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide show
d. Set up resolution c. Add timing to the
e. Exercise with Rehearse slides
Timings feature in PowerPoint d. Setup automatic
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool slide show
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out

33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph

standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color & Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text
Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool

34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image

b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of a corresponding tools.
photo
d. Remove the part of
photograph including graphics
and text

35 To insert Borders around a. Start with a single background Able to create a

photograph layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas add visual interest to
d. Create a border color a photo
e. Send the border color to the
back
f. Experiment with different
colors

154
36 To change Background of a a. open the foreground and Able to swap
Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools to using the Select and
paint over the image Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using:
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool Able to control color
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment saturation
layer tool

38 To prepare a cover page for a. open a file with height 500 and
the book in subject area width 400 for the cover page. Able to prepare cover
page for the book
b. apply two different colors to
work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options
39 To adjust the brightness a. open a file.
and contrast of picture to b. Go to image→ adjustments→ Able to control
give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast. brightness/contrast.

c. adjust the brightness and

contrast.
d. save the image.
40 To type a word and apply a. open a file Able to apply shadow
the shadow emboss effects b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended
option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.

155
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
Unit test-2 From 9 to 22
Unit test-3 From 23 to 40

156
 I Year Internal Lab Examination

UNIT TEST - I
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-

110
MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min

1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.

3. Identify the components on motherboard.

4. Perform the process of placing processor on CPU slot.

5. Perform the process of removing and placing the RAM in the corresponding slot.

6. Identify the CMOS battery and test whether it is working it or not.

7. Find details of following:

a) Operating System being used.

b) Processor name

c) RAM

d) Hard disk

8.Create a folder by your name, search a file or folder and find its path.

9. Draw the National Flag using MS Paint.

10. Create a word document that contains TEN names of your classmates (boys-5 & girls-5) and
perform the following tasks:

a) Save the document to your desktop.

b) Sort the names in each list alphabetically.

c) Set line spacing to 1.15.

d) Use bullet points for the names in both lists separately.

157
 I Year Internal Lab Examination

UNIT TEST - II
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-110 MAX

MARKS:40 Time:90Min

1. Write individually addressed letters to your friends about the Republic Day celebration
using Mail Merge.
2. Create a Word document about your college and insert page numbers in footer and College Name in
header.
3. Create your class time table using Tables in MS Word.

4. Create a 2-page document about your College& insert hyperlinks for courses offered in the college
and insert Bookmarks next to College Name.

5. Write individually addressed letters to your friends (at least 5 members) to intimate the External
Examination time table using Mail Merge.
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
6. Write an equation = in MS word.
(𝑥−𝑦)2 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2

7. Create the organizational structure of your college in MS Word.

8. Create a spreadsheet by totaling marks of 3 or more subjects, then calculate percentage and
hence find grade based on boundary conditions of FIVE students:

Grades O >= 90%, A >=80%, B >=70%, C >=60%, D >=50%, E >=40%, F <40%

9. Create a Excel spreadsheet for the following data, making sure that the cell marked with Category
(A1) is pasted in cell A1 in the spreadsheet and perform the questions below.

Category (A1) Product Name Quantity Inventory Price per Unit Total Price
Office Supplies Binder 2 20 12.99 25.98
Office Supplies Pencil 20 20 0.99
Electronics Samsung 4K Smart TV 1 5 399.00
Electronics Bluetooth Speakers 4 5 44.49
Computers Lenovo X230 12in Laptop 2 2 279.90

a). Change the format of the “Total Price” column to “Currency” format.

b) Calculate Total Price by writing formula.

c) Turn on filtering for the table.

d) Sort the table by column “Category” from A to Z.

10. Create a spreadsheet to calculate Cumulative monthly attendance for a period of Three months.

158
 I Year Internal Lab Examination

UNIT TEST - III

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-110

MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min

1. Create a PowerPoint Presentation about your College in 5 slides only.
2. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Hardware in minimum 5 slides.
3. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Fundamentals with Entrance, Emphasis effects in
minimum 5 slides.
4. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on any topic with special animation effects like Entrance,
Motion Paths &Exit.
5. Resize the image using photoshop.
6. Change the background of a Photograph.
7. Edit an image by using
a) Crop tool.
b) Resize the image
c) Save the new image with new name keeping original image as it is.
8. A Picture of two parrots (parrots.jpg) is given to you. Make anyone of one of the parrots in Black &
White.
9. Convert a color image to monochrome and improve quality of photograph.
10. Copy three pictures and fit into the empty frames.

159
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PRACTICAL QUESTION PAPER-YEAR END EXAM
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-110

MAX MARKS:60 TIME: 3 HOURS

1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.

3. Write the procedure to create the files and folders

4. Write the procedure to access Calculator, Paint and Notepad application
5. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Size
(b) Change the Font Style
(c) Change the Text Size
6. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a)Change the Font Color.
(b)Use Various Text Alignment Options.
(c)Format text in Bold, Italicand Underline.
7. Create the hierarchy of your family in MS Word.

8. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word:

(a) Insert a Table

(b) Add a Row

(c) Add a column

(d) Delete a Row

(e) Delete a column

(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
9. Write the procedure to use Equation(𝑥−𝑦)2 = 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2 and Symbols.

160
10. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Excel

(a) To Modify Column Width

(b) To Modify Row Height

(c) Format text in Bold, Italic, and Underline.

11. Write the procedure to create charts and Graphs in MS Excel

12. Write the procedure to create simple Power Point Presentation on your college in Three
slides.

13. Write the procedure to perform Animation on Text and Objects in your presentation.

14. Take a photographic image. Give a title for the image. Put the border. Write your names.
Write the Name of Institution and Place.

15. Prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area. Plan your own design.

16. You are given a picture of a flower and associated background (Extract.jpg).Extract the
Flower only from that and organize it on a background. Select your own background for
organization.
17. You are given a picture (BrightnessContrast.jpg). Adjust thebrightness and contrast of the
picture so that it gives an elegant look.
18. You are given a picture (position.jpg). Position the picture preferablyon a plain background
of a color of your choice - Positioning includerotation and scaling.
19. Remove the arrows and text from the given photographic image (Filename: photo.jpg).
20. Type a word; apply the following effects. Shadow Emboss.

161
 III SEMESTER

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING

ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2020
(III Semester)
Sub Name of the Instruction Total
Scheme Of Examinations
Code Subject Periods/Week Periods

162
 Per End
Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Semester Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CCN-
Mathematics –II 4 60 3 20 80 100
301
CCN- Python
5 - 75 3 20 100
302 Programming 80

CCN- Operating
4 - 60 3 20 80 100
303 systems

Data
CCN- Communication
6 - 90 3 20 80 100
304 and Computer
Networks
CCN-
DBMS 6 - 90 3 20 80 100
305
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
CCN- Python
- 3 45 3 40 60
306 Programming Lab 100
Computer
CCN- Hardware and
- 6 90 3 40 60 100
307 Network
Maintenance Lab

CCN-
DBMS Lab 4 60 3 40 60 100
308

CCN-
Multimedia Lab 4 60 3 40 60 100
309
Total 25 17 630 260 640 900
CCN-301 common with all branches
CCN-302 common with DAIME, DCBDE branches&CM-505 of DCME, IT-404 of DIT, WD-505 of DWDE
CCN-303 common with DAIME, DCME, DIT, DWDE branch *** CCN-305 common with DCME, DIT, DAIME,
DCBDE, DWDE branches& AI-404 Of DAIE****CCN-306 common with DAIME, DCBDE branches & CM-507 of
DCME, IT—407 of DIT
CCN-307 common with DAIME, DCBDE branches ***CCN- 308common with DCME,DIT,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE
branches& AI-409 of DAIE
CCN-309 common with DCME,DIT,DAIME,DCBDE,DWDE branches& AI-507 of DAIE
C-20

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II

Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

Course Title
Code Periods/week periods FA SA

163
 Engineering
CCN-301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Indefinite Integration 22 CO1

2 Definite Integration and its applications 24 CO2

3 Differential Equations of first order 14 CO3

Total Periods 60

Course (i) To understand the concepts of indefinite integrals and definite

integrals with applications to engineering problems.
Objectives
(ii) To understand the formation of differential equations and
learn various methods of solving them.

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able

CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

Course CO2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.

Outcomes
CO3 Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of
first order and first degree.

164
 C-20

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II

Learning Outcomes

Unit-I

C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

L.O.1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.

1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals  (u + v) dx
and  ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.

1.3. Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.

1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.

i)  f(ax + b) dx where f(x)dx is in standard form.

ii)  [f(x)]n f (x) dx

iii)  f (x)/[f(x)] dx

iv)  f {g(x)} g (x) dx

1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.

1.6. Evaluate the integrals of the form sinmx cosn x dx where m and n are suitable
positive integers.

1.7. Evaluateintegrals of suitable powers of tan x and sec x.

1.8. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type

1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2

165
 1.9. Evaluate the integrals of the type

1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos d and  a cos  b sin   cd .
1.10. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.

1.11. Solve problems using integration by parts.

1.12 Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form  u.vdx .

1.13. Evaluate the integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.

Unit-II

C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.

L.O.2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus

2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.

2.3. Solve problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above concept.

2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.

2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.

Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

2.6. Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.

2.7. Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.

2.8. Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the functions in any given
interval.

2.9. Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.

2.10.Solve some problems using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule for approximation of
integrals.

166
 Unit -III

C.O. 3 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first
degree.

L.O.3.1. Define a Differential equation, its order and degree

3.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.

3.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.

3.4Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable
method.

3.5 Solve Homogeneous differential equation of first order and first degree.

3.6 Solve exact differential equation of first order and first degree.

3.7 Solve linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q, where P and Q are
functions of x or constants.

3.8 Solve Bernoulli’s differential equation reducible to linear form.

3.9 Solve simple problems arising in engineering applications.

Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

167
 C-20

Engineering Mathematics – II

CO/PO – Mapping

CCN-
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
301

CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 3 2.3 2.6

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.

PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be

planned and conducted.

PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical techniques and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.

PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tools, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.

PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

168
 C-20

Engineering Mathematics – II

PO- CO – Mapping strength

CO periods addressing PO in
Mapped with Level
PO no column I Remarks
CO no (1,2 or 3)
Number %

1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 >40% Level 3

2 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 Highly addressed

3 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3

4 CO2, CO3 38 63.3% 3 25% to 40%

Level 2
5 Moderately
addressed
6

7
5% to 25% Level
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3
1 Low addressed
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 40 66.6% 3

PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 48 75% 3 <5% Not

addressed

169
 C-20

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II

COURSE CONTENTS

Unit-I

Indefinite Integration .

1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions.

Properties of indefinite integrals. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals

 sin
m
of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x. Integrals of the form x.cos n x dx, where at least one of
m and n is odd positive integers. Integrals of suitable powers of tanx. secx and cosecx.cotx
by substitution.

Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:

1 1 1
i) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2

Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions.

Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form  ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.

Unit-II

Definite Integral and its applications:

2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum. Area under plane
curves – Area enclosed between two curves. Mean and RMS values of a function on a given interval
Volumes of solids of revolution. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate
value of a define integral.

170
 Unit -III

Differential Equations:

3. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation-

formation of differential equations-solutions of differential equations of first order and first
degree using methods, variables separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential
equation, Bernoulli’s equation.

Textbook:

Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for third semester diploma courses, prepared &
prescribed by SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:

1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.

2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa

3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow.

171
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question

S. Chapter/ No of Weightage COs
distribution of wise distribution
No Unit title Periods allotted mapped
weightage of weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I:
1 Indefinite 22 28 11 11 06 0 2 2 2 0 CO1
Integration
Unit – II:
Definite
2 24 33 11 03 11 08 2 1 2 1 CO2
Integration and
its applications
Unit – III:
Differential
3 14 19 03 03 03 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Equations of
first order
Total 60 80 25 17 20 18 5 4 5 2

R: Remembering Type : 25 Marks

U: understanding Type : 17 Marks

Ap: Application Type : 20 Marks

An: Analysing Type : 18 Marks

C-20

Engineering Mathematics – II

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5

Unit Test-II L.O 2.6 to L.O 3.9

172
 UNIT TEST MODEL PAPERS

Unit Test I C –20, CCN-301

State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P

First Year

Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-II

Sub Code: CCN-301

Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following.

 x dx
8
a. Evaluate (CO1)
1
b. Evaluate  4  x2
dx. (CO1)

 e  f ( x)  f ( x)  dx  e f ( x)  c is true/false
x ' x
c. (CO1)

2
d. Evaluate  cos xdx (CO2)
0

 1
2. Evaluate   3cos ec 2 x  2 tan x sec x   dx. (CO1)
 x
sin  log x 
3. Evaluate  x
dx. (CO1)


x
4. Evaluate e sin 2 xdx. (CO1)

2

 sin
2
5. Evaluate xdx (CO2)
0

173
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks

(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation

is the content but not the length of the answer.

1
6. A) Evaluate  dx. (CO1)
5  4 cos x
or


4 3
B) Evaluate sin x cos xdx. (CO1)

 1  x2 

1
7. A) Evaluate cos  2 
dx. (CO1)
 1 x 
or


4 2x
B) Evaluate x e dx. (CO1)


2
8. A) Evaluate  cos 4 x cos xdx
0

(CO2)
or

2
sin10 x
B) Evaluate  dx (CO2)
0
sin10 x  cos10 x

-o0o-

174
 Unit Test II C –20, CCN-301

State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P

First Year

Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-II

Sub Code: CCN-301

Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following.

a. Volume of the curve y  f ( x) over the interval  a, b  when rotated about X-axis is
____________ (CO2)
b. Mean value of f ( x) over the interval  a, b  is____________ (CO2)

d2y
c. Order of differential equation 2
 p 2 y  0 is__________ (CO3)
dx
dy
d. Integrating factor of  Py  Q is________________ (CO3)
dx

2. Find the mean value of x 2  2 x  1 over the interval 1, 2 (CO2)

Find the area enclosed by curve x  4 y between the lines x  2 and x  4 (CO2)
2
3.
4. Form the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants from
y  A cos 2 x  B sin 2 x. (CO3)

dy 1 y2
5. Solve  . (CO3)
dx 1  x2

Part-B 3×8=24

175
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks

(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation

is the content but not the length of the answer.

A) Find the area bounded between the curve y  x  5x and the line y  4  2 x (CO2)
2
6.
Or

B) Find the R.M.S value of log x between the lines x  e to x  e2 (CO2)

x2 y 2
7. A) Find the volume of the solid obtained by revolving the ellipse   1 about x axis
16 25
(CO2)
or
6
1
B) Calculate the approximate value of  1  x dx by taking n  6 using Trapezoidal rule
0
(CO3)

8.    
A) Solve y 2  2 xy dx  2 xy  x 2 dy  0. (CO3)
or
dy y
B) Solve x   x3 y 6 . (CO3)
dx x

-o0o-

END EXAM MODEL PAPERS

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P

176
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS CCN- 301

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A

Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

1. Evaluate   2sin x  3 e x 
4 
 dx. CO 1
 1  x2 

2. Evaluate  e sin e dx. CO 1

x x

3. Evaluate  sin 3x cos 2 xdx. CO 1

4. Evaluate  xe dx. CO1

x

1
1
5. Evaluate  dx. CO 2
0
1  x2

6. Find the mean value of y  x 2 from x  0 to x  1 CO 2

7. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y  sin x from x  0 to x  
CO 2
2
 d3y 
2
 dy 
8. Find the order and degree of the differential equation  3   3    x 2  1
 dx   dx 
CO3

dy 1  y 2
9. Solve  CO3
dx 1  x 2


2
 2
 
10. Solve x  y dx  y  x dy  0. CO3

PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

177
 3x  1
11. A) Evaluate   x  1 x  3 dx. CO1
Or

1
B) Evaluate  5  4 cos x dx. CO1

12. A) Evaluate  x sin 3xcosxdx. CO1

Or

x
3
B) Evaluate cos xdx. CO1

1
x3
13. A) Evaluate  dx. CO2
0
1  x8

Or


2
1
B) Evaluate  dx. CO2
0
1  tan 3 x

14. A) Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y 2  4 x and x 2  4 y . CO2
Or

B) Find the R.M.S values of 27  4x 2 from x  0 to x  3 CO2

x2 y 2
15. A) Find the volume of the solid generated by revolution of the ellipse  1
16 25
about X-axis CO2
Or

11

 x dx by using Simpson’s 1/3rd rule by

3
B) Calculate the approximate value of
1

dividing the range into 10 equal parts. CO2

178
 PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

dy
16. Solve 2sin x  y cos x  xy 3e x . CO3
dx

179
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS CCN-301

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER-II MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A

Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

1. Evaluate   3 e x  2 cos x   dx. CO 1

3
 x

2. Evaluate  cos 2 xdx. CO 1

2

tan 1 x
3. Evaluate  dx. CO 1
1  x2

4. Evaluate  x cos xdx. CO1

2
1
5. Evaluate  dx. CO2
0 4  x2
6. Find the mean value of i  a sin t over the complete wave.CO2

7. Find the volume generated by revolving the circle x 2  y 2  9 from x  0 to x  2

about x-axis CO2
8. Obtain the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants A and B

from the curve y  Ae x  Be x CO3

dy
9. Solve  e2 x  y CO3
dx
dy y
10. Solve   x CO3
dx x

180
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

1
11. A) Evaluate  2x 2
 3x  5
dx. CO1

Or

B) Evaluate  sin 3 x cos5 xdx. CO1

2  sin 2 x 
12. A) Evaluate  e x   dx. CO1
 1  cos 2 x 
Or

B) Evaluate  e x dx.
2x 4
CO1

1
sec2 x
13. A) Evaluate  dx. CO2
1  tan x 
2
0

Or


2
B) Evaluate  log 1  tan   d . CO2
0

14. A) Find the area bounded between the curves y  x 2 and the line y  3x  4 . CO3

Or

B) Find the R.M.S value of log x between the lines x  e to x  e2 CO2

15. A) Find the volume of right circular cone using integration. CO2
Or

1
1
B) Find the approximate value of  from  1 x
0
2
dx using Trapezoidal rule by

dividing  0,1 into 5 equal sub-intervals. CO2

181
 PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. Solve xy 2 dy   x3  y 3  dx  0 CO3

Curriculum Gaps identified in this subjects:

1 Unit-I: Indefinite Integration and part of Unit-II: Definite Integration are required for CME
branch
2 Part of Unit-II: Appliocations of Definite Integration and Unit-III are not required
3 Instead of Part of Unit-II: Appliocations of Definite Integration and Unit-III , Concepts of
Discrete Mathematical Structures may be included which is essential for CME branch students.

Course Course Title No. of Periods/ Total No. of Marks Marks for
code Weeks periods for FA SA
CCN-302 Python 5 75 20 80
Programming

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Python Programming Introduction 10 CO1
2. Control Flow and Loops 15 CO2
3. Functions and Arrays 15 CO3
4. Data Structures 15 CO4
5. Object Oriented Programming in Python 20 CO5

182
 and File Handling and Exception Handling
Total Periods 75

Course Objectives i)To know the fundamentals Python programming

ii)To understand fundamental syntactic information about ‘Python’

iii) To develop various python programs

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

CO1 CCN-302.1 Explain Basic constructs like operators, expressions and
components of python programming as well as Editing and
Debugging

CO2 CCN-302.2 Write Python programs using Control statements, Loops

Course
CO3 CCN-302.3 Write python programs using Functions and arrays
Outcomes
CO4 CCN-302.4 Develop Python programs using Data structures

CO5 CCN-302.5 Develop Python application programs using OOP Concept, FILES,
Exceptions
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-302.1 3 3 3 2 3 2 3
CCN-302.2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 2
CCN-302.3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CCN-302.4 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 1
CCN-302.5 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 1
Average 2.4 2.2 2.6 2.25 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.4 1.75 2
3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Introduction
1.1. History of Python.
1.2. List Python features.
1.3. Explain Applications of Python.
1.4. Describe Python Integrated Development and Learning Environment (IDLE)
1.5. Give the process of Running Python Scripts.
1.6. Explain Identifiers, Keywords, Indentation, Variables
1.7. Explain various datatypes (Int, float, Boolean, string, and list)
1.8. Explain declaration, initialization of variables.
1.9. Explain Input and Output statements.
1.10. Explain formatted input output.
1.11. State the usage of comments
1.12. Explain various Operators.
1.13. Explain Boolean values.

183
1.14. Explain Operator precedence rules.
1.15. State the purpose of modules.
1.16. Define functions.
1.17. List types of functions.(Built-in, User defined)
1.18. Explain Built-in Functions.
1.19. Give the Steps in Develop a simple python program and execution.

2.0 Control Flow and Loops

2.1. Explain various Control Flow constructs.
2.1.1 If
2.1.2 If-Else
2.1.3 if-elif-else
2.2 Explain various Loop Statements.

2.2.1 for Loop

2.2.2 while loop
2.2.3 break
2.2.4 continue
2.2.5 pass

3.0 Functions and Arrays

3.1 Introduction
3.2 Function Arguments: Default arguments, Variable Length arguments
3.3 Anonymous Functions
3.4 Return Statement
3.5 Scope of variables: Local Variables and Global Variables
3.6 Explain creation of modules.
3.7 Explain importing of modules.
3.8 Python Variable: Namespace and scoping
3.9 Python Packages
3.10 Explain Strings: String slices, immutability
3.11 Explain String functions and methods.
3.12 Explain about String module.
3.13 Explain about Python Arrays.
3.14 Explain accessing of elements in an Array.
3.15 Explain Array methods.

4.0 Data Structures

4.1. Explain Python Lists.
4.2. Describe Basic List Operations.
4.3. Explain List Slices.
4.4. Explain List methods.
4.5. Explain List loop.
4.6. Explain mutability.
4.7. Explain aliasing.
4.8. Explain Cloning lists.
4.9. Explain List parameters.
4.10. Explain List comprehension.
4.11. Tuples.

184
 4.11.1. Explain Tuple assignment.
4.11.2. Explain Tuple as return value.
4.11.3. Explain Tuple Comprehension
4.12. Dictionaries
4.12.1. Explain creation of dictionary/assignment.
4.12.2. Explain Operations and methods.
4.12.3. Explain Dictionary Comprehension.
4.13. Explain Sets.

5.0 Object Oriented Programming in Python and File Handling and Exception Handling
5.1 Creating Classes
5.2 Creating Objects
5.3 Method Overloading and Overriding
5.4 Data Hiding
5.5 Data Abstraction
5.6 Opening files in different modes
5.7 Processing files
5.8 Closing a file
5.9 Exception Handling

COURSE CONTENT

UNIT – I:

Introduction: Introduction to Python and installation, data types: Int, float, Boolean, string,
and list; variables, Arithmetic Operators, Comparison (Relational) Operators, Assignment
Operators, Logical Operators, Bitwise Operators, Membership Operators, Identity Operators,
Boolean values, expressions, statements, precedence of operators, comments; modules,
functions--- function and its use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments.

UNIT – II:

Control Flow and Loops: Control Flow- if, if-elif-else, for, while, break, continue, pass

UNIT – III:

Functions and Arrays - Defining Functions, Calling Functions, Passing Arguments, Keyword
Arguments, Default Arguments, Variable-length arguments, Anonymous Functions, Fruitful
Functions(Function Returning Values), Scope of the Variables in a Function - Global and Local
Variables, Modules: Creating modules, import statement, from Import statement, name
spacing, Python packages, Introduction to PIP, Installing Packages via PIP, Using Python
Packages - Strings: string slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module;
Python arrays, Access the Elements of an Array, array methods.

UNIT – IV:

185
 Data Structures : Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing,
cloning lists, list parameters, list comprehension; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return
value, tuple comprehension; Dictionaries: operations and methods, comprehension-sets.

UNIT – V:

Object Oriented Programming OOP in Python: Classes, 'self-variable', Methods, Constructor

Method, Inheritance, Overriding Methods, Data hiding,

File Handling: Open Files, File Processing and Closing a File

Error and Exceptions: Difference between an error and Exception, Handling Exception, try
except block, Raising Exceptions, User Defined Exceptions

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Python Programing by K. Nageswara Rao, Shaikh Akbar - Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.
2. Python Programming: A Modern Approach, Vamsi Kurama, Pearson
3. Learning Python, Mark Lutz, Orielly
4. Think Python, Allen Downey, Green Tea Press
5. Core Python Programming, W.Chun, Pearson.
6. Introduction to Python, Kenneth A. Lambert, Cengage

ModelBlue Print:

S.No. Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage Marks Wise Question wise CO’s Mapped
title periods Allocatd Distribution of Distribution of
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Python
1 Programming 10 11 3 8 1 1 CO1
Introduction

Control Flow *
2 15 14 3 8 3 * 1 1 1 CO2
and Loops

Functions and *
3 15 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 CO3
Arrays

4 Data Structures 15 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO4

Object Oriented *
Programming in
5 Python and File 20 17 3 6 8 * 1 2 1 CO5
Handling and
Exception

186
 Handling

Total * 75 70+10* 20 23 27 10* 5 6 4 1*

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit test-2 From 3.8 to 5.9

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
Python Programming
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME : C-20 SUBJ CODE : CCN-302
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.

1. a) Mathematical operations can be performed on a string.(True/False) (CO1)

b) ________ has the highest precedence in the expression. (CO1)

c)~4 evaluate to _____________ (CO2)

d) Which of the following precedence order is correct in Python? (CO3)

i) Parentheses, Exponential, Multiplication, Division, Addition, Subtraction

ii) Multiplication, Division, Addition, Subtraction, Parentheses, Exponential

iii) Division, Multiplication, Addition, Subtraction, Parentheses, Exponential

iv) Exponential, Parentheses, Multiplication, Division, Addition, Subtraction

2. List features of Python. (CO1)

3. Write the rules for choosing names of variables. (CO1)
4) Define Local Variable. (CO3)
5) Write about if statement with an example. (CO2)

187
 PART-B 3X8=24Marks
Instructions:1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer

6. a) Explain about the need for learning python programming and its importance. (CO1)

Or

b) Explain the basics for executing a python program using REPL(Shell) with an example.(CO1)

7. a) What are the different loop control statements available in python? Explain with suitable
examples. (CO2)

Or

b) Explain various looping statements. (CO2)

8. a)Write a python program to find the reverse of a given number using functions. (CO3)

Or

b) List and explain different arithmetic operators supported by Python. Discuss about their
precedence and associativity. (CO1)

188
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER – END EXAMINATION
Python Programming
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ
CODE:CCN-302
MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3
HOURS

PART-A 10X3=30Marks

Note: Answer all questions

1. Write in brief about the applications of Python. CO1

2. State the importance of pass in Python. CO2
3. Demonstrate the use of continue in loop statement. CO2
4. List different types of arguments in Python. CO3
5. Can a Python function return multiple values? If yes, how it works? CO3
6. List different methods used in Python lists. CO4
7. Write in brief about sets in Python. CO4
8. List Object oriented features supported by Python. CO5
9. List different modes in File opening. CO5
10. Define Exception. CO5

PART-B
5x8=40Marks

Note: Answer all questions

11. A.Explain about Python IDLE.

CO1
or
B. Explain about different data types in Python.
CO1

12. A. Write a Python program to print sum of first 100 natural numbers using any loop.
CO2
or
B.Explain different conditional control flow statements in Python with examples.
CO2

189
 13. A.Explain String functions and methods.
CO3
or
B. Write a Python program to add two matrices using array methods.
CO3

14. A.Explain in detail about dictionaries in Python.

CO4
or
B.Write in brief about Tuple operations with suitable examples in python.
CO4

15. A.Explain how to create a user defined exceptions.

CO5
or
B.What are the two ways of importing a module? Which one is more beneficial?
Explain. CO5

PART – C
1X10=10Marks
16. Is SQL better than Python or not justify. CO3
No. of Total No. of Marks for
Course code Course Title Marks for FA
Periods/Weeks periods SA

Operating
CCN-303 4 60 20 80
Systems

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction to Operating system 12 CO1

2. Process management 12 CO2

3. Synchronization & Deadlocks 12 CO3

4. Memory management 12 CO4

5. Disk scheduling and File management 12 CO5

Total Periods 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able

i) To know about the basics of Operating Systems
ii)To familiarize with process management, Scheduling algorithms,
Course Objectives
Synchronization and deadlock techniques
iii)To understand various Memory management techniques
iv)To familiarize with File management

190
 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able
CO1 CCN-303.1 Explain basic concepts of Operating System
CO2 CCN-303.2 Analyse a given process scheduling algorithm
Course CO3 CCN-303.3 Describe Semaphores, synchronization and Deadlock handling techniques
Out
comes CO4 CCN-303.4 Use memory management techniques and page replacement algorithms
CO5 CCN-303.5 Use Disk scheduling algorithms and File allocation methods with respect to
different operating systems

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-303.1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CCN-303.2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2
CCN-303.3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3

CCN-303.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CCN-303.5 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2

CCN-303.6 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3

Average 3 3 2.5 2 2.5 3 3 3 2.5 2.5

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Introduction to operating systems
1.1 Define an operating system
1.2 Discuss history of operating system
1.3 Discuss about various types of operating systems
1.4 Distinguish spooling and buffering
1.5 Explain the concepts of multiprogramming and timesharing
1.6 Differentiate between distributed and real time systems
1.7 Describe multiprocessor systems
1.8 Describe the operating system components
1.9 Discuss operating system services
1.10 Define system call with an example
1.11 List and explain different types of system calls
1.12 Define single user, multi user operating system structure

191
2.0 Process management
2.1 Define process and process control block
2.2 Explain process state diagram
2.3 Describe process creation and termination
2.4 Discuss the relation between processes
2.5 Define Thread and describe multithreading
2.6 Explain scheduling concepts
2.7 Describe scheduling queues and schedulers
2.8 Explain CPU scheduling and scheduling criteria
2.9 Explain various scheduling algorithms
2.9.1 FCFS
2.9.2 SJF
2.9.3 Round Robin
2.9.4 Priority
2.9.5 Multilevel Scheduling
3.0 Synchronization & Deadlocks
3.1 Define Process synchronization
3.2 Describe semaphores
3.3 Explain inter process communication
3.4 Define Deadlock
3.5 State the necessary conditions for arising deadlocks
3.6 State various techniques for deadlock prevention
3.7 Discuss Deadlock avoidance and detection
3.8 Describe the process of recovering from deadlock

4.0 Memory management

4.1 Discuss Memory Hierarchy.
4.2 Describe briefly address binding, dynamic loading, dynamic linking
4.3 Define overlays
4.4 Describe briefly on swapping
4.5 Explain single partition allocation
4.6 Explain multiple partition allocation
4.7 Explain the concept of fragmentation
4.8 Explain paging concept
4.9 Explain how logical address is translated into physical address
4.10 Explain segmentation and segmentation with paging
4.11 Define and explain virtual memory techniques
4.12 Describe demand paging
4.13 Describe page replacement
4.14 Discuss on page replacement algorithms
4.14.1 FIFO
4.14.2 LRU
4.14.3 Optimal
4.15 Explain the concept of thrashing
4.16 Explain working set model and page fault frequency

5.0 Disk scheduling and File management

5.1 List and define various disk performance parameters like Capacity, Latency time,
Seek Time, transfer rate, Access time, reliability, and average transfer time.

192
5.2 Calculate Latency time, Seek Time, transfer rate, transfer time with numerical
examples on disk structure.
5.3 Disk allocation methods.
5.4 Disk scheduling policies
5.2.1 FIFO
5.2.2 SSTF
5.2.3 SCAN methods
5.5 Define file management
5.6 List and explain various file operations
5.7 List and explain various access methods
5.8 List and explain various allocation methods
5.9 List and explain directory structure
5.10 Explain disk organization and structure

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Introduction to operating systems

Operating System –Evolution of operating system-Types of Operating Systems - Multi
Programming and Time Sharing - Distributed and Real time Systems - spooling and buffering
- Multi processor systems-Components of Operating Systems - operating System Services -
system Calls - single User and Multi user operating System Structure.

2. Process management
Processes - Sequential Processes - Process State Diagram - Process Control Block - Process
Creation and Termination - Relations between Processes - Threads and Multi-Threading -
Scheduling Concepts - Schedulers - CPU scheduling and Scheduling criteria - scheduling
algorithms.

3. Synchronization & Deadlocks

Inter Process Communications - semaphores – monitors Deadlocks - principal of deadlock -
deadlock prevention - deadlock detection - deadlock avoidance.

4. Memory management
Memory Hierarchy, Address binding -Dynamic Loading- dynamic linking-overlays-swapping-
memory allocation-fragmentation-paging-segmentation- segmentation with paging-Benefits
of virtual memory - virtual memory techniques - demand paging - page replacements - page
replacement algorithms – thrashing.

5.Disk scheduling and File management

Disk performance parameters - Disk Allocation methods-Disk scheduling policies –
Introduction to file systems - File Management-File Operations - Access methods - Directory
structure organization - File Protection.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Operating Systems,Silber Schatz and Galvin- Wiley

2. Operating Systems, William Stallings-Prentice Hall
3. Operating Systems, Dietel and Dietel -Pearson
4. Operating Systems, Dham here -TMH

193
5. Advanced Operating Systems, Tanenbaum- Prentice Hall

MODEL BLUE PRINT

S. No. of Weightag Marks Wise Question wise CO’s

Chapter/Unit
No period e Distribution of Distribution of Mappe
title
. s Allocated Weightage Weightage d

A A A
R U An R U
p p n

Introduction to
1 Operating 12 14 6 8 2 1 CO1
system

Process
2 12 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
management

Synchronizatio
3 12 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO3
n & Deadlocks

Memory
4 12 14 6 8 2 1 CO4
management

Disk
scheduling and 1
5 12 14 3 * 1 2 * CO5
File 1
management

Total 2 3 10
60 70+(10*) 8 8 6 1 1
4 8 *

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with
*.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.4
Unit test-2 From 3.5 to 5.10

194
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER
OPERATING SYSTEMS
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-303
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES
PART-A 16Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and remaining carries 3marks each.

1. a) Operating system is a Hardware. (True/False)

(CO1)
b) Operating system is also known as ___________ manager.
(CO1)
c)Full form of FCFS is ___________.
(CO2)
d) Which one of the following is not a process state [ ]
(CO2)
I) New II) Scheduling III) Suspend IV) Running
2) List any three types of Operating Systems.
(CO1)
3) Define spooling and buffering.
(CO1)
4) Draw Process state diagram.
(CO2)
5) Define Process Synchronization. (CO3)

PART-B
3X8=24Marks
Instructions: 1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is
the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain the concept of Multiprogramming and Time sharing.
(CO1)
(Or)
b) Explain various system calls with an example.
(CO1)

195
7. a) Differentiate Distributed and Real-time systems.
(CO1)
(Or)
b) Explain SJF scheduling algorithm with an example. (CO2)

8. a) Explain Round Robin CPU scheduling algorithm.

(CO2)
(Or)
b) Explain Inter process communication.
(CO3)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER - END EXAMINATION
OPERATING SYSTEMS

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-303

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3
HOURS

Instructions:
1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries Three marks
1. Define Operating system. (CO1)
2. List different types of system calls. (CO1)
3 Define the terms program and process? (CO2)
4 Write about multithreading? (CO2)
5 List the necessary conditions for deadlock? (CO3)
6 Define Semaphore. (CO3)
7 State the need of Virtual Memory? (CO4)
8 Define Overlay. (CO4)
9 Define Latencey Time and Seek time. (CO5)
10 List the file allocation methods. (CO5)
PART-B 5x8=40Marks

Instructions:

196
1)Answer all questions

2) Each question carries Eight Marks

3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the

content but not the length of the answer

11.A. Differentiate multiprogramming and time sharing? (CO1)

OR
11.B Explain in detail about OS services? (CO1)
12.A. Draw and explain process state diagram? (CO2)
OR
12.B Explain various scheduling algorithms (CO2)
13.A. Explain inter process communication (CO3)
OR
13.B Explain Deadlock avoidance and detection (CO3)
14.A. Explain paging concept (CO4)
OR
14.B Explain virtual memory techniques (CO4)
15.A Calculate the average access time for transferring 512 bytes of data with the data
rate 40KB per second. The average seek time is 5msec, the disk rotation is 6000RMP, and
the controller overhead is 0.1 msec. (CO5)
OR
15.B Explain disk organization and structure (CO5)

PART-C 1x10=10Marks

16. Consider the situation, "There are two teams, team A and team B. Both want to play
cricket and went to playground but the problem is , team A has just Bat but no ball and team
B has just ball and no bat ( both team don't care about it as they are assuming there would
be some shop nearer and they will purchase the missing item). They reach the playground at
the same time and now inquired if there is any sport shop but they come to know there is no
shop. Somehow, they come to know about each other problem, now Team A requested
team B to provide them their Ball and team but requested team A to provide them their Bat.
But both teams are not ready to share their bat or ball as already they have sufficient 11
players and both want to play cricket.”

Is there any deadlock situation occurs? Justify the answer. (CO3)

197
 No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course code Course Title
Periods/Weeks periods FA SA

Data
Communication
CCN-304 6 90 20 80
and Computer
Networks

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction to Data communication 15 CO1
and Computer Networks
2. Data Link Layer 25 CO2
3. Network Layer 20 CO3
4. Transport & Session Layer 20 CO4
5. Presentation & Application Layer 10 CO5
Total Periods 90

i)To familiarize the concepts of data communication and computer

networks
ii)To understand the concepts of Error control and Flow control
techniques during transmission in data link layer
Course Objectives iii)To understand IP address and routing algorithms to find out the
optimum route in the network
iv)To know the concepts of traffic and its control which ensures quality
of service(QoS) in Transport layer
v)To familiarize the usage of Application layer protocols in Real world
applications

At the end of the course the student able to learn following:

CO1 CCN-304.1 Explain the features of data
communication and Standard network
reference models like ISO:OSI & TCP/IP
CO2 CCN-304.2 Analyse the services and features of

198
 various protocols used in data link
Course layer.
Outcomes CO3 CCN-304.3 Describe various routing protocols of
Network layer.
CO4 CCN-304.4 Explain various protocols that are used
in Transport layer.
CO5 CCN-304.5 Use various protocols and services of
Application layer in Real World
application
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-304.1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 1 1

CCN-304.2 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 3 1 1

CCN-304.3 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 1 3

CCN-304.4 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2

CCN-304.5 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 1

Average 1 2.2 2.8 1.6 2 2 2 3 1.4 1.6

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Introduction to Data Communication and Computer Networks

1.1. Define Data communication.
1.2. Explain various Data Transmission modes (Serial, Parallel, Synchronous,
Asynchronous, Isochronous transmission)
1.3. Explain various Data transmission characteristics (Signalling rate, data rate, bit rate,
baud rate)
1.4. Define computer network.
1.5. State the need of computer networks.
1.6. List the advantages and disadvantages of computer networks.
1.7. List the applications of computer networks
1.8. List and explain various Network Topologies(Mesh, Star, Bus, Tree, Ring and Hybrid)
1.9. Classification of Networks
1.9.1.Based on Transmission Technologies(Point to-point, Multipoint, Broadcast)
1.9.2.Based on Physical size(LAN, MAN, WAN)
1.9.3.Based on Architecture (Peer to Peer, Client Server)
1.10. List and Explain various Networking devices( Repeater, Hub, Switch, Router, Bridge,
Gateway)
1.11. Communication standards (Reference models)
1.11.1. Explain OSI reference model.
1.11.2. Explain TCP/IP Reference Model.

199
 1.12. Transmission Media
5.1.1.Guided Transmission media (Twisted pair cable, Coaxial cable, Optical Fiber
cable)
5.1.2.Unguided Transmission media( Radio waves, Micro waves, Infrared waves)
1.13. Define Analog and Digital Transmission
2.0 Data Link Layer.
2.1. List the Services provided to the Network Layer
2.2. Explain Fixed and variable sized framing
2.3. List different types of errors
2.4. Explain the following Error detection techniques
2.4.1.Single parity
2.4.2.Two dimensional parity
2.4.3.Check sum
2.4.4.Cyclic Redundancy Check
2.5. Explain the following Error correction techniques
2.5.1.Forward error correction.
2.5.2.Backward Error correction
2.5.3.Cyclic Redundancy check
2.5.4.Hamming code
2.6. List and explain Flow control techniques
2.6.1.Stop and wait
2.6.2.Sliding window
2.7. Explain the following Medium Access control(MAC) Protocols
2.7.1.ALOHA
2.7.1.1. Pure ALOHA
2.7.1.2. Slotted ALOHA
2.7.2.CSMA
2.7.3.CSMA/CA
2.7.4.CSMA/CD
2.8. Explain IEEE Standards for the following LAN’s
2.8.1.Ethernet (IEEE 802.3)
2.8.2.Token Bus (IEEE 802.4)
2.8.3.Token Ring(IEEE 802.5)
3.0 Network Layer
3.1. List and Explain the services provided by Network layer
3.2. Circuit Switching Vs Packet Switching
3.3. Classify Routing Algorithms
3.3.1. Explain Adaptive Routing Algorithms.
3.3.1.1. Distance vector Routing
3.3.1.2. Link state routing
3.3.2.Explain Non Adaptive Routing Algorithms
3.3.2.1. Flooding
3.3.2.2. Shortest Path
3.4. Explain TCP/IP Addressing scheme
3.4.1.Components of IP address
3.4.2.IP address classes
3.4.3.IP Subnetting
3.5. Explain the versions of IP
3.5.1.IPv4
3.5.2.IPv6
4.0 Transport Layer

200
 4.1. List the explain the services provided by Transport layer
4.2. List and explain transport layer protocols
4.2.1.TCP
4.2.2.UDP
4.3. Explain flow control protocols in Transport layer
4.3.1.Stop and wait
4.3.2.Go Back N
4.3.3.Selective repeat
4.4. Explain congestion control techniques/Algorithms in Transport layer
4.4.1.Leaky Bucket
4.4.2.Token Bucket
4.5. List the services provided by session Layer.
4.6. List different protocols used in session layer.
4.7. Study the purpose of Session Layer.

5.0 Application Layer

5.1. List different services offered by Presentation layer.

5.2. List different protocols used in Presentation layer.
5.3. Study the purpose of PresentationLayer.
5.4. List and explain different services offered by application layer.
5.5. Explain different Application Layer protocols
5.5.1. Hypertext Transfer protocol(HTTP)
5.5.2.File Transfer Protocol(FTP)
5.5.3.Teletype Network (TELNET)
5.5.4.Simple Mail Transfer protocol(SMTP)
5.5.5.Domain Name Service(DNS)
5.5.6.Dynamic Host configuration protocol(DHCP)
5.6. Explain Network Management Protocol
5.6.1.Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
5.6.2.Internet Control Message Point (ICMP)
5.7. Explain about Remote Monitoring (RMON)
5.8. Explain about World Wide Web (WWW)

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Introduction to Data commination and Computer Networks

Data communication-Data Transmission modes (Serial, Parallel Synchronous,
Asynchronous, Isochronous transmission)-Transmission characteristics (Signalling rate, data
rate, bit rate, baud rate).

Computer Networks-Need-Advantages-Disadvantages-Applications-Network topologies

(Mesh, Star, Bus, Tree, Ring and Hybrid)-Network Classification(Based on Transmission
Technologies,Scale, Architecture)-Network Devices.

The OSI reference model- TCP/IP Reference Model.Physical Layer: Transmission media-
Analog Transmission- Digital transmission
2.0 Data Link Layer
Data Link Layer Design Issues-Services provided to the Network Layer-Error Detection and
correction-Framing-Flow Control - Sliding Window Protocols- Multiple Access Protocols-IEEE
Standard for LANs

201
3.0 Network Layer
Introduction to Network Layer – Services - Circuit Switching Vs Packet Switching-Types of
Routing-routing algorithms-Network Protocols-IP- IPV4, IPV6

6.0 Transport Layer & Session Layer

The Transport Services–Internet Transport Protocols(TCP,UDP)-Flow control Protocols
(Simple,Stop&wait) – Congestion Controls in Transport Layer (Leaky bucket,Token Bucket)-
session layer services-protocols.
7.0 Presentation & Application Layer
Presentation Layer-services-Protocols. Application Layer -HTTP-FTP-TELNET-SMTP-DNS-
DHCP-SNMP-WWW

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. “Data Communication and Networking” by Behrouz A Forouzan - TMH
2. “Data and Computer Communication” by William Stallings-Pearson
3. “Internetworking with TCP/IP, Volume 1” by Douglas Comer-O’Reliy
4. “TCP/IP Illustrated” by W Richard Stevens -Addison-Wesley
5. “Computer Networks: A Top – Down Approach” by FOROUZAN - TMH
6. Computer Networks -- Andrew S. Tanenbaum- Pearson Education
Model Blue Print:

S.No Chapter/Unit No.of Weightag Marks Wise Question wise CO’s

. title period e Distribution of Distribution of Mappe
s Allocated Weightage Weightage d

R U A An R U A A
p p n

1 Introduction 15 14 3 1 1 2 CO1
to Data 1
communicatio
n and
Computer
Networks

2 Data Link 25 17 6 1 10 2 2 * CO2

Layer 1 *

3 Network 20 14 3 3 8 10 1 1 1 * CO3
Layer *

4 Transport 20 14 3 1 10 1 2 * CO4
Layer 1 *

5 Application 10 11 3 8 10 1 1 * CO5
Layer *

Total 90 70 + (10*) 1 3 16 10 6 7 2 1
8 6 *

202
Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from any one of starred
chapters.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.2
Unit test-2 From 3.3 to 5.8
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER
DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20SUBJ CODE: CCN-304
MAX MARKS:40 TIME:
90Minutes
PART-A
16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and each question of remaining
carries
3marks.

1.a)ISO OSI Reference model contains 4 layers(True/False) (CO1)

b)In _________ framing, there is no need for defining the boundaries of frames.
(CO2)

c) IEEE 802.3 is used for --------------------- (CO2)

d)Which one of the following is a service Network layer [ ] (CO3)

i) Routing II) Flow control III)E-mail IV)Encryption

2) What is serial and parallel transmission? (CO1)

3) Classify networks based on transmission technologies. (CO2)
4) Describe the Hamming code in Data link Layer. (CO2)
5) Write any three differences between Circuit Switching and Packet Switching. (CO3)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks
Instructions:1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for
valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer.

6. a) Explain TCP/IP Reference model (CO1)

Or
b) Explain about guided transmission media. (CO1)

7. a) Explain sliding window protocol. (CO2)

Or

203
 b) Explain about CSMA protocol in Data link layer. (CO2)

8. a) Explain any one of the error correction technique (CO2)

Or
b) Explain about services provided by network layer. (CO3)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER – YEAR END EXAMINATION
DATA COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKS

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-304

MAX MARKS:80 TIME:
3HOURS

PART-A

Note: Answer all questions

10X3=30Ma
rks

1. Define Data communication? (CO1)

2. State the need of computer networks? (CO1)

3. State the purpose of fixed size framing? (CO2)

4. What is the burst error? (CO2)

5. List any three Error correction techniques? (CO2)

6. Write any three differences between circuit switching and packet switching? (CO3)

7. What is IP address? (CO5)

8. List any three services provided by Transport Layer? (CO4)

9. What is the purpose of Leaky Bucket algorithm? (CO4)

10. What is RMON? (CO5)

PART-B

5x8=40Marks

Note: 1. Answer all the question and making use of internal choice.
2. Each question carries 8 marks

11. A.Explain ISO/OSI reference Model? (CO1)

204
 OR

11.B. Explain the functions of any four networking devices. (CO1)

12. A. Explain any two Error detection codes. (CO2)

OR

12.B. Explain any two medium access protocols (CO2)

13.A.Explain Link state routing algorithm with an example. (CO3)

OR

13.B. Explain IPv4 Header with its format. (CO3)

14.A. Explain UDP protocol. (CO4)

OR

14.B. Explain TCP protocol. (CO4)

15.A.Explain Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol . (CO5)

OR

15.B. Explain SNMP. (CO5)

PART-C 1X10=10Marks

16. An organization is granted a block of addresses with the beginning address

14.24.74.0/24.The organization needs to have three sub blocks of addresses to use in its
three subnets: one sub block with 10 addresses, second sub block with 60 addresses
and third sub block with 120 addresses. Design the IP addresses accordingly.

205
 No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods

CCN-305 DBMS 6 90 20 80

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Concepts of DBMS & RDBMS 18 CO1
2. Concepts of SQL 22 CO2
3. Basics of PL/ SQL 18 CO3
4. Advanced PL/SQL 16 CO4
5. Concepts of NoSQL & MongoDB. 16 CO5
Total Periods 90

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able

i)To know the fundamentals of DBMS
Course Objectives ii)To familiarize insert, retrieve, update, delete data in database
iii)To familiarize programming skills for insert, retrieve, update, delete
data in database

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able

CO1 CCN-305.1 Describe fundamentals, types and Overall structure of DBMS.

CO2 CCN-305.2 Apply SQL commands to create, retrieve, update, delete data
from the Relational data bases.
Course
CO3 CCN-305.3 Describe PL/SQL programming constructs, control statements
Out comes
and sub programs.

CO4 CCN-305.4 Apply cursors, triggers and Exception handling concepts.

CO5 CCN-305.5 Use NOSQL database concepts and MongoDB data base
concepts in designing database Schema.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

206
CCN-305.1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1
CCN-305.2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2
CCN-305.3 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 1 1
CCN-305.4 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CCN-305.5 3 1 3 1 3 3 2 2 2 3
Average 2.4 2.2 2.6 2 2.2 3 2.8 2 2 2

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Concepts of DBMS &RDBMS

1.1 Define Database Management System(DBMS)
1.2 List the advantages of DBMS
1.3 Explain Database Abstraction, Data Independence
1.4 Define Instances and Schemas
1.5 Explain Data Models.
1.6 Define Database languages DDL, DML, TCL
1.7 Explain Database Administrator, Users and Database System Architecture with
diagram.
1.8 Define the terms Entity, Entity sets, Relationship, Relationship sets,
1.9 Explain Super Key, Candidate Key and Primary Key, Foreign Key
1.10 Explain Mapping Cardinalities.
1.11 List the symbols used in ER model.
1.12 Explain the Entity-Relationship Model.
1.13 Reduce the ER-diagrams to tables
1.14 Explain Generalization, Specialization &Aggregation.
1.15 Explain Function Dependencies, Normalizations– 1 NF, 2 NF and 3NF
1.16 Explain E.F.CODD‘s rules for RDBMS

2.0 Concepts of SQL

2.1 Explain SQL and benefits of SQL.
2.2 Describe about Embedded SQL and Lexical conventions
2.3 Describe Naming of the Objects and parts and how to refer them.
2.4 Explain literals &different data types like character, number, long, date, raw and
long raw etc.
2.5 Illustrate the comments within SQL Statement.
2.6 Explain SQL Operators.
2.7 Describe Data Definition Language commands CREATE, ALTER and DROP.
2.8 Explain integrity constraints in creating a table and altering table.
2.9 Describe Data Manipulation Language commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE
2.10 Explain SELECT statement with WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY and HAVING
clauses with examples.
2.11 List and explain single row (Number, character, date and conversion) functions.
2.12 List and Explain group functions.
2.13 Explain Transaction Control Commands COMMIT, SAVEPOINT, ROLLBACK,
GRANT, and REVOKE with examples.
2.14 Explain Sub Queries with examples.

207
 2.15 Explain Joins (Equi Join, Non-Equi Joins, Inner Join, Outer Join, cross join and
Self join) with syntax and examples.

3.0 PL/SQL
3.1 Explain PL/SQL Block structure.
3.2 List the features of PL/SQL
3.3 Explain the data types of PL/SQL
3.4 Illustrate declarations and naming conventions of variables
3.5 Explain PL/SQL tables and user defined records.
3.6 Explain Input/Output statements.
3.7 Explain decision making statements with examples (IF...
THEN,IF.THEN.ELSE,IF.HEN.ELSE.IF,CASE,GOTO)
3.8 Explain looping statements and illustrate (Simple loop, While loop, For loop).
3.9 Explain procedure with syntax and examples.
3.10 Explain function with syntax and examples.
3.11 Describe the advantages of subprograms.
3.12 Explain handling procedures with example programs.
3.13 Explain handling functions with example programs.
3.14 Explain the parameter modes in PL/SQL with examples (in, out and in out)
3.15 Define Recursion
3.16 Explain Recursion with example programs.

4.0 Advanced PL/SQL

4.1 Define cursor.
4.2 Classify cursors.
4.3 Explain implicit cursor with examples.
4.4 Explain explicit cursors with examples.
4.5 Define trigger.
4.6 List Advantages of triggers.
4.7 Explain database triggers.
4.8 Define the term Exception handling
4.9 List the advantages of Exception handling
4.10 List the types of Exceptions.
4.11 Illustrate built-in Exceptions
4.12 Illustrate User defined Exceptions
4.13 Explain propagation and re-raising of exceptions.

5.0 Concepts of No SQL& Mongo DB.

5.1 No SQL
5.1.1 Explain the classification of Databases: RDBMS, OLAP, NoSQL.
5.1.2 State the need of No SQL& its purpose
5.1.3 Compare RDBMS and No SQL
5.1.4 List the Advantages and Disadvantages of No SQL
5.1.5 Explain about the ACID and BASE system.
5.1.6 Compare ACID and BASE properties
5.1.7 Classify No SQL as Key-value stores, Column-oriented, Graph and
Document oriented Databases.
5.1.8 Explain about Key-value stores Databases, Column-oriented Databases,
Graph Databases, Document oriented Databases with examples.
5.2 Mongo DB
5.2.1 What is the purpose of mongoDB.

208
 5.2.2 List the advantages of Mongo DB.
5.2.3 Explain the Creation, Dropping, Creation of Collection & Dropping of
Collection of Database in Mongo DB
5.2.4 Explain the Data types of Mongo DB.
5.2.5 Explain Inserting Document, Query Document, Update Document,
Deleting Document &Sorting Document with examples

COURSE CONTENT

1. Concepts of DBMS & RDBMS

Define DBMS –Purpose of DBMS - Data Abstraction – Data Models – Instances and
Schemas – Data Independence – Data Definition Language - Data Manipulation
Language – Database Administrator - Database Users – Database system Structure.
Entities – Relationships and Relationship sets – Mapping constraints – Entity –
Relationship Diagram – Super key , Candidate key and Primary key - Reducing E- R
Diagrams to tables – Generalization and Specialization – Aggregation – Functional
Dependencies - Normal forms 1NF , 2 NF , 3 NF- E.F.CODD‘s rules for RDBMS
2. Concepts of SQL
Benefits of SQL – Embedded SQL – Lexical conventions – Naming objects and parts –
Referring objects and parts – Literals – Text –Integer – Number – Data types –
Character data types – Number data type – Long data type –Raw and Long Raw data
types –Pseudo columns – comments within SQL statements – comments on schema
objects.
Operators – Unary and Binary operators – Precedence- Arithmetic operators –
character operators – comparison operators – logical operators- set operators – other
operators –DDL Commands – Integrity Constraints – DML Commands - functions –
single row functions – numeric functions – character functions – date functions –
conversion functions – other functions- Group functions. Transaction control
commands-Sub queries - Joins.
3. Basics of PL/SQL
Main features – architecture – advantage of PL/SQL – fundamentals – character set –
Lexical units – Data types – data type conversion – declarations – naming conventions
– scope and visibility – assignments – expressions and comparisons – PL/SQL tables –
user defined records.
Conditional control- IF statement – sequential control- GOTO and NULL statements.
SQL support – national language support – Remote Access
Advantages of subprograms – procedures – Functions RETURN statement – forward
declarations – actual versus formal parameters – positional and named notation -
parameter modes – recursion
4. Advanced PL/SQL
Cursors – Implicit cursor – Explicit cursor – Triggers – Advantages - creating trigger –
raising trigger - Advantages of Exceptions – predefined Exceptions – user defined
Exceptions .

5. Concepts of No SQL& Mongo DB

Classification of Databases : RDBMS, OLAP, No SQL.-Introduction to No SQL- need for
No SQL – Comparison of RDBMS and No SQL- Advantages and Disadvantages of
NoSQL - BASE system – ACID System – Comparison of ACID and BASE properties –
Classification of NoSQL as Key-value stores, Column-oriented, Graph and Document
oriented Databases - Key-value stores Databases - Column-oriented Databases - Graph
Databases - Document oriented Databases

209
 Introduction to Mongo DB - advantages of Mongo DB - applications of Mongo DB -
Installation of Mongo DB - Creation of Database - Dropping of Database - Creation of
Collection - Dropping of Collection - Data types of Mongo DB - different Commands of
Mongo DB - Inserting Document - Query Document - Updating Document – Deleting
Documents - Sorting Documents

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Database System Concepts, Silbers chatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudarshan- Mc

Graw Hill Publications.
2. Oracle Database 11g: The Complete Reference, Kevin Loney-Oracle Press.
3. Fundamentals of Database Systems, Shamkant B. Navathe-Pearson

4. Understanding ORACLE, James T. Peary & Joseph G. Laseer- Sybex Inc.U.S..

5. RDBM with ORACLE, Rolland- Addison Wesley.
6. ORACLE series books of ORACLE Press– TMH.
7. Starting out with Oracle, Covering Databases, John Day & CraigVan- Dream
Tech.
8. PL/SQL, Developer Tools & DBA, Slyke-Dreamtech.
9. www.nosql-database.org
10. www.mongodb.org

MODEL BLUE PRINT

210
 Marks Wise Question wise
Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage CO’s
S.No. Distribution of Distribution of
title periods Allocated Mapped
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Concepts of
1 DBMS & 18 14 6 8 * 2 1 * CO1
RDBMS

Concepts of
2 22 14 3 8 3 2 1 CO2
SQL

Basics of PL/
3 18 14 6 8 * 2 1 * CO3
SQL

Advance
4 16 14 6 8 * 2 1 * CO4
PL/SQL

Concepts of
5 16 14 6 8 * 2 1 * CO5
NoSQL &
MongoDB.
Total 90 70+(10*) 27 40 3 10* 10 5 1

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from any chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit test-2 From 3.8 to 5.2

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
DBMS
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ
CODE:CCN-305

211
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90
MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and remaining carries 3 marks each

1. a) File system is more advantageous than DBMS. (True/False) (CO1)

b) Entity is defined as ………. (CO1)
c) Full form of DML is ……….. (CO1)
d) Which one of the following is not a Database Language [ ] (CO1)
i) DML II) DDL III) TCL IV) TLL
2) Define Instance & Schema. (CO1)
3) List any three data types in SQL. (CO2)
4) Write the syntax for CREATE command in SQL. (CO2)
5) List the features of PL/SQL. (CO3)

PART-B
3X8=24Marks
Instructions:1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain Database System Architecture (CO1)
(Or)
b) Explain Generalization, Specialization and Aggregation (CO1)

7. a) Explain ER diagram with an example. (CO1)

(Or)
b) Explain any two Joins in SQL. (CO2)

8. a) Explain CASE statement with syntax and example. (CO3)

(Or)
b) Explain FOR Loop with syntax and example PL/SQL program (CO3)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER - END EXAMINATION
DBMS

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-305

212
MAX MARKS: 80 TIME: 3
HOURS
PART-A 10x3=30M
Instructions:
1.Answer all questions.
2.Each question carries Three marks.
3.Answers should be brief and straight to the point and should not exceed five simple
sentences.
1. Define Database Management System.
(CO1)
2. Define Primary Key.
(CO1)
3. List DML commands.
(CO2)
4. Write a SQL Query to retrieve maximum value from sal column of employee table.
(CO2)
5. List any three features of PL/SQL.
(CO3)
6. What is Recursion?
(CO3)
7. Define Cursor.
(CO4)
8. List any three Built-in Exceptions.
(CO4)
9. Compare features of RDBMS with that of NoSQL.
(CO5)
10. List any three advantages of MongoDB.
(CO5)
PART-B 5x8=40M

Instructions: 1. Each question carries EIGHT marks.

2. Answers should be comprehensive and criteria for valuation is the content but not the
length of the answer.
11. A) Explain Database System Architecture
(CO1)
OR
B) Explain Generalization, Specialization and Aggregation
(CO1)
12. A) Explain group handling functions with syntax and example
(CO2)
OR
B) Explain Joins in SQL
(CO2)
13. A) Write a PL/SQL procedure to find biggest of three given numbers.
(CO3)
OR
B) Write a PL/SQL program to find factorial of a given number using recursion.

213
 (CO3)
14. A) Explain Implicit cursors in PL/SQL
(CO4)
OR
B) Explain Trigger in PL/SQL with example.
(CO4)
15. A) Explain Column-oriented Databases in NoSQL.
(CO5)
OR
B) Explain Inserting Document in MongoDB.
(CO5)

PART – C 1x10 = 10M

16.Design a PL/SQL block that will keep track the audit information.
(CO4)
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA

Python
CCN-306 3 45 40 60
Programming Lab

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Simple Python Programs 8 CO1

2. Control Flow and Loops 8 CO2, CO6

3. Functions and Arrays 8 CO3, CO6

4. Lists, Dictionaries 10 CO4, CO6

5. File Handling, Object and Classes 11 CO5, CO6

Total Periods 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall able to learn

COURSE OBJECTIVES 1. Basics of Python programming
2. Decision Making and Functions in Python
3. Object Oriented Programming using Python.

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 CCN-306.1 Execute Simple python programs
CO 2 CCN-306.2 Execute Python programs using expressions, operators
Course CO 3 CCN-306.3 Execute python programming using Functions,
Outcomes packages

214
 CO 4 CCN-306.4 Demonstrate Python programs using Lists
CO 5 CCN-306.5 Develop Python programs using OOP Concepts and
exceptions
CO 6 CCN-306.6 Demonstrate Debugging of Python Programs

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CCN-306.1
2 2 2 1 2 3 2
CCN-306.2 2 3 2 2 2
CCN-306.3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CCN-306.4 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 3
CCN-306.5 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CCN-306.6 2 1 3 3 1
Average 2.8 2.3 2 2.3 2 2.3 2 2 2.5 2

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Write and execute simple python Program.

2. Write /execute simple ‘Python’ program: Develop minimum 2 programs using different
data types (numbers, string, tuple, list, and dictionary).
3. Write /execute simple ‘Python’ program: Develop minimum 2 programs using Arithmetic
Operators, exhibiting data type conversion.
4. (i)Write simple programs to convert U.S. dollars to Indian rupees.

215
 (ii) Write simple programs to convert bits to Megabytes, Gigabytes and Terabytes.
5. Write simple programs to calculate the area and perimeter of the square, and the
volume & perimeter of the cone.
6. Write program to: (i) determine whether a given number is odd or even. (ii) Find the
greatest of the three numbers using conditional operators.
7. Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number. ii) Generate multiplication table
up to 10 for numbers 1 to 5.
8. Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number. ii) Generate multiplication table
up to 10 for numbers 1 to 5 using functions.
9. Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number using recursion. ii) Generate
Fibonacci sequence up to 100 using recursion.
10. Write a program to: Create a list, add element to list, delete element from the lists.
11. Write a program to: Sort the list, reverse the list and counting elements in a list.
12. Write a program to: Create dictionary, add element to dictionary, delete element from
the dictionary.
13. Write a program to: To calculate average, mean, median, and standard deviation of
numbers in a list.
14. Write a program to: To print Factors of a given Number.
15. File Input/output: Write a program to: i) To create simple file and write “Hello World” in
it. ii) To open a file in write mode and append Hello world at the end of a file.
16. Write a program to :i) To open a file in read mode and write its contents to another file
but replace every occurrence of character ‘h’ ii) To open a file in read mode and print
the number of occurrences of a character ‘a’.
17. Write a Program to: Add two complex number using classes and objects.
18. Write a Program to: Subtract two complex number using classes and objects.

19. Write a Program to: Create a package and accessing a package.

Time Schedule:

Sl. CO’S mapped

Major Topic Periods
No.

1. Write and execute simple python Program. 1 CO1,CO6

216
 Write /execute simple ‘Python’ program: Develop minimum 2 programs using
2 CO1,CO2,CO6
2. different data types (numbers, string, tuple, list, dictionary).

Write /execute simple ‘Python’ program: Develop minimum 2 programs using

2 CO1,CO2,CO6
3. Arithmetic Operators, exhibiting data type conversion.

(i)Write simple programs to convert U.S. dollars to Indian rupees.

2 CO1,CO2,CO6
4.
(ii) Write simple programs to convert bits to Megabytes, Gigabytes and Terabytes.

Write simple programs to calculate the area and perimeter of the square, and the
1 CO1,CO2,CO6
5. volume & perimeter of the cone.

Write program to: (i) Determine whether a given number is odd or even. (ii) Find
1 CO1,CO2,CO6
6. the greatest of the three numbers using conditional operators.

Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number. ii) Generate multiplication
2 CO1,CO2,CO6
7. table up to 10 for numbers 1 to 5.

Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number. ii) Generate multiplication
8. 2 CO1,CO2,CO3
table up to 10 for numbers 1 to 5 using functions.

Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number using recursion. ii) Generate
9. 1 CO1,CO2,CO3
Fibonacci sequence up to 100 using recursion.

10. Write a program to: To print Factors of a given Number. 2 CO4,CO6

11. Write a program to: Create a list, add element to list, delete element from the lists. 2 CO1,CO3,CO6

12. Write a program to: Sort the list, reverse the list and counting elements in a list. 2 CO2,CO3,CO6

Write a program to: Create dictionary, add element to dictionary, delete element
13. 2 CO2,CO3,CO6
from the dictionary.

Write a program to: To calculate average, mean, median, and standard deviation of
14. 2 CO2,CO3,CO6
numbers in a list.

File Input/output: Write a program to: i) To create simple file and write “Hello
15. World” in it. ii) To open a file in write mode and append Hello world at the end of a 2 CO1,CO6
file.

Write a program to: i) To open a file in read mode and write its contents to another
16. file but replace every occurrence of character ‘h’ ii) To open a file in read mode and 2 CO1, CO6
print the number of occurrences of a character ‘a’.

217
17. Write a Program to: Add two complex number using classes and objects. 2 CO5, CO6

18. 3 CO5, CO6

Write a Program to: Subtract two complex number using classes and objects

19. 2 CO5, CO6

Write a Program to: Create a package and accessing a package.

Total 45

Sl.No Name of the Experiment Objectives Key Competencies

1. Know the usage of Python

IDLE
Write a simple python 2. Edit and save the program
Write and execute
1. program to print Hello World! 3. Check for the syntax errors
simple python Program.
and debug and execute and clear the errors
4. Run the program and check
for the output.
1. Identify different data types
Write /execute simple 2. Write basic python program
‘Python’ program: using datatypes
Develop minimum 2 3. Evaluate arithmetic
Write a Python program to expression
2. programs using
identify different data types. 4. Run the program
different data types
5. Rectify the syntactical errors
(numbers, string, tuple, 6. Execute the program
list, dictionary). 7. Check the output for its
correctness
1. Identify different arithmetic
operators
Write /execute simple 2. Build arithmetic expressions
‘Python’ program: 3. Identify the priorities of
Develop minimum 2 operators
Write a Python program to
programs using identify arithmetic operators 4. Evaluate arithmetic
3.
expression
Arithmetic Operators, and data type conversion
5. Run the program
exhibiting data type 6. Rectify the syntactical errors
conversion. 7. Execute the program
Check the output for its
correctness

218
 1. Identify different arithmetic
operators
(i)Write simple programs 2. Build arithmetic expressions
to convert U.S. dollars to 3. Identify the priorities of
Indianrupees. operators
Write a Python program to
4. Evaluate arithmetic
4. (ii) Write simple identify arithmetic operators
expression
programs to convert bits and data type conversion 5. Run the program
to Megabytes, Gigabytes 6. Rectify the syntactical errors
and Terabytes. 7. Execute the program
Check the output for its
correctness
1. Identify different arithmetic
operators
2. Build arithmetic expressions
Write simple programs 3. Identify the priorities of
to calculate the area and operators
Write a Python program to
perimeter of thesquare, 4. Evaluate arithmetic
5. identify arithmetic operators
expression
and the volume & and data type conversion 5. Run the program
perimeter of the cone. 6. Rectify the syntactical errors
7. Execute the program
Check the output for its
correctness
Write program to: (i)
Determine whether a 1. Build a relational expression
given number is odd or 2. Use the if statement for
Write a Python program to
even. (ii) Find the decision making
6. identify conditional
3. Rectify the syntax errors
greatest of the three statements in Python. 4. Check the output for
numbers using
correctness
conditional operators.
1. Build the termination
condition for looping
Write a program to : i)
2. Use while statement with
Find factorial of a given Write a Python program to correct syntax
7. number. ii) Generate identify loops statements in 3. Check whether correct
multiplication table up Python. number of iterations are
to 10 for numbers 1 to 5. performed by the while loop
4. Rectify the syntax errors
5. Debug logical errors

219
 1. Build the application
Write a program to: i) using functions
Find factorial of a given 2. Use while statement
number. ii) Generate with correct syntax
Write a Python program to 3. Check whether correct
multiplication table up
8. make use of function. number of iterations are
to 10 for numbers 1 to 5 performed by the while
using functions. loop
4. Rectify the syntax
errors
5. Debug logical errors
Write a program to: i) 1. Build the application
Find factorial of a given using recursion.
number using Write a Python program to 2. Build the terminating
9. recursion. ii) Generate make use of recursion. condition for recursion.
3. Rectify the syntax
Fibonacci sequence up
errors
to 100 using recursion.
4. Debug logical errors
1. Build the termination
condition for looping
5. Use while statement with
Write a program to : To Write a Python program to correct syntax
10. print Factors of a given identify loops statements in 6. Check whether correct
Number. Python. number of iterations are
performed by the while loop
7. Rectify the syntax errors
Debug logical errors

1. Create a one list with correct

syntax
2. Create a list
Write a programs to: Write a Python program to 3. Read elements from list
Create a list, add identify various lists and list 4. Add elements to list
11. element to list, delete manipulation methods in 5. Delete elements
Python. 6. Rectify the syntax errors
element from the lists.
7. Debug logical errors
8. Check for the correctness of
output for the given input

1. Create a one list with correct

syntax
2. Create a list
Write a programs to: Write a Python program to 3. Read elements from list
Sort the list, reverse the identify various lists and list 4. Add elements to list
12. list and counting manipulation methods in 5. Delete elements
Python. 6. Rectify the syntax errors
elements in a list.
7. Debug logical errors
8. Check for the correctness of
output for the given input

220
 1. Create a one dictionary with
correct syntax
2. Create a dictionary
Write a programs to: 3. Read elements from list
Write a Python program to
Create dictionary, add 4. Add elements to dictionary
identify various dictionary and
element to dictionary, 5. Delete elements from
13. dictionary manipulation
delete element from the dictionary
methods in Python. 6. Rectify the syntax errors
dictionary.
7. Debug logical errors
8. Check for the correctness of
output for the given input

Write a program to: To

calculate average, mean, Write a Python program to 1.Create a list
median, and standard identify various statistical 2. add elements to list
14.
deviation of numbers in functions. 3. perform statistical functions
a list. on that list

File Input/output: Write

a program to : i) To
create simple file and
Write a Python program to
write “Hello World” in it. 1. Create a Python file
15. identify the steps to create a
ii) To open a file in write 2. Add contents to file
file and append to file.
mode and append Hello
world at the end of a
file.
Write a program to :i) To
open a file in read mode
and write its contents to 1. Open a Python file in write
another file but replace mode
Write a Python program to
every occurrence of 2. Add contents to the file
16. identify the steps to open a
character ‘h’ ii) To open 3. Open a Python file in Read
file in read/write mode.
a file in read mode and mode
print the number of 4. Print the file
occurrences of a
character ‘a’.

Write a Program to: Add Write a Python program to 1. Create a class using Python
17. two complex number identify the steps to create 2. Create an object in Python
using classes and class and create an object in 3. Debug the python program
objects. Python. 4. Check the correctness
Write a Python program to 1. Create a class using Python
Write a Program to:
identify the steps to create 2. Create an object in Python
Subtract two complex
18 class and create an object in 3. Debug the python program
number using classes
and objects Python. Check the correctness

221
 1. Create a package using
Write a Program to: Write a Python program to Python
Create a package and practice in creating packages 2. Access the package in Python
19.
accessing a package. and accessing packages 3. Debug the python program
Check the correctness

Course Code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods/week periods

Computer
Hardware &
CCN-307 Network 6 90 40 60
Maintenance
Lab

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods
1. Computer Hardware 45 CO1,CO2,CO3
2. Computer Networking 30 CO3.CO4.CO5
3. Network Maintenance through server 15 CO4,CO5,CO6
Total 90

222
 1. Identify all the components of mother board.
2. Modify CMOS settings as required
3. Troubleshoot desktop computer
4. Troubleshoot individual resources like keyboard, Monitor, Printers
5. Install drives, NIC cards, modems(internal, external)
COURSE 6. Install network devices, design and develop network.
OBJECTIVES 7. Understand IP address classes and sub netting
8. Prepare cross and straight Ethernet cables
9. Install and configure proxy server
10. Install any network operating system and Control/maintain the
network and network resources using server administration and
Troubleshoot the entire network

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able

CO1 CCN-307.1 Assemble the PC with suitable components.
CO2 CCN-307.2 Troubleshoot desktop system and individual peripheral devices.
Course
CO3 CCN-307.3 Demonstrate configuring computer network with subnetting
Outcomes
CO4 CCN-307.4 Perform user and group management techniques through
CO5 CCN-307.5 Network Server
Troubleshoot the computer network.
CO6 CCN-307.6 Configure any network device.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CCN-307.1 2 1 2 2
CCN-307.2 3 3 1 3 2
CCN-307.3 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CCN-307.4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CCN-307.5 3 3 1 3 2
CCN-307.6 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2
Average 2.3 2.2 2 2.5 3 2 2 2 2 2

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning out comes:

1. Identify various mother board Components
2. Perform various operations and modifications required for CMOS setup.
3. Print the summary of your system Hardware and verify for correctness
4. Upgrading memory and verify the effect after upgrading.
5. Hard drive, optical drive installation.
6. How to recover lost data on hard drive.

223
 7. Trouble shooting keyboard and monitor
8. Trouble shoot Printer Problems
9. Installation of Network card.
10. Dis-assembling and assembling of working desktop.
11. Preparing the Ethernet cable for cross and direct connections using crimping tool and
test using LAN tester.
12. Installation of a switch and connecting systems to a network switch.
13. Installation of a modem (internal, external or USB) and connecting tointernet.
14. Using FTP for uploading and downloading files.
15. Installation and configuring the proxy server for internet access.
16. Setting of particular IP address to an existing terminal system
17. Installation of network operating system
18. Creating and managing user accounts through network server.
19. Configuration of DHCP and DNS
20. Exercise on File/Folder accessing rights for sharing
21. Exercise on remote desktop.
22. Exercise on setting up of VPN on network

OBJECTIVES AND KEY COMPETENCIES:

S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment

1 Exercise on Identification and  Identify and note down mother board,

Identification and familiarization of various Components and Chips.
familiarization of components of computer  Identify various Internal and External slots
in the mother board and clean them with
various system.
blower/ Brush.
components of  Practice Inserting and Removing RAM with
mother board. care.
 Measure the Output voltages of SMPS.
2 Exercise on various Perform various operations  Identify location of CMOS battery on
operations and and modifications required mother board.
modifications for CMOS setup.  Know how to replace CMOS battery.
 Identify keyboard key for entering BIOS
required for CMOS
setup.
setup.  Setup CMOS settings
 Check the status of CMOS settings after
replacement.
3 Exercise on Print Print the summary of your  Know how to open system summary
the summary of system Hardware and window
 Check whether all the hardware peripherals
your system
are working properly or not.

224
 Hardware and verify for correctness  Know how to install device drivers
verify for  Know how to enable and disable hardware
correctness peripherals.
 Print the hardware summary page.
4 Exercise on Upgrading memory and  Know the location of RAM slots
Upgrading memory verify the effect after  Know how to insert or replace RAM chips
 Check the system properties for confirming
and verify the upgrading.
the RAM up gradation.
effect after
upgrading.

5 Exercise on Hard Hard drive, optical drive Hard drive:

drive, optical drive installation.  Identify the Hard drive slot.
installation.  Know how to remove power supply and
SATA cables from hard drive.
 Unscrew Hard drive from computer case
 Replace new Hard drive and fix it in
computer case
 Know how to connect power supply cable
and SATA cables to Hard drive
 Check for the working condition of new
Hard Drive.
Optical drive:
 Identify the Optical drive slot.
 Know how to remove power supply and
SATA cables from Optical drive.
 Unscrew Optical drive from computer case
 Replace new Optical drive and fix it in
computer case
 Know how to connect power supply cable
and SATA cables to Optical drive
 Check for the working condition of Optical
drive.
6 Exercise on How to recover lost data  Verify the available recovery tools of
recovery of lost on hard drive. Operating system.
data on hard drive.  Know how to recover lost data on Hard
drive using Restore point.
 Know how to recover lost data on Hard
drive using Recovery Image.
7 Exercise on Trouble Trouble shooting keyboard  few keys do not work.
shooting keyboard and monitor.  keyboard does not work at all.
and monitor.  Key continuous to repeat after being
released.
 key produces wrong character.
 Power light (led) does not go on, no picture.
 Power LED light is on no picture power up.
 Power on but monitor display wrong
character.
 Monitor flickers has wary lines.
 Screen goes blank 30 seconds or minute
after the keyboard is left untouched

225
8 Exercise on Printer Printer Problems Laser printer:
Problems  Printer never leaves warm-up mode.
 Paper Jam message is displayed
 Printed messages are distorted
 RE-filling and replacing cartridge
 Replacing damaged drum with new one.
 Perform head cleaning
DMP
 Print head moves back and forth but
nothing prints.
 Print self-test works but printing from a
computer application does not work etc.,
9 Exercise on Installation of Network  Identify the slot for placing NIC card
Installation of card.  Know how to place NIC card
 Install required NIC driver
Network card.
 Check for working status of NIC card
10 Exercise on Dis- Dis-assembling and  Identify all the peripherals of Desktop
assembling and assembling of working computer.
desktop.  Check the working condition of system
assembling of
before dis-assembling it.
working desktop.  Dis-assemble all the peripherals.
 Assemble all the peripherals.
 Check the working condition of system after
assembling it.
11 Exercise on Preparing the Ethernet  Know the color pattern of Ethernet cable for
Preparing the cable for cross and direct direct connection.
 Prepare UTP cable for direct connection
Ethernet cable for connections using crimping
using crimping tool.
cross and direct tool and test using cable  Check the working condition of cable using
connections using tester. LAN tester.
crimping tool and  Know the color pattern of Ethernet cable for
test using LAN cross connection.
tester.  Prepare UTP cable for cross connection
using crimping tool.
 Check the working condition of cable using
LAN tester.
12 Exercise on Installation of a switch and  Know the purpose of switch
Installation of a connecting systems to a  Run Ethernet cables from switch to
network switch individual nodes
switch and
 Connect Ethernet cables of nodes to switch.
connecting systems  Check the network status of the connection
to a network in computer system.
switch.

13 Exercise on Installation of a modem Internal modem

Installation of a (internal, external or USB)  Identify PCI slot for placing Internal modem
modem (internal, and connecting to internet.  Connect internal modem
 Install required modem driver
external or USB)
 Check for the working condition

226
 and connecting to External modem
internet.  Connect External modem
 Install required modem driver
 Check for the working condition
USB modem
 Connect USB modem
 Install required modem driver
 Check for the working condition
14 Exercise on Using Using FTP for uploading  Know about FTP protocol
FTP for uploading and downloading files.  Know how to upload file using FTP
 Know how to download file using FTP
and downloading
files.
15 Exercise on Installation and configuring  Know about proxy server.
Installation and the proxy server for  Know how to install proxy server.
configuring the internet access  Know how to configure proxy server.
proxy server for
internet access
16 Exercise on Setting Setting of particular IP  Know about IP addresses
of particular IP address to an existing  Know how to set IP addresses to the
address to an computer systems in a LAN
terminal system
existing terminal
system
17 Exercise on Installation of network  Know about different network operating
Installation of operating system systems.
network operating  Install required Network operating systems
system  Configure the system with the proper
settings.
18 Exercise on Creating and managing  Know how to create user accounts
Creating and user accounts through  Know how to modify user accounts
managing user network server.  Know how to delete user accounts
accounts through
network server.

19 Exercise on Configuration of DHCP and  Know about static IP address, dynamic IP

Configuration of DNS. address
DHCP and DNS.  Know about DHCP
 Configure the DHCP
 Know about DNS
 Configure the DNS
20 Exercise on File/Folder accessing rights  Know the different accessing rights
File/Folder for sharing.  Know how to give access rights
 Know how to remove access rights
accessing rights for
 Know how to share file/folders
sharing
21 Exercise on remote Exercise on remote  Know about remote login
desktop. desktop.  Know how to login to the remote desktop
22 Exercise on setting Exercise on setting up of  Know about VPN
up of VPN on VPN on network  Know how to configure VPN service

227
 network

Course Code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods/week periods

CCN-308 DBMS Lab 4 60 40 60

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Concepts of DBMS & RDBMS 8 CO1
2. Concepts of SQL 16 CO2
3. Basics of PL/ SQL 12 CO3
4. Advance PL/SQL 16 CO4
5. Concepts of NoSQL & MongoDB. 8 CO5
Total Periods 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall able to learn

COURSE 1. Insert, update, delete and select data into/from Relation Database
OBJECTIVES 2. Develop PL/SQL programs
3. Insert, update, delete and select data from Mongo DB

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO1 CCN-308.1 Develop SQL Queries to Create, modify and drop tables and
Queries to Insert, update, delete data from tables.
CO2 CCN-308.2 Execute SQL Queries to display data on different conditions from
different tables
Course CO3 CCN-308.3
Outcomes Execute PL/SQL Programs

CO4 CCN-308.4
Demonstrate the usage of cursors and triggers

CO5 CCN-308.5 Execute commands to Insert, update, delete and select data in
NOSQL and Mongo DB databases

228
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-308.1 2 3 2 3 3 2

CCN-308.2 2 2 1 2 2

CCN-308.3 2 1 2 2

CCN-308.4 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2

CCN-308.5 2 3 3 3

Average 2 2.3 2 3 3 2.5 3 2.3 2 2

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES
1 Know installation of Oracle
2 Exercise on creating tables.
3 Exercise on inserting records
4 Exercise on updating records
5 Exercise on modifying the structure of the table
6 Exercise on Select command
7 Exercise on querying the table using clauses like WHERE, ORDER BY, IN, AND, OR,
NOT, IS NULL
8 Exercise on GROUP BY, HAVING
9 Exercise on Number functions, character functions, conversion functions and date
functions, group functions
10 Exercise on set operators
11 Exercise on sub queries
12 Exercise on Joins
13 Exercise on various date and number format models
14 Exercise on creating tables with integrity constraints
15 Write programs using PL/SQL control statements
16 Exercise on PL/SQL exception handling
17 Exercise on Procedures
18 Exercise on Functions
19 Exercise on Recursion
20 Exercise on Cursors
21 Exercise on Triggers
22 Exercise on Installation of Mongo DB
23 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Database
24 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Collections.
25 Exercise on Commands of Mongo DB- Insert, update, find, delete and sorting of
Documents.

Mini Project : Student has to develop a Mini project applying the skills acquired from the learning
outcomes of this course.

229
Time Schedule:

Sl. No Name of the Experiment Periods

1 Know installation of Oracle 1
2 Exercise on creating tables. 1
3 Exercise on inserting records 1
4 Exercise on updating records 1
5 Exercise on modifying the structure of the table 1
6 Exercise on SELECT command 2
7 Exercise on querying the table using clauses like WHERE, ORDER, IN,AND,
18
OR,NOT, IS NULL
8 Exercise on GROUP BY, HAVING 2
9 Exercise on Number functions, character functions, conversion functions
3
and date functions, group functions
10 Exercise on SET operators 2
11 Exercise on sub queries 3
12 Exercise on Joins 3
13 Exercise on various date and number format models 1
14 Exercise on creating tables with integrity constraints 1
14 Write programs using PL/SQL control statements 6
15 Exercise on PL/SQL built-in exception handling 2
16 Exercise on PL/SQL in user defined exception handling 2
17 Exercise on Procedures 2
18 Exercise on Functions 1
19 Exercise on Recursion 1
20 Exercise on Cursors 1
21 Exercise on Triggers 1
22 Exercise on Installation of Mongo DB 1
23 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Database 1
24 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Collections 1
25 Exercises on commands of Mongo DB 1
Total 60

230
KEY COMPETENCIES

Sl. No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

Experiment

1 Know installation Perform the following:

of Oracle

i. To identify the version of  Observe Oracle version

Oracle being installed being installed
ii. To understand the RAM and  Observe the RAM & HDD
HDD requirements for requirements
Oracle installation  Rectify for any Oracle
iii. To comprehend the installation errors
installation steps correctly  Able to login as
iv. Setting up of Oracle Administrator and as
Administrative Password Oracle user account
v. Configuring the Oracle
database after post-
installation steps of Oracle
viz configuring
administrative rights for
performing
vi. To login to Oracle as
administrator account and
Oracle user account
2 Exercise on creating Perform the following:  Correct Table creation
tables. syntax errors
i. To login with Oracle user  Correct the wrong data
account types and inappropriate
ii. To give correct syntax for sizes for the respective
table creation fields
iii. To give correct data type for  Check for displaying the
the required fields with structure of the table
appropriate size
iv. To display the structure of the
table
3 Exercise on inserting Perform the following:  Correct syntax errors for
records Insertion of record
i. Check for the required table  Check for insertion of
present already proper values for the
ii. To insert the records correctly required fields
iii. To display the  Verify the correct values
records correctly pertaining to the record
are inserted in the
required table
 Check for displaying of
the records correctly

231
Sl. No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies
Experiment

4 Exercise on updating Perform the following:  Correct syntax errors for

records updating of record
i. Check for the required table  Check for updating of proper
present already  Check for displaying of
ii. To update the the updated records
records correctly correctly
iii. To display the
updated records
5 Exercise on modifying Perform the following  Correct syntax errors in
the structure of the modifying the structure
table i. To identify the required of the table
table, present in the system  Check whether required
already field is newly added to
ii. To add new column the existing table
iii. To display the  Check for displaying of
records correctly the modified table
correctly
6 Exercise on SELECT Perform the following  Check for syntax error in
command usage of Select command
i. To identify the required  Check whether Select
table, present already command is given
ii. To display the records in correctly to display all
the required table the records
7 Exercise on querying Perform the following:  Check for syntax error in
the table using clauses usage of Select command
like WHERE, ORDER, i. To use the Select command with appropriate clauses
IN,AND, OR,NOT, IS ii. To use the clauses WHERE,  Check whether Select
NULL ORDER, IN,AND, OR, NOT, IS command along with
NULL along with Select appropriate clause is
command on the given given correctly for the
records in the table required condition
 Check the usage of
clauses WHERE, ORDER,
IN, AND, OR, NOT along
with Select command
appropriately
8 Exercise on GROUP BY, Perform the following:  Check for syntax error in
HAVING the usage GROUP BY,
i. To use the Select command HAVING
To use the clauses GROUP BY,  Check for usage of
HAVING along with Select GROUP BY, HAVING
command on the given records  Verify output values
in the table based on certain
condition on few records

232
Sl. No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies
Experiment

9 Exercise on Number Perform the following  Check for syntax error of

functions, character various functions
functions, conversion i. To use functions  Check for usage of
functions and date ii. To use set command along various functions
functions, group with WHERE condition, GROUP  Verify output values
functions BY, HAVING based on certain
condition on few records
10 Exercise on SET Perform the following  Check for syntax error in
operators the usage of SET
iii. To use set command command
iv. To use set command along  Check for usage of SET
with WHERE condition command for updating
values based on certain
condition on few records
11 Exercise on sub queries Perform the following  Check for the syntax
error in usage of sub
queries
i. To use Select command  Check for the correctness
ii. To use appropriate Operators
IN of the usage of
appropriate operators
used
12 Exercise on Joins Perform the following  Check for the correctness
of the syntax used for
i. To create two tables joining
ii. To use the common field if  Check if the join is
two tables aroused created between two
iii. To know different types of tables
Joins  Check if self-join is created
13 Exercise on various Perform the following:  Check for the syntax of
date and number the date formats
format models i. To use date formats correctly  Check for the syntax of
ii. To use number the number formats
formats correctly
14 Exercise on creating Perform the following  Check for the syntax
tables with integrity i. Create Primary key errors in usage of all
constraints ii. Create Foreign key or types of Integrity
referential integrity constraints
constraint  Check whether different
iii. Create NOT NULL types of Integrity
constraint constraints are used
iv. Create UNIQUE Key
constraint
v. Create CHECK constraint

233
Sl. No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies
Experiment

14 Write programs using Perform the following  Check for the syntax of
PL/SQL control i. To use IF ... IF... ELSE statements
statements ELSE  Check for the syntax of
statements all iterative statements
ii. To use iterative statements
– Simple loop, While Loop, For
Loop
15 Exercise on PL/SQL Perform the following  Check for handling of
built-in exception built- in Exceptions
handling i. Know about types  Check for raising of user
of Exception defined Exception
handling  Check for handling of
ii. To handle built-in Exceptions user defined Exception
with appropriate
error messages
16 Exercise on PL/SQL in Perform the following  Check for declaration of
user defined exception user defined exception
handling i. To declare user  Check for proper raising
defined exception of exceptions
ii. To raise user  Check for proper
defined exception handling of user defined
iii. To handle user exception with
defined exception appropriate error
messages
17 Exercise on Procedures Perform the following  Check for
proper declaration of
i. To know the concept of stored procedures
procedures
ii. To declare procedures  Check for syntax of parameters a
iii. The type of parameters IN,  Check for proper calling
IN OUT, OUT of procedures
iv. To call procedures from
other procedures
18 Exercise on Functions Perform the following  Check for proper
declaration of function
i. To know the concept of  stored
Checkfunctions
for syntax of
ii. To declare function parameters and its data
with return data type
iii. To call functions from other  Check for proper return
functions data type from the
functions
 Check for variable
assignment to get the
returned value from the
function

234
Sl. No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies
Experiment

19 Exercise on Recursion Perform the following  Check for the syntax of

stored function or
i. To know the concept of procedure
stored functions and stored  Check for calling the
procedures function or procedure in
ii. To call the procedure and the same function /
function by itself procedure
iii. To place a condition to  Check for the condition
terminate from calling itself to terminate from calling
itself
20 Exercise on Cursors Perform the following  Check for the syntax of
cursor
i. To know the concept cursors  Check for open cursor,
ii. To know the fetch data from fetch data, close cursor
database  Check for the result

21 Exercise on Triggers Perform the following  Check for the syntax of

trigger
i. To know the concept of  Write a trigger which
triggers raises before insert data
ii. Validation before and after  Raise trigger
insert, before and after  Repeat the procedure for
update and , before and remaining
after delete data  Check for the result
22 Exercise on Installation Perform the following
of MongoDB  Observe Mongo DB
i. To download and install version being installed
MongoDB  Observe the RAM & HDD
requirements
 Rectify for any Mongo DB
installation errors
Able to login as
Administrator
23 Exercise on Creation Perform the following
and Dropping of  Know the use of create
Database i. Create the Database Database () and drop
ii. Drop the Database Database()

 Correct Database
creation syntax errors

 Check for displaying the

database name

235
Sl. No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies
Experiment

24 Exercise on Creation Perform the following

and Dropping of  Know the use of create
Collections i. Create the Collection Collection () and drop ()
ii. Drop the Collection
 Correct Database
creation syntax errors

 Check for collection

name

 Check for the collection

dropped
25 Exercises on Execute the following
commands of Mongo commands of Mongo DB  Know the syntax of insert
DB (), update (), find (),
i. Insert the Document remove (), sort ()
ii. update the Document functions.
iii. find the Document
iv. Delete the Document  Correct syntax errors.
v. sort the Documents
 Check out for different
input values.

236
Course Code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods/week periods

CCN-309 Multimedia 4 60 40 60
Lab

NO. OF CO’s mapped

S.NO MAJOR TOPICS
PERIODS

1 MS Access - create Database, create table with and 12 CO1

without constraints, Insert, delete, update records,
implement queries, create relationship between two
tables

2 Scribus/Page maker- Creation of publication using tools, 12 CO2

text, shapes, etc, Custom template, colors, text block,
Objects, Styles, Page elements, Printing the documents

3 Telugu typing Software /Telugu Software– Anu Script 8 CO3

Manager, Usage in SCRIBUS/ Page Maker., Key board
acquaintance

4 GIMP/Photoshop – Different tools, Working with Layers, 16 CO4

Working with painting tools, Colors, Brushes

5 Adobe Flash / Ruffle/Light Spark– Drawing Basic shapes, 12 CO5

Working with layers, Working with Text , 3D spaces,
Creating simple animations, Audio and video editing using
audacity tool

TOTAL 60

Course Objectives (i) Familiarize with the features of MS Access.

(ii) Familiarize with the features of Adobe PageMaker/ Scribus.
(iii) Familiarize with Telugu Typing software/ Telugu Software
(iv) Familiarize with the features of Adobe GIMP/ Photoshop.
(v) Familiarize with the features of Adobe Flash / Ruffle/Light
Spark

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO1 CCN-309.1 Demonstrate the concepts of databases, tables, manipulating records,
Course queries and establishing relationship among tables.
Outcomes CO2 CCN-309.2 Design publication files such as Textbooks, Visiting Cards, Invitation Cards,
etc. using Adobe PageMaker
CO3 CCN-309.3 Use Telugu Typing software (Anu Script Manager) in SCRIBUS/ Adobe Page

237
 maker.
CO4 CCN-309.4 Use the Adobe GIMP/ Photoshop, Design and enhance the quality all types of
picture files
CO5 CCN-309.5 Use Adobe/Ruffle/Light Spark Flash features to include multimedia
animations through audio and visual effects.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-309.1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 2

CCN-309.2 2 2 3 2 2 2

CCN-309.3 1 1 2 3 2 2 3

CCN-309.4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2

CCN-309.5 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

Average 1.2 2.2 2.4 2 2 2.3 2.25 2 2.3 2

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

Practice with MS-Access

1. To create Database
2. To Create table with and without constraints
3. To Insert, delete, update records
4. To implement queries
5. To create relationship between two table

Practice with Adobe SCRIBUS/ Page Maker.

6. Exercise on Installation, invoking and familiarizing Adobe Page Maker.

7. Exercise on SCRIBUS/ Page Maker. Tools.
8. Exercise on pallets and formatting pages
9. Exercise on text formatting
10. Exercise on Advanced text formatting
11. Exercise on Graphics tools
12. Exercise on object transformations.
13. Exercise on color options.
14. Exercise on graphics with layers using photo shop plug-ins
15. Exercise on import and export options.
16. Exercise on creating visiting card
17. Exercise on creating book cover page
18. Exercise on creating hotel menu card

238
 19. Exercise on creating invitation card
20. Exercise on creating brochure
21. Exercise on Anu script for preparing Visiting card, Brochure in telugu.
22. Exercise on Anu script for preparing telugu invitation card.

Practice with Adobe GIMP/ Photoshop.

23. Exercise on Installation, invoking and familiarizing Adobe GIMP/ Photoshop.

24. Exercise on Images
25. Exercise on Resizing & Cropping Images
26. Exercise on Working With Basic Selections
27. Exercise on Layers
28. Exercise on Painting In GIMP/ Photoshop.
29. Exercise on Photo Retouching
30. Exercise on Color Correction
31. Exercise on Quick Mask Mode
32. Exercise on Pen Tool
33. Exercise on Creating Special Effects
34. Exercise on Exporting Your Work
35. Exercise on Logo Creation
Practice with Adobe Flash / Ruffle/Light Spark

36. Exercise on creating a new document, drawing basic shapes using pen, pencil, brush and
eraser tools
37. Exercise on creating layers , naming layers, organizing layers in to folders.
38. Exercise on creating objects, fill, gradient , aligning and grouping of objects in to layers.
39. Exercise on Creating symbols and instances, creating frame by frame animation
animating the text.

40. Exercise on creating motion tweening animation - classic tweening

41. Exercise on creating shape tweening and path tweening animations.
42. Exercise on creating onion skinning animation effects.
43. Exercise on Creating a spot light masking for text and image..
44. Exercise on creating a new audio file by editing the existing audio.

Mini Project : Student has to develop a Mini project applying the skills acquired from the learning
outcomes of this course.

KEY COMPETENCIES

Exp Name of the Experiment Objectives Key Competencies

No

1 To create database a. Open MS Access Database creatIon

b. Create database
c. save

239
2 To create table a. Open MS Access Table creation
b. Create database
c. Create table
d. Use primary key
3 To insert/delete/update records a. Open msaccess Able to insert/upate/delete and
into table b. Create database delete and update
c. Crate table records into the table
d. Insert/delete/update
records
4 To implement queries a. Open msaccess Able to display contents of the
b. Create database table based on the user
Crate table requirement
c. Use Select command

5 Create relationships between a. Create table Able to link tables

tables b. Create one more
tables
c. Insert records
d. Use relationship
option
6 Exercise on Installation, Installation, invoking and  Installing page maker
invoking and familiarizing familiarizing Adobe Page Maker.  Familiarize with pagemaker
Adobe Page Maker. environment

7 Exercise on Page Maker Tools. Page Maker Tools.  Using Tool box, zero
position, pointer tool, text
tool, rotate tool, crop tool,
oblique line tool,
constrained line tool, box
tool, rectangle frame, circle
tool, circular frame,
polygon tool, polygon
frame, hand tool and zoom
tool,

8 Exercise on pallets and pallets and formatting pages  Use of paper size, page
formatting pages size, control pallet, color
pallet, styles pallet, layers
pallet, master page pallet,
hyperlink pallet and
measurement system,
grids, rulers and guides,
insert pages.

9 Exercise on text formatting text formatting  Know the purpose of

master pages, placing a
text, Formatting text (size,
styles), Paragraph setting,
tab setting, bullets,

240
 numbering, hyphenation
setting, setting and
creating styles, rotating
text and color to text and
save the document.

10 Exercise on Advanced text Advanced text formatting  use spell check, divide the
formatting text intocolumns, work
with indexes and
pagenation, use the find
feature and save the
document.
11 Exercise on Graphics tools Graphics tools  Create a document to
work with graphics with
the help of line tool, box
tool, ellipse tool, polygon
tool, rounded corners, fill,
stroke and to place various
graphics(at least 2 for each
graphic tool) and save the
document.

12 Exercise on object object transformations.  Transform the objects such

transformations. as transforming a
rectangle, resizing an
ellipse, inserting cropping
an image.
13 Exercise on color options. color options.  Adding color to a graphic
shape, creating own colors
with RGB, editing, copying,
removing and replacing
colors, grouping and
ungroupingobjects, linking
objects, masking objects
and save the document.

14 Exercise on graphics with layers graphics with layers using  Create a document of five
using photoshop plug-ins photoshop plug-ins pages containing text and
graphics and work
withlayers, moving objects
between layers using
layeroptions, using
stackingorder, using
photoshop plug-ins

15 Exercise on import and export import and export options.  Create a new document
options. and import text from
HTML, MSword,
spreadsheet, photo
CD,acquiring tif
image,managing linked

241
 files, to use export options
to export text and graphics
to jpeg format and to print
the document, to publish
the document in internet
and save it,

16 Exercise on creating visiting card creating visiting card  Create visiting card with
text and graphics on both
sides with proper
formatting.

17 Exercise on creating book cover creating book cover page  Create front and back
page cover page of a book with
text and graphics with
proper formatting.

18 Exercise on creating hotel menu creating hotel menu card  Create a hotel menu card
card with text and graphics with
proper formatting.

19 Exercise on creating invitation creating invitation card  Create a invitation card

card with text and graphics with
proper formatting for
required no. of pages.

20 Exercise on creating brochure creating brochure  Create a brochure for the

firms like real estate
companies, hospitals,
educational institutions
etc..,

21 Exercise on Anuscript for Anuscript for preparing Visiting  Visiting card, Brochure
preparing Visiting card, card, Brochure preparation using
Brochure Anuscript in Telugu

22 Exercise on Anuscript for Anuscript for preparing telugu  Invitation card preparation
preparing telugu invitation card. invitation card. using Anuscript in Telugu

23 Exercise on Installation, Installation, invoking and  Exploring the Toolbox

invoking and familiarizing familiarizing Adobe Photoshop  The New CS4 Applications
Adobe Photoshop Bar & the Options Bar
 Exploring Panels & Menus
 Creating & Viewing a New
Document
 Customizing the Interface
 Setting Preferences

242
24 Exercise on Images Working with Images  Zooming & Panning an
Image
 Working with Multiple
Images, Rulers, Guides &
Grids
 Undoing Steps with History
 Adjusting Color with the
New Adjustments Panel
 The New Masks Panel &
Vibrance Color Correction
Command
 The New Note Tool & the
Save for Web & Devices
Interface
 The New Auto-Blend &
Auto-Align Layers
Commands
 The New 3D Commands
25 Exercise on RESIZING & RESIZING & CROPPING IMAGES  Understanding Pixels &
CROPPING IMAGES Resolution
 The Image Size Command
 Interpolation Options
 Resizing for Print & Web
 Cropping & Straightening
an Image
 Adjusting Canvas Size &
Canvas Rotation
26 Exercise on WORKING WITH WORKING WITH BASIC  Selecting with the Elliptical
BASIC SELECTIONS SELECTIONS Marquee Tool
 Using the Magic Wand &
Free Transform Tool
 Selecting with the Regular
& Polygonal Lasso Tools
 Combining Selections
 Using the Magnetic Lasso
Tool
 Using the Quick Selection
Tool & Refine Edge
 Modifying Selections
27 Exercise on LAYERS Working on Layers  Understanding the
Background Layer
 Creating, Selecting, Linking
& Deleting Layers
 Locking & Merging Layers
 Copying Layers, Using
Perspective & Layer Styles
 Filling & Grouping Layers
 Introduction to Blending
Modes
 Blending Modes, Opacity &

243
 Fill
 Creating & Modifying Text
28 Exercise on PAINTING IN PAINTING IN PHOTOSHOP  Using the Brush Tool
PHOTOSHOP  Working with Colors &
Swatches
 Creating & Using Gradients
 Creating & Working with
Brushes
 Using the Pencil & Eraser
Tools
 Painting with Selections
29 Exercise on PHOTO PHOTO RETOUCHING  Using The Red Eye Tool
RETOUCHING  The Clone Stamp Tool
 The Patch Tool & the
Healing Brush Tool
 The Spot Healing Brush
Tool
 The Color Replacement
Tool
 The Toning & Focus Tools
 Painting with History
30 Exercise on COLOR CORRECTION COLOR CORRECTION  Using Color Spaces & Color
Modes
 The Variations Command
 The Auto Commands
 Adjusting Levels
 Adjust Curves, Non-
Destructively, with
Adjustment Layers
31 Exercise on QUICK MASK MODE Using QUICK MASK MODE  Using Quick Mask Options
 Painting a Selection
 Saving & Removing a
Selection from the
Background
32 Exercise on PEN TOOL Working with the PEN TOOL  Understanding Paths & the
Pen Tool
 Creating Straight & Curved
Paths
 Creating Combo Paths
 Creating a Clipping Path
33 Exercise on CREATING SPECIAL CREATING SPECIAL EFFECTS  Getting Started with
EFFECTS Photoshop Filters
 Smart Filters
 Creating Text Effects
 Applying Gradients to Text
34 Exercise on Photo Shop Credits EXPORTING YOUR WORK  Saving with Different File
Formats
 Saving for Web & Devices
 Printing Options
 Photo shop Credits

244
35 Exercise on Logo Creation Logo Creation  To apply all the tools
 Prepare college logo
 Prepare logo for industry
36 Exercise on creating a Flash Creating flash document  Opening of flash interface
Page  Creating a new file
 Working with basic tools
like pen, pencil, Brush and
eraser tools
 Drawing basic shapes
 Save the file
37 Exercise on creating Layers in Working with layers, naming and  Creating basic shapes in
Flash grouping, locking and unlocking different layers
layers.  Grouping up of layers
 Locking and unlocking the
layers
 Naming the layers
 Grouping the layers in to
folders

38 Exercise on creating Objects Working with objects  Creating different objects

 Working with fill, gradient
features of objects
 Linking of objects to layers
 Aligning the objects.
 Save the file.
39 Exercise on Frame By Frame Working with symbols and  Creating symbols and
animation instances, working with timeline, instances
frame by frame animation.  Saving the symbols and
instances
 Creating a text in a layer
 Animating the text using
frame by frame animation
 Setting the time limit for
animation
 Save the file.
40 Exercise on Motion Tweening Creating a basic shape, moving  Creating a basic object like
the ball using motion tweening. Ball
 Working with fill , gradient
and texture for the object
 Moving the ball in direction
using motion tweening
41 Exercise on Morphing, path import an object, working with  Create / Import an object
tweening shape tweening.  Attaching the object to
layer
Creating a shape, working with  Morph the object using
guide layer. shape tweening
 Ceate a basic shape like
BEE
 Attach the shape to layer
 Creating a path and

245
 attaching to layer
 Playing the animation

42 Exercise on creating onion Learning the use of onion  Creating any basic shape
skinning animation effect skinning feature in Flash  Working with time line
feature
 Enabling onion skin feature
 Playing the animation
43 Exercise on Spot light masking Creating an object,  Create a text/object
 Creating spotlight for
Creating spotlight,Masking of the text/object
object,playing the animation  Playing the animation
44 Exercise on creating new audio Importing an audio file  Import an audio file
file  Cut a small part of audio
Clipping the audio file using audacity tool
 Save the file
Saving and exporting the audio
file.

246
IV SEMESTER

247
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2020
(IV Semester)
InstructionPeriods/
Scheme Of Examinations
Week Total
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject End
Per Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Semester Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY SUBJECTS

CCN-401 Mathematics III 3 - 45 3 20 80 100

CCN-402 Web Technologies 5 75 3 20 80 100

-
Digital Electronics and
CCN-403 6 - 90 3 20 80 100
Computer Organisation

CCN-404 Java Programming 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

Cryptography and
CCN-405 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Network Security

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-406 Web Technologies Lab 6 90 3 40 60 100

-
Java Programming Lab
CCN-407 6 90 3 40 60 100
with mini-Project -

CCN-408 Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

Computer Networks and

CCN-409 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Security Lab
Total 23 19 630 - 260 640 900

CCN-401&408 common with all branches

CCN-407 common with DAIME,DCBDE branches
CCN-403 common with AI-405 of DAIE
CCN-404 common with DAIME,DCBDE branches& CM/IT-502 of DCME & DIT, WD-502 of DWDE, AI-
303 of DAIE
CCN-402,406 common with DCME, DIT, DAIME,DCBDE branches

248
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III

Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

Code Course Title Periods/week periods FA SA

Engineering
CCN-401 3 45 20 80
Mathematics-III

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

Higher order Linear Differential

1 15 CO1
equations with constant coefficients

2 Laplace Transforms 18 CO2

3 Fourier Series 12 CO3

Total Periods 45

(i) To learn the principles of solving differential equations of second

and higher order.
Course Objectives (ii) To comprehend the concept of Laplace transformations and
inverse Laplace transformations.
(iii) To understand the concept of Fourier Series expansion of
functions.

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential

Course
equations of second and higher order.
Outcomes
CO2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various
functions.

CO3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier
Sine and Cosine series.

249
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
Differential Equations of higher order
C.O. 1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equation of second and higher
order.
L.O 1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a, b, c are real numbers and
provide examples.
1.2 Solve higher order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients and provide
examples.
1.3 Define complementary function, particular Integral and general solution of a non-homogeneous
differential equation.
1.4 Describe the methods of solving f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of nth order and X is a
function of the forms k , eax , sin ax,cos ax, x, x n and their linear combinations where n is a
positive integer, with examples.
Unit-II
Laplace Transforms
C.O. 2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various functions.
L.O. 2.1 Define Laplace Transform and explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform
2.2. Obtain Laplace transforms of standard functions and solve simple problems.
2.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem (without
proof) and Change of Scale property and solve simple problems.
2.4. Write the Laplace Transform of unit step function and second shifting theorem (without proof)
and solve simple problems.
n
2.5. Write formulae for Laplace transform of functions with multiplication by t and division by t,
Laplace transform of derivatives, evaluation of some definite integrals using Laplace Transforms and
solve simple problems.

Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

2.6 Define inverse Laplace Transform, obtain inverse Laplace Transforms of standard functions and
solve simple problems.
2.7 Write linearity property, first and second shifting theorems (without proof), change of scale
property of inverse Laplace transform and solve simple problems.
2.8 Write inverse Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals and solve simple problems.
2.9 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions with multiplication by s and division by s and solve
simple problems.
2.10 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions using partial fractions and solve some simple
problems.
2.10 Define convolution of two functions, state convolution theorem (without proof) and solve
simple problems.

250
 Unit-III
Fourier series
C.O. 3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier Sine and Cosine
series
L.O. 3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the intervals (c, c  2 ) and (c, c  2l ) and write the
Euler’s formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series expansion of a function.
3.4 Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0 , 2π) and (-π , π)
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval ( ,  ) and (l , l ) expand simple
functions.
3.6 Write Fourier series expansion of a function over the interval (0, 2l) and (l , l ) and expand
simple functions.
3.7 Write half-range Fourier sine and cosine series of a function over the interval (0, π) and (0, l )
and expand simple functions.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

Engineering Mathematics – III

CO/PO - Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 2.66 2.33 2.33 2.66 3 2.66

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

Note:
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.

251
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.

PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

C-20
Engineering Mathematics – III
PO- CO – Mapping strength
CO periods addressing PO in
column I
Mapped with Level
PO no Remarks
CO no (1,2 or 3)

No %

1 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3

2 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3 >40% Level 3

3 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3 Highly

addressed
4 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3

5
25% to 40%
6 Level 2
Moderately
7
addressed
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3

PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3

5% to 25%
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 36 80% 3 Level 1 Low
addressed

<5% Not
addressed

252
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
(Common Subject)
Course Content
Unit I: Differential Equations of higher order
1. Solve Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and
higher with emphasis on second order.
2. Solve Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)y
= X where X is in the form k(constant), eax, sinax, cosax, xn, where n is a positive integer, finding
complimentary function, particular integral and general solution.
Unit II: Laplace Transforms
3. Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of elementary functions, linearity property,
state first shifting theorem, change of scale property, multiplication by tn, division by t, LT of
derivatives and integrals, LT of unit step function, state second shifting theorem, inverse Laplace
transforms- state shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by sn and division
by s, derivatives, integrals, examples of inverse LT using partial fractions, state convolution
theorem with simple examples.

Unit III: Fourier series

4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the
interval  c , c  2  and  c , c  2l  , Euler’s formulae , sufficient conditions for existence of
Fourier series expansion of a function, Fourier series expansion of basic functions limited to
k(constant), x, x2 ,sin ax,cos ax, eax and their combinations over the intervals

 0, 2  ,   ,   ,  0, 2l  ,  l , l  , Fourier series for even and odd functions over

  ,   and  l , l  , Fourier half-range sine and cosine series over  0,   and  0, l 

Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:

1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers

2. M.R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline of Laplace Transforms, Schaums’ Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers,
Moscow.

253
 MODEL BLUE PRINT
Marks wise Question
S. Chapter/ No of Weightage COs
distribution of wise distribution
No Unit title Periods Allotted mapped
weightage of weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I Higher
order Linear
Differential
1 15 28 11 11 3 3 2 2 1 1 CO1
equations with
constant
coefficients
Unit - II
CO2
2 Laplace 18 33 11 11 11 0 2 2 2 0
Transforms
Unit - III
3 12 19 3 3 3 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Fourier Series
Total 45 80 25 25 17 13 5 5 4 2

R: Remembering Type : 25 Marks

U: understanding Type : 25 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 17 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 13 Marks

C-20
Engineering Mathematics – III
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test-I From LO 1.1 to 2.5

Unit Test-II From LO 2.6 to 3.7

254
 Unit Test I C –20, CCN-
401
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
IV SEMESTER
Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-III
Sub Code: CCN-401
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks each

1. Answer the following:

a. Write the auxiliary equation for given differential equation D 2
 4 y  0 (CO1)
b. For given differential equation f ( D) y  0 , if roots of auxiliary equation are 1,-1,then
y  _____________ (CO1)

c. L e3t   ___________ (CO2)

d.
at
 
L  f (t )  f ( s) then L e f (t )  f (s  a) : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)

2. Solve D 2
 2D  1 y  0. (CO1)

3. Find the particular integral of D 2

 D  4 y  ex ( CO1)

4. Evaluate L t 1  2

(CO2)

5. Evaluate L t 2
 2cos t  3sin t (CO2)

Part-B 3×8=24
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

6. A) Solve D 4
 5D2  4  y  0. (CO1)
or

B) Solve D 2
 D  6  y  1  e3 x . (CO1)
7. A) Solve D 2
 3D  2  y  x 2  sin x. (CO1)
or

B) Solve D 2
 D  y  2e x  3cos x. (CO1)

255
 8. A) Evaluate L e 3t
cos2 t (CO2)
or

B) Evaluate L e  t  1  t 2
 (CO2)
-o0o-
Unit Test II
C –20, CCN-401
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
IV SEMESTER
Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-III
Sub Code: CCN-401
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks each

1. Answer the following:

a. L  f (t )  f (s) then L tf (t )  

d
ds
 
f ( s) : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)

 1 
b. L1  ? (CO2)
 s  3
 1 
c. L1  2 2
? (CO2)
s  a 
d. Write the Fourier series for the function f ( x) in the interval c  x  c  2 . (CO3)

2. Evaluate L te . t
(CO2)


e
3t
3. Evaluate sin 4tdt. (CO2)
0

 3 2 s 
4. Evaluate L1   2  2  . (CO2)
 s  4 s  16 s  4 
5. Evaluate Fourier coefficient a0 for f ( x) in the interval   ,   . (CO3)

Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

6. A) Evaluate L te t
cos t. (CO2)
or

256
  cos at  cos bt 
B) Evaluate L   . (CO2)
 t 

 s 

7. A) Evaluate L1   . (CO2)

  s  1  s 2
 1 

or

 s 

B) Evaluate L1   . (CO2)
  
4

 s 1 


8. A) Obtain the Fourier series for the function f ( x)  e x in the interval  0, 2  . (CO3)
or
B) Obtain the half range Fourier cosine series of f ( x)  x 2 in  0,1 . (CO3)

-o0o-

257
 END EXAM MODEL PAPER
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS –CCN- 401

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M


1. Solve D  3D  2 y  0. CO 1
2

Solve  D  D  1 y  0. CO 1
2
2.

 
3. Find the particular integral of differential equation D  4 y  sin 2 x. CO 1
2

Find the particular integral of differential equation  D  3D  2  y  e3 x . CO 1

2
4.
Find L 2e  sin 3t  cosh t. CO2
3t
5.
Find L e cos 4t. CO2
t
6.
1 4 3s 
7. Find L1  2  2  2  . CO2
s s  4 s 9
8. Find the value of a0 in the Fourier expansion of f ( x)  e x in the interval  0, 2  . CO3
9. Find the Fourier coefficients of f ( x) in the interval   ,   . CO3
10. Find the value of a1 in the half range cosine series of f ( x)  k in the interval
 0,   . CO3

PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M


11. A) Solve D  6 D  11D  6 y  0. CO 1
3 2

Or
  3 x
B) Solve D  9 y  e  e . CO 1
2 3x

12. A) Solve  D  4D  4  y  sin 3x. CO1

2

Or

B) Solve D  2D  2 y  x  x  1. CO1
2 2

t
13. A) Evaluate L te cos t . CO2  
Or

B) Evaluate L t cos 2t . CO2
2

 sin 5t sin t 
14. A) Evaluate L   . CO2
 t 
Or

258
 
sin t
B) Evaluate  dt. CO2
0
t

1  1 
15. A) Find L   . CO2
 s  s  1 s  2  
Or
 
1  s
B) Using convolution theorem find L  2  . CO2

 s  1 s  4 
2
 
PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. Find the Fourier expansion of f ( x)  x  x 2 in the interval   ,   and hence deduce
1 1 1 1 2
that      . CO3
12 22 32 42 12

259
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – CCN-401
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- 2 MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M


1. Solve D  4D  4 y  0. CO 1
2


2. Solve D  9 y  0. CO 1
2

 
3. Find the particular integral of differential equation D  4D  3 y  e . CO 1
2 4x

 
4. Find the particular integral of differential equation D  4D  5 y  cos 2 x. CO 1
2

2t
5. Find L 2  e  sinh 6t . CO2 

2t 2
6. Find L e t . CO2 
1 4 3s 
7. Find L1  2  2  2  . CO2
s s  4 s 9
8. Find the value of a0 in the Fourier expansion of f ( x)  x  x 2

in the interval  1,1 . CO3

9. Write Euler’s formula of Fourier expansion of f ( x) in the interval  c, c  2  . CO3

10. Find the value of a1 in the half range cosine series of f ( x)   in the interval

 0,   . CO3

PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

11. A) Solve D  1 y  0. CO 1
3

Or
 3 x
B) Solve D  D  6 y  e  e . CO 1
2 3x


12. A) Solve D  3D  2 y  cos3x. CO1
2

Or

B) Solve D  2D  1 y  2 x  x . CO1
2 2

3t 2
13. A) Evaluate L e cos t . CO2  
Or

B) Evaluate L t cos 2t . CO2
2

260
  e at  ebt 
14. A) Evaluate L   . CO2
 t 
Or


B) Using Laplace transforms evaluate  cos 3tdt. CO2

0

  s 2  1  
1 
15. A) Find L log   . CO2
  s  12  
   
Or
 
1  1
B) Using convolution theorem find L  2  . CO2
  s  1  s  1 
PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. Find the Fourier expansion of f ( x)    x  in the interval 0  x  2 and hence

2

1 1 1 2
deduce that        . CO3
12 22 32 6

Course No. of Total No. of Marks for

Course Title Marks for FA
code Periods/Weeks periods SA

CCN-402 Web 5 75 20 80
Technologies

S. No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of Periods CO’s Mapped

261
1. Principles of Web Designing and HTML 12 CO1
Introduction.
2. Understand various HTML tags and usage 14 CO2
of style sheets.
3. Understand XML and Client side scripting 14 CO3
using Java Script.
4. JavaScript Ajax and J Query 15 CO4

5. Web servers and 20 CO5

Server side scripting using PHP
Total Periods 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i)Understand the basic elements of web page
Course Objectives ii) Know the working with HTML, CSS
iii)Familiarize the various Technologies like Java Script AJAX, JQuery,
PHP.
iv)Understand Database connectivity Using PHP

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO1 CCN-402.1 Design interactive web page(s) using HTML
CO2 CCN-402.2 Describe the process to format and validate Web page elements
Course
using CSS,.
Outcomes
CO3 CCN-402.3 Describe data in a web page using XML and JavaScript
CO4 CCN-402.4 Use AJAX, JQuery and Angular JS in web page design.
CO5 CCN-402.5 Develop Dynamic web site using server side PHP Programming
and database connectivity is using PHP.

CO-PO/PSO Matrix

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-402.1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 2

CCN-402.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 3

CCN-402.3 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 3

CCN-402.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3

262
 CCN-402.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3

Average 1.75 2 2.6 2.4 1.75 2.8 1.4 2.4 3 2.8

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.1 Principles of Web Designing and HTML Introduction.

1.2 Basic web Terminology.
1.3 Describe Anatomy of web page.
1.4 Understand different Web page elements.
1.5 Navigate through web pages
1.6 Narrate steps in building web site
1.7 Narrate steps in launching
1.8 Narrate maintaining web site.
1.9 Introduction and Overview of HTML
1.10 Discuss the rules for designing a HTML document.
1.11 Explain the structure of HTML document.
1.12 Define HTML element and Attribute.
1.13 Study the basic tags in HTML <html>, <head>, <title>, <body>.
1.14 Study the header tags <h1> to <h6>
1.15 Discuss the formatting tags <b>, <i>, <u>, <strike>, <sub>, <sup>, big>, <small>, <tt>
1.16 Discuss the Logical formatting tags <q>, <strong>, <cite>, <<ins>, <del>,<em>
1.17 Discuss the <marquee> with attributes.
1.18 List Character entities.
1.19 Explain the List tags like <ul>, <ol>, <li>, <dl>, <menu> with attributes.
1.20 Describe tables tags like <table>, <tr>, <td>, <th>,<tbody>, <thead>, <tfoot>

2.1 Understand various HTML tags and usage of style sheets.

2.2 Explain the link and imaging tags <a>, <img> with attributes.
2.3 Explain the tags, <form>, <input>, <button>, <label>, <select>, <options>, <textarea>,
<legend> with attributes.
2.4 Explain the tags, <frame>, <frameset>, <noframe>, <iframe> with attributes.
2.5 Illustrate about cascading style sheets
2.6 Understand the level of styles inline, internal and embedded style sheets.
2.7 Explain ID and Class selectors in CSS
2.8 Explain about Color and background properties
2.9 Explain about Box properties like Border, position, margin, padding of elements.
3.1 Understand XML and Java Script.
3.2 Describe how to organize data in the form of XML.
3.3 Explain the rules for designing XML document.
3.4 Understand the significance of Namespace.
3.5 List the various applications of XML.
3.6 Differentiate between Client-side and Server-side scripting.
3.7 List Client side and server side scripting languages.
3.8 Describe the features of Java Script.
3.9 Placing JavaScript code in HTML.
3.10 Understand functions
3.11 Know how to define and call a function.
3.12 Know how to pass parameters.

263
 3.13 Understand the purpose of GetElementById method
3.14 Describe the global functions provided by JavaScript.
3.15 Form Handling in Java Script
3.16 Illustrate Arrays
3.16.1 Understand single and multi-dimensional arrays.
3.16.2 Design small programs using arrays.
3.17 Understand about various Objects provided by JavaScript
3.17.1 Math object
3.17.2 String object
3.17.3 Date object
3.17.4 Boolean and Number object
3.18 Describe events in java script.

4.1 JavaScript Ajax and JQuery

4.2 Define AJAX
4.3 List the steps for designing a web application using AJAX.
4.4 Explain XMLHttpRequest Object properties and methods of XMLHttpRequest
4.5 Explain sending Ajax request to server and receiving a response from server with
example program.
4.6 Define JQuery
4.7 List the features of JQuery
4.8 List JQuery plugins
4.9 Explain the steps for to includeJQueryin Web Pages
4.10 Explain JQuery Syntax with example program
4.11 Describe the jQuery Selectors-Accessing HTML elements by using
4.11.1 Element Selectors
4.11.2 ID, Class Selectors
4.12 Explain the JQuery Document Ready Event
4.13 Describe the JQuery Event handling methods(Mouse Events, Keyboard Events, Form
Events, Document/Window events)
4.14 Explain effects of JQuery ( like hide, show, fadeIn, fadeout, fadeToggle,fadeTo,
slideDown, SlideUp, SlideToggle)
4.15 Explain Functions in JQuery like text(),html(), val(), attr(),css().
4.16 Define AngularJS? Architecture, Advantages & Features.
4.17 List and Explain Angular JS Directives like ng-app,ng-init ,ng-model ,ng-repeat
4.18 Explain AngularJS Expressions like number, string,object,array.
4.19 Explain AngularJS Filters like lowercase,uppercase,filter,orderby,currency.

5.0 Web servers and Server side scripting using PHP.

5.1 Understand the architecture of a Web server.
5.2 List the various web servers.
5.3 Illustrate the various HTTP request types and their difference.
5.4 Compare the properties of IIS, and Apache.
5.5 Explain how to combine HTML and PHP.
5.6 Explain how to access HTML, PHP documents from web servers.
5.7 List various Data types and explain them with examples.
5.8 Explain how to declare Variables and Constants.
5.9 List and explain string manipulation functions.
5.10 Understand Arrays
5.11 Explain types of arrays.

264
 5.12 Design small programs using arrays.
5.13 Explain form handling using $_GET,$_POST methods
5.14 List and explain mysql database functions in PHP.
5.15 Explain the steps of connecting to a Database.
5.16 Know about retrieving data from a table.
5.17 Know about inserting data into a table.
5.18 Know about updating the data in a table.
5.19 Know about deleting data from a table.
5.20 Design some simple programs to insert, delete, update and retrieve data from
database.
5.21 Define Cookie.
5.22 Know how to create and delete a cookie.
5.23 Know the purpose of cookie.
5.24 Define Session
5.25 Understand how to create a session.
5.26 Know how to destroy a session.
5.27 Know the purpose of session.
5.28 Differentiate Sessions and Cookies.
5.29 Explain how to pass data from one web page to other webpage.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. Principles of Web Designing and HTML Introduction

Principles of Web Designing: Anatomy of Web page, Format, Elements, Navigation, Building,
Launching and maintaining web site
HTML: Introduction to HTML, Format of web page, Tags and attributes, Formatting text, Adding
images, Positioning. Lists, Colors, Tables.

2. HTML & CSS:Connecting to hyperlinks and Imaging, Forms, Frames,IFrame

CSS : Introduction, Inline styles, Embedded style sheets, Conflicting styles, Linking external
Style sheets, Positioning elements, Backgrounds, Element dimensions

3. XML & JavaScript:XML-Introduction, Structuring Data, XML Namespaces, Applications of XML

JAVA SCRIPT-Introduction to Scripting, Client-Side versus Server-Side Scripting, JavaScript features,
Functions – Function definitions, Use of Get Element ById, Get Element By Name, Global functions,
Form handling, Arrays – Declaring and allocating arrays, References and reference parameters,
passing arrays to functions, sorting and Searching arrays, Multiple-Subscripted arrays, Objects –
Math object, String object, Date object, Boolean and Number object.

4. JavaScript-Ajax and J Query

Java script-Ajax-Introduction to AJAX, Steps for designing a web application using AJAX, XML Http
Request Object- Properties and methods of XML Http Request, Sending a request to the server,
receiving response from server using AJAX.
J Query:Introduction to J query, Features of J Query, Plugin used in J Query, steps for to include J
Query in Web Page, J Query Syntax, j Query Selectors- Element, Selectors, ID, Class, Document Ready
Event, J Query Event handling methods, effects of J Query, Functions in J Query
Angular JS:Introduction to Angular JS, Features, Advantages, Angular JS architecture, Directives,
Expressions, Filters, Sample programs.

5. Web servers and Server side scripting using PHP.

265
Web servers:Introduction, HTTP Request Types, System Architecture, Client-Side versus Server-Side
Scripting, Accessing Web Servers-IIS, Apache, Requesting HTML, PHP documents.
PHP:Fundamentals of PHP, Data types, String functions, Arrays, form handling, Databases, Cookies,
Sessions, Passing data from one web page to other web page.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1) Principles of Web Design, Sklar, TMH
2) HTML complete reference, Powell, TMH
3) Basics of Web Site Design, NIIT – PHI
4) WWW Design with HTML, Xavier (TMH)
5) Internet & World Wide Web,Dietel and Dietel, Pearson education Asia.
6) Complete Reference PHP, Steven Holzer-McGraw Hill
7) J Query Cook book,O'Reilly Media

MODEL BLUE PRINT

Marks Wise Question wise

No.of Weightage CO’s
S.No. Chapter/Unit title Distribution of Distribution of
periods Allocated Mapped
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Principles of Web
1 Designing and 12 14 6 8 2 1 CO1
HTML Introduction.

Understand various
HTML tags and
2 14 14 6 8 * 2 1 * CO2
usage of style
sheets.

Understand XML
3 and Client side 14 14 3 11 * 1 - 2 * CO3
scripting using Java

266
 Script.

JavaScript Ajax and

4 15 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO4
J Query

Web servers and

5 Server side scripting 20 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO5
using PHP

Total 75 70+10* 21 6 43 10* 7 2 6 1

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from any one of starred chapters.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.17
Unit test-2 From 4.1 to 5.29

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
Web Technologies
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-
402
MAX MARKS:40 TIME:
90 MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and remaining carries 3marks each.

1. a) the external Java script file must contains <script> tag (True/False)
(CO3)
b) --------------------is used to choose the client-side java script object.
(CO2)
c) Which selector selects the element that is the target of a referring URI [ ]
(CO1)
i) :target ii) :selection iii) :: selection iv) :URI
d) Which one of the following does not belongs to table tag [ ]
(CO1)
i) <tr> ii)<td> iii) <tbody> iv) <th>

267
2. Write different steps involved in launching a website.
(CO1)
3. Write any four formatting tags.
(CO2)
4. List the application of XML.
(CO2)
5. What is the significance of Namespace?
(CO2)
PART-B

3X8=24Marks
Instructions:1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is
the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain List tags with an example. (CO1)
Or
b) Write about any five table tags with example. (CO2)
7. a) Explain different Form tags with example. (CO2)
Or
b) Explain any five Box properties with sample code. (CO3)
8. a) Explain Math , String and Date objects in Java scripts (CO3)
Or
b) Describe how to define and call functions in java scripts. (CO2)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER – END EXAMINATION
Web Technologies

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-402

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS

PART-A 10X3=30Marks
Note: Answer all questions
1. Write the steps to launch a web site. CO1
2. Describe the following tags. CO1
a) <strong> (b)<cite> (c) <ins>
3. List any 3 attributes of <a>. CO1
4. What is the purpose of CSS? CO2
5. List the various applications of XML. CO2

268
 6. Write a JavaScript program to print the message. CO2
7. Define AJAX. CO3
8. List any 3features of JQuery. CO3
9. List any 3 web servers. CO4
10. Define Cookie. CO4

PART-B 5x8=40Marks
Note: Answer all questions

11. (a)Explain various Table tags with attributes. CO1

(Or)
(b) Explain various formatting tags in HTML. CO1
12. (a) Design a student registration form using form elements. CO2
(Or)
(b) Explain different types of CSS. CO2
13. (a) Explain the rules for designing XML document with an Example CO2
(Or)
(b) Explain in detail about Objects in JavaScript. CO2
14. (a) Explain Properties and methods of XML Http Request Object. CO3
(Or)
(b) Explain j Query Selectors with example.
15. (a) Explain any 5 String functions in PHP with syntax and example. CO4
(Or)
(b) Explain how to pass data from one web page to other web page CO4

PART-C 1×10=10Marks

16. Design an application to generate electricity bill for APEPDCL as per the data required by
them. (CO5)

Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

Course Title
code Periods/Weeks periods FA SA

Digital Electronics
CCN-403 and Computer 6 90 20 80
Organization

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Number systems Logic Gates ,Boolean Algebra 30 CO1,CO3

and basic Combinational circuits
2. Flip-Flops,Counters& Registers 25 CO1,CO2

3. Information representation & 15 CO1,CO2,CO3

CPU Organization
4. Memory Organization 10 CO2,CO4

269
 5. I/O Organization 10 CO3,CO4,CO5

Total Periods 90

i) To acquire the basic knowledge of Number systems, digital logic levels

and apply of knowledge to understand digital logic circuits.
ii) To prepare students to perform the analysis and design of various
Course Objectives
digital electronics circuits
iii)To know about Processor organization, information Representation
iv)To understand how memory and i/o is organized in an effective way

At the end of the course the student able to learn following:

CO1 CCN-403.1 Describe fundamental Numbering concepts and techniques

used in digital electronics, the switching algebra theorems
and logic gates
CO2 CCN-403.2 Analyse the working of flip flops, counting circuits, Registers

Course CO3 CCN-403.3 Explain the Basic computer organization techniques and
Outcomes information representation
CO4 CCN-403.4 Explain Memory organization

CO5 CCN-403.5 Describe Handling of peripheral organization

CO-PO/PSO Matrix

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-403.1 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 3

CCN-403.2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2

CCN-403.3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1

CCN-403.4 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1

CCN-403.5 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 1

Average 2.2 1.5 1.75 1 1 1 2 2.6 1.2 1.6

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Circuits

270
1.1 Number systems
1.1.1 List the various number systems used in digital Computer.
1.1.2 Explain Decimal , Binary, octal, Hexa Decimal number
systems
1.1.3 Convert decimal number to other base conversion.
1.1.3.1 Decimal to Binary
1.1.3.2 Decimal to Octal
1.1.3.3 Decimal to Hexadecimal
1.1.4 Convert binary number to other base conversion.
1.1.4.1 Binary to Decimal
1.1.4.2 Binary to octal
1.1.4.3 Binary to Hexadecimal
1.1.5 Convert octal number to other base conversion.
1.1.5.1 Octal to Decimal
1.1.5.2 Octal to Binary
1.1.5.3 Octal to Hexadecimal
1.1.6 Convert hexadecimal other base conversion.
1.1.6.1 Hexadecimal to Decimal
1.1.6.2 Hexadecimal to Binary
1.1.6.3 Hexadecimal to Octal
1.1.7 Binary numbers representation.
1.1.7.1 Define Binary numbers representation.
1.1.7.2 List the types of Binary numbers representation.
1.1.7.3 Explain Unsigned binary number representation.
1.1.7.4 Explain Signed binary number representation.
1.1.8 Signed binary arithmetic.
1.1.8.1 Illustrate addition of two signed binary numbers.
1.1.8.2 Illustrate subtraction of two signed binary numbers.
1.1.8.3 Illustrate binary multiplication.
1.1.8.4 Illustrate Binary division.
1.1.9 Binary coded decimal (BCD) coding scheme.
1.1.9.1 Define Binary coded decimal (BCD) coding scheme.
1.1.9.2 List the types of Binary coded decimal (BCD)
1.1.9.3 Draw and explain 8421 code.
1.1.9.4 Draw and explain 2421 code.
1.1.9.5 Draw and explain 8 4-2-1 code.
1.1.10 Character representation
1.1.10.1 List character representation codes
1.1.10.2 Explain the ASCII coding scheme.
1.1.10.3 Explain the EBCDIC coding scheme
1.2 Boolean algebra
1.2.1 Explain AND, OR, NOT operations with truth tables.
1.2.2 Explain the working of EX-OR and EX-NOR operations with
truthtables.
1.2.3 List the different postulates in Booleanalgebra.
1.2.4 State De-Morgan‘stheorems.
1.2.5 Prove De-Morgan‘stheorems using truth tables.
1.2.6 Apply De-Morgan‘s theorems and other postulates of
Boolean algebra to simplify the given Boolean expression.
1.2.7 Write Boolean expression for given truthtable.
1.2.7.1 Using Sum-Of-Products(SOP) method
1.2.7.2 Using Product-Of-Sums(POS)method
1.2.8 Use K – map to simplify Boolean expression (up to 4

271
 variables).
1.2.8.1 Using Two variable K-Map
1.2.8.2 Using Three variable K-Map
1.2.8.3 Using Four variable K-Map
1.3 Logic Gates
1.3.1 Define Logic gate
1.3.2 List basic gates
1.3.3 Define OR gate
1.3.4 Explain OR gate with logic symbol and truth table.
1.3.5 Define AND gate
1.3.6 Explain AND gate with logic symbol and truth table.
1.3.7 Define NOT gate
1.3.8 Explain NOT gate with logic symbol and truth table.
1.3.9 What is universal gate? List universal gates
1.3.10 Define NOR gate
1.3.11 Explain NOR gate with logic symbol and truth table.
1.3.12 Define NAND gate
1.3.13 Explain NAND gate with logic symbol and truth table.
1.3.14 Define EX-OR and EX-NOR gates
1.3.15 Explain the working of EX-OR and EX-NOR gates with
truthtables.
1.3.16 Implement AND, OR, NOT, EX-OR gates using NAND gates
only
1.3.17 Implement AND, OR, NOT, EX-OR gates using NOR gate only.

1.4 Basic Combinational Circuits

1.4.1 Define the HalfAdder. Explain the function of Half Adder.
1.4.2 Draw Half-Adder circuit using an exclusive OR and an
ANDgate.
1.4.3 Draw a Half–Adder using only NAND gates or only NOR
gates.
1.4.4 Define the Full Adder. Explain the function of Full Adder.
1.4.5 Construct Full Adder using two Half-Adder and an OR gate
1.4.6 Define the parallel Adder
1.4.7 Explain the function of parallel Adder using logic symbol.
1.4.8 Draw and explain 4-bit parallel adder using full adders.
1.4.9 Explain the working of a serial adder with a block diagram.
1.4.10 List the advantage and disadvantages of a serial adder
1.4.11 List the advantage and disadvantages of a parallel adder.
1.4.12 Distinguish between serial adder and parallel adder.
1.4.13 Expl2n the operation of a digital comparator circuit for two 4
bitwords.

2.0 Flip-Flops,Counters&Registers
2.1 FLIP-FLOPS

2.1.1 List the details of different logicfamilies.

2.1.2 Define positive and negative logiclevels.
2.1.3 Define Flip flop
2.1.4 Draw and explain the basic principle of operation of aFlip-
flop.
2.1.5 Define Latch.
2.1.6 Explain the working of a NANDlatch circuit with truth table

272
 and Timing diagram
2.1.7 Explain the working of a NOR latch circuit with truth table
and Timing diagram
2.1.8 Differentiate between Latch and Flip-flop.
2.1.9 Define Triggering
2.1.10 List the types of Triggering
2.1.11 Draw and explain the concept of edge triggering(positive,
negative)
2.1.12 Draw and explain the concept of level triggering. (positive,
negative)
2.1.13 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the
working of RS Flip-flop.
2.1.14 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the
working of RSTFlip-flop.
2.1.15 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the
working of DFlip-flop.
2.1.16 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the
workingof JKFlip-flop.
2.1.17 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the
working of T Flip-flop.
2.1.18 Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous inputs
of a flip- flop and state their functions.
2.1.19 Draw and explain the need for a Master-Slaveflip-flop.
2.1.20 Explain the working of a Master-Slave flip-flop using suitable
circuit diagram and truth table.

2.2 Counters
2.2.1 Define Counter
2.2.2 List the types of counters.
2.2.3 Define Synchronous counter
2.2.4 Define Asynchronous counter
2.2.5 Distinguish between asynchronous and synchronous
counters.
2.2.6 Draw and explain module-8 ripple counter circuit diagram
with waveforms and truth tables
2.2.7 Draw and explain module-16 ripple counter circuit diagram
with waveforms and truth tables
2.2.8 Draw and explain module-10 (decade) Asynchronous
counter circuit diagram with waveforms and truth tables
2.2.9 Draw and explain module-8 synchronous counter circuit
diagram with waveforms and truth tables
2.2.10 Draw and explain module-16 synchronous counter circuit
diagram with waveforms and truth tables
2.2.11 List the draw backs of ripple counters.
2.2.12 List the advantages of synchronous counters
2.2.13 Programmable counter
2.2.13.1 Draw and explain the need for a Programmable
counter
2.2.13.2 Explain how to design Programmable counter circuit
diagram
2.2.14 Draw and explain the operation of a 4-bit ring counter.
2.2.15 List the applications of counter.

2.3 Register

273
 2.3.1 Define Register
2.3.2 State the need of Register.
2.3.3 List the methods of data transfer in register.
2.3.4 List the types of Registers
2.3.5 Define Serial in – Serial out register
2.3.6 Define Serial in – Parallel out register
2.3.7 Define Parallel in – Serial out register
2.3.8 Define Parallel in – Parallel out register
2.3.9 Explain the working of serial in – serial out register with
circuit diagram.
2.3.10 Explain the working of serial in – parallel out register with
circuit diagram.
2.3.11 Explain the working of shift left Register with circuit diagram.
2.3.12 Explain the working of shift right registers with circuit
diagram.
2.3.13 Explain the working of universal shift register.
2.3.14 Draw and explain the use of shift register asmemory.

3.0 CPU Organization&Information representation and Arithmetic Operation

3.1 CPU Organization

3.1.1 Draw the functional block diagram of Digital computer and
explain the function of each unit.
3.1.2 Define Register
3.1.3 State the purpose of
3.1.3.1 Accumulator
3.1.3.2 Program counter
3.1.3.3 Instruction Register
3.1.3.4 Memory Buffer Register
3.1.3.5 Memory Address Register
3.1.4 Draw the block diagram of simple accumulator based CPU.
3.1.5 Explain the function of each unit
3.1.6 Define the terms micro operation, macro operation,
3.1.7 Define instruction cycle, fetch cycle and execution cycle.
3.1.8 What is stored program concept
3.1.9 Describe the sequential execution of a program stored in
memory by the CPU

3.2 Information representation and Arithmetic Operation

3.2.1 Explain the basic types of information representation in a
computer.
3.2.2 Define floating point representation and fixed point
representation of numbers.
3.2.3 Illustrate the floating point and fixed point representations
with example.
3.2.4 Distinguish between Fixed point and Floating point
representations.
3.2.5 What is Instruction format
3.2.6 Define Opcode , Operand and address.
3.2.7 Explain different types of instructions with examples
3.2.7.1 Zero address instructions

274
 3.2.7.2 One address instructions
3.2.7.3 Two address instructions
3.2.7.4 Three address instructions
3.3 List and explain various addressing modes.

4.0 Memory Organization

4.1 Distinguish between main and auxiliary memory.
4.2 State the need for memory hierarchy in a computer.
4.3 Explain memory hierarchy in a computer in detail
4.4 State the significance of various memory device characteristics: access time,
access rate, alterability, permanence of storage, cycle time.
4.5 Discuss Associative Memory
4.6 Explain the principle of virtual memory organization in a computer system
4.7 Explain virtual address and physical address organization.
4.8 State the principle of locality of reference
4.9 Explain Cache memory organization.
4.10 Analyze the importance of the principle of memory interleaving in a
computer.

5.0 I/O Organization

5.1 List the any five peripheral devices that can be connected to a computer.
5.2 Define Interface.
5.3 Explain the need for an interface.
5.4 List modes of date transfer.
5.5 Explain synchronous and asynchronous data transfer.
5.6 Compare synchronous and asynchronous data transfer.
5.7 Explain hand shaking procedure of data transfer.
5.8 Explain programmed I/O method of data transfer.
5.9 Explain interrupted initiated I/O.
5.10 Explain DMA controlled transfer.
5.11 Explain priority interrupt, polling, and daisy chaining priority.
5.12 Write about bus system
5.13 List the four bus systems.
5.14 Differentiate between i/o bus and memory bus

COURSE CONTENTS

1.Number systems,Boolean algebra and LogicalGates : List the various number systems used in
digital Computer, Explain Decimal , Binary,octal,Hexa Decimal number systems,Convert decimal
number to other base conversion,Convert binary number to other base conversion,Convert octal
number to other base conversion,Convert hexadecimal other base conversion,Binary numbers
representation,Signed binary arithmetic,Binary coded decimal (BCD) coding scheme,Character
representation,AND, OR, NAND, NOT, NOR & EX-OR gates. Logical definitions – Symbols – truth
tables. Boolean theorems, Boolean simplifications of Boolean expressions, Using De-Morgan‘s
theorems, Formation and implementation of Logic expressions, Karnaugh‘s mapping, Applications
involving developing of combinational logic circuits. Half-Adder, Full-adder, Subtractor series –
Parallel Binary adder .

2.FLIP FLOP: Different logic families, Basic principles of Flip Flop operation (with help of wave
form & truth tables) of RS,T,D,JK and Master Slave JK flip flop concept of Edge Triggering and
Level Triggering , Synchronous and Asynchronousdevice.

275
 Counters: Basic Asynchronous, Synchronous Binary and Decade counter and the Ripple counter,
their use Decade counter, Ringcounter.

Registers: Shift registers, Serial, Parallel register, Serial-in Parallel out, Parallel-in– serial out
devices, Universal shift registers, Applications.
3. Processor Organization - functional block diagram of Digital computer -Simple accumulator
based CPU and function of each unit.-Stored program concept

Information representation and Arithmetic Operation- Basic types of information representation -

floating point representation and fixed point representation of numbers, Operand, Opcode and
address - zero address, one address, two address and three address instructions - different
addressing modes.

4.Organization of Computer Memory system - Main and auxiliary memory -Need for memory
hierarchy in a computer -Significance of various memory devices characteristics: access time, access
rate, alterability, permanence of storage, cycle time - Associative Memory-Virtual memory
organization in a computer system - Virtual address and physical address organization. -Principle and
advantage of cache memory organization- Principle of memory interleaving in a computer

5.Input and output organization - Peripheral devices -Need for an Interface-Three modes of date
transfer - Synchronous and asynchronous data transfer -Hand shaking procedure of data transfer -
Programmed I/O method of data Transfer-Interrupted initiated I/O-DMA controlled transfer-Priority
interrupt, polling, and daisy chaining priority-Bus systems

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Digital principles and applications -- Malvino and leach
2. Digital Electronics -- Bignell - Thomson
3. Modern Digital Electronics -- R.P. Jain
4. Computer System Architecture -- Morris Mano.

S.No. Chapter/Unit title No. Wei Marks Wise Question wise CO’s Mapped
of ghtag Distribution of Distribution of
peri e Weightage Weightage
ods Alloc
ated
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Number systems, *
1. LogicGates , 30 CO1,CO3
14 3 11 1 2
Boolean Algebra

276
 and basic Combinational circuits

Flip-flops, Counters and *

2. 25 CO1,CO2
Registers 14 6 11 10 2 2

Information *
3 representation & CPU 15 CO1,CO2,CO3
14 3 11 1 2
Organization

4. Memory Organization 10 CO2,CO4

14 3 11 10 1 2

5. I/O Organization 10 CO3,CO4,CO5

14 3 8 10 1 1

TOTAL
70+
90 18 52 6 9
10*

Model Blue Print:

277
Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from any one of starred chapters.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 2.2
Unit test-2 From 2.3 to 5.14

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS & COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-403
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90Minutes

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and each question of remaining carries 3marks
1. a) K-map is not used to simplify Boolean expression (True/False) (CO1)

b) --------------------is the base of octal number system[ ] (CO1)

i)10 ii)2 iii) 8 iv) 16

c)logic gate gives---------------------number of outputs (CO2)

d) TTL stands for ------------------------------------------ (CO2)

2) Convert 1010102 into decimal number (CO1)

3) State and prove Demorgan’s theorems using truth table (CO2)

4) Implement OR gate using NAND gate (CO2)

5) Define positive and negative logic levels of FLIP FLOP (CO2)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks
Instructions: 1) Answer all questions
2)Each question carries 8 Marks
3)Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain parallel Adder in detail with neat diagram. (CO1)

278
 Or

b) Explain 4-Bit comparator in detail with neat diagram. (CO1)

7. a) Explain JK Flip Flop in detail with neat diagram. (CO2)

Or

b) Explain clocked SR Flip Flop in details with neat diagram (CO2)

8. a) Explain Programmable counter in detail with neat diagram. (CO2)

Or

b) Explain Asynchronous counter in detail with neat diagram. (CO2)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER – END EXAMINATION
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS& COMPUTER ORGANIZATION

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-403

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3HOURS
____________________________________________________________________________

PART-A 10X3=30Marks

Note: Answer all questions

1. Convert 10101000.00102 into decimal number system. (CO1)

2. What is Universal Gate and List them. (CO1)

3. Define positive and negative logic levels. (CO2)

4. Write any three differences between Asynchronous and Synchronous counters. (CO2)

5.What is Accumulator and program counter? (CO3)

6.Define opcode, operand and address. (CO3)

7.State the need for memory hierarchy in a computer. (CO4)
8.State the principle of locality of reference. (CO4)

9.List modes of date transfer. (CO5)

10.List the four bus systems. (CO5)

PART-B 5x8=40Marks

Note: Answer all questions

11.A. Draw and explain 4-bit parallel adder using full adders. (CO1)

279
 OR

11.B Draw and explain 4bit comparator. (CO1)

12.A. Explain Master JK Flip Flop in detail with neat diagram. (CO2)

OR

12.B Explain 16-bit Asynchronous counter in detail. (CO2)

13.A. Explain the stored program concept? (CO3)

OR

13.B List and explain various addressing modes. (CO3)

14.A. State the significance of various memory device characteristics: access time, access rate,
alterability , permanence of storage, cycle time. (CO4)
OR

14.B.Explain virtual address and physical address organization? (CO4)

15.A. Explain DMA controlled transfer in detail? (CO5)

OR

15.B Explain hand shaking procedure of data transfer in detail? (CO5)

PART-C

1X10=10Marks

17. Simplify the Boolean expression A’B + A(B’ + C) + B(B + C’) using Karnaugh map .
Boolean laws and drawthe logic circuit for reduced expression.

280
 Course No. of Total No. of
Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods

CCN-404 Java 5 75 20 80
Programming

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Basics of java and overloading 12 CO1,CO2

Concepts of inheritance, overriding,

2. 14 CO2
Interfaces and Packages

3. I/O Streams and Collections. 14 CO3

Exception handling and Multi-

4. 16 CO4
threaded programming.

5. Applets, AWT and Event Handling 19 CO4,CO5

Total Periods 75

Course Objectives i) To know applying object oriented programming paradigm in problem

solving on the platform of Sun Microsystems.
ii) Able to design multi-tasking application with the knowledge of multi-
threading.
iii) Familiarized to develop graphical user interface with event handling
mechanism.

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the fundamental concepts of JAVA and

CO1 CCN-404.1
Overloading.

Apply reusability features like inheritance and

CO2 CCN-404.2
polymorphism.
Course
Analyze modular design for real time applications by
Outcomes CO3 CCN-404.3
using packages concept in projects.

Apply multithreading concepts to implement

CO4 CCN-404.4
multitasking and multi programming applications.

Design effective dynamic user interface for any front end

CO5 CCN-404.5
applications using Applets and events.

281
 CO-PO/PSO Matrix

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-404.1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2

CCN-404.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1

CCN-404.3 2 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 3

CCN-404.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2

CCN-404.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3

Average 1.75 2 2.4 2.4 1.75 2.8 1.4 1.6 2.8 2.2

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Basics of java and overloading

1.1 Describe history and importance of Java in Internet programming.
1.2 Compare Java & C++.
1.3 Explain features of Java.
1.4 Define Byte codes of Java and JVM.
1.5 Give the steps to write and execute a Java program.
1.6 Explain primitive data types of java.
1.7 Describe conversion and casting features.
1.8 Explain one-dimensional and two–dimensional arrays and give example programs.
1.9 Describe how to create classes and objects.
1.10 Apply the Usage of new operator and methods.
1.11 Explain usage of constructors with example programs.
1.12 Apply method overloading and constructor overloading in applications.
1.13 Describe usage of ‘this’ pointer,
1.14 Explain Usage of static in variables, methods, and blocks with example.
1.15 Know about string classes.
1.16 Usage of command-line arguments.
1.17 Describe the importance of final keyword.

2.0 Concepts of inheritance, overriding, Interfaces and Packages

2.1 Explain inheritance with an example program.
2.2 Illustrate how to implement multilevel inheritance with an example program.
2.3 Explain method overriding and usage of super keyword.
2.4 Describe concept of Interfaces.
2.5 Differences between abstract classes and interface.
2.6 Explain implementation of interfaces with sample program.
2.7 Define a package.

282
2.8 Explain the concept of class path.
2.9 Describe concept of Access protection.
2.10 Illustrate the mechanism of importing packages.
2.11 Develop simple application to design packages with sample programs.
3.0 I/O Streams and Collections.
3.1 List different types of I/O streams.
3.2 Explain how to read and write data through console input and output streams and write a
sample program.
3.3 Explain how to use DataInputStream and DataOutputStream to access primitive data types
and write a sample program.
3.4 Explain various file access operations by using File Streams and write a sample program..
3.5 What is a collection framework and Hierarchy of collection framework and write a sample
program.
3.6 Describe ArrayList, LinkedList
3.6.1 Constructors
3.6.2 Methods
3.6.3 Comparisons between above two classes.
3.6.4 Sample programs
3.7 Explain Iterator and List Iterator interface methods and write a sample program.
3.8 Describe List interface and HashSet and Hash Table class
3.8.1Constructors
3.8.2Methods
3.8.3 Sample programs.
3.9 Describe Map interface and HashMap class for the following
3.8.1Constructors
3.8.2Methods
3.8.3 Sample programs
3.10 Explain EnumSet and EnumMap classes and write a sample program..

4.0 Exception handling and Multi-threaded programming.

4.1 Describe sources of errors.
4.2 Give advantages of Exception handling.
4.3 Explain types of exceptions Checked and Unchecked
4.4 Write sample programs to make use of Try, Catch, Finally, Throw, Throws
4.3 Explain concept of Multi-catch statements with example.
4.4 Explain how to write nested try in exception handling with example.
4.5 Describe built in exceptions.
4.6 Describe multithreading.
4.7 Explain Thread life cycle and states
4.5 Explain how to Creating single thread with example program.
4.6 Explain how to Creating multi thread with example program.
4.7 Illustrate thread priorities in multiple threads with an example.
4.8 Describe the concept of synchronization with example program.
4.9 Explain Inter thread communication with example program.
4.10 Explain dead lock.

5.0 Applets, AWT, Event Handling.

5.1 Describe the basics of Applets – Life cycle of an applet.
5.2 Describe steps for design and execute sample applet program
5.3 Explain Graphics class methods Update() Paint(),Drawing Lines, Rectangle, circles, polygons
5.4 Describe the process of Working with Color Font classes.

283
5.5 Describe AWT classes
5.6 Explain how to design Frame window with example.
5.7 Describe Types of Events
5.8 List and explain sources of events.
5.9 List and explain different event classes.
5.10 List and explain event listener interfaces
5.11 Demonstrate event handling mechanism.
5.12 Demonstrate handling mouse events with sample program.
5.13 Demonstrate handling keyboard events with sample program.
5.14 Explain how to use the following AWT controls in applet programming.

a. Labels.
b. Buttons.
c. Text Fields
d. Checkboxes.
e. Lists.
f. Choice
g. Scrollbars.
COURSE CONTENTS

1. Basics of java and overloading: Importance of Java to Internet – Byte codes.Features of Java:
OOPS concepts –Data types –type conversions – casting – Arrays. Usage of classes – objects – new –
methods – constructors – method overloading, string classes – command line arguments-static
members-this pointer

2. Concepts Inheritance Overriding Interfaces and Package:-Usages of Inheritance: inheritance

super class, sub classes – Multi level inheritance – super keyword -overriding –Abstract classes-
Interfaces-Packages.

3. Concepts of I/O Streams and Collections: I/O streams-Accessing data through console input and
output-DataInput Stream- Data Input Stream –Collection Frame work-Array List-Linked List-Iterator
and List Interface-Hash table-Hash Map-Enum Set-Enum Map

4. Exception Handling and Multithreading: – Exception handling: Source of errors – error handling –
Exception handling-Multi catch statements- Define thread – life cycle of thread - Multi threading –
Synchronization- Inter thread communication – Dead locks – Thread properties.

5. Applets, AWT and Event Handling: Basics of Applets – life cycle of an applet-Working with
Graphics-color-fonts-AWT classes-Event classes-Listener interfaces-keyboard and Mouse events-
AWT controls-Buttons-Text Fields-Check Box-List

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. The complete reference Java -- Pattrick Naughten, Herbert Schildt TMH Company
Limited, New Delhi.
2. Programming in JAVA -- P. Radhakrishna, University Press
3. Programming in Java -- Muthu - Thomson
4. Java Foundations of Programming – NIIT, PHI
5. Programming with Java -- Balagurusamy, TMH
MODEL BLUE PRINT

284
 No.
Weight
of Marks Wise Question wise
age CO’s
S.No. Chapter/Unit title per Distribution of Distribution of
Allocat Mapped
iod Weightage Weightage
ed
s

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Features and Basics

1 14 14 3 11 1 2 CO1
of java

Concepts of
overloading,
2 13 14 14 * 3 * CO2
inheritance,
overriding

Concepts of I/O
3 Streams, Interfaces 13 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO3
and Packages

Exception handling
and Multi threaded
4 programming. 16 14 6 8 * 2 1 * C04

Applets, AWT and

5 19 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO5
Event Handling

Total 75 70+10* 15 39 16 10* 3 10 2 1

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.5
Unit test-2 From 3.6 to 5.14

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
JAVA PROGRAMMING
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-404
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

285
 2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.

1. a) is ‘this’ keyword is refers currently invoked object proprieties (True/False) (CO1)

b) --------------------is fully abstract class. (CO2)

c) Which of the following is not a java access specifier. [ ] (CO2)

I) public II) default III) private IV) super

d) Which one of the following are java translator [ ] (CO1)

I) interpreter II) compiler III) assembler IV) I &II

2. What is the use of constructor and list different types of constructors? (CO1)

3. Write the differences between abstract class and interface. (CO2)

4.List different types of I/O streams. (CO3)

5. What is the use of super keyword? (CO3)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain method over loading with an example program. (CO1)

Or

b) Explain how to use static members in java with example. (CO1)

7. a) Explain multilevel inheritance with example program. (CO2)

Or
b) How java implements multiple inheritance with interface? Explain with example. (CO2)
8. a) Explain how to create and import package. (CO3)
Or
b) Describe how to access primitive data types through keyboard with an example. (CO3)

Board Diploma Examination

Model Question paper-End Exam

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

Java Programming

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-404

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS

286
 Part-A

Answer All Questions each carries three marks 10X3=30

1. Define Byte code and JVM CO1

2. State the purpose of final keyword. CO1
3. Define overriding and give the syntax. CO2
4. What is the use of ‘super’ keyword? CO2
5. List different file access operations in java. CO3
6. Write any three methods in DataInputStream and DataOutputStream. CO3
7. Write the advantages of exceptions. CO4
8. List different methods in thread life cycle. CO4
9. What is an event? List different event Listeners. CO5
10. Write different constructors in TextField. CO5

Part-B

Answer All Questions carries eight marks 5X8=40

11.(a ) Explain the features of Java programming CO1

(or)

(b) What is constructor? Describe usage of constructor with example. CO1

12. (a) Explain overloading with example program. CO2

(or)

(b) Explain how to implements multi-level inheritance with example. CO2

13. (a) Explain how to read and write primitive data using streams with an example. CO3

(or)

(b) Explain how to create and import packages in java. CO3

14. (a) Write a java program to apply multi catch statements. CO4

(or)

(b) Explain how to create multiple threads with an example. CO4

15. (a) Explain about keyboard events with sample program. CO5

287
 (or)

(b) Explain how to use the following List AWT control in applet programming . CO5

Part-C

Answer the following Question

16. Can it be possible to replace Java Projects by JavaScript and justify your answer?

(CO5)

288
 No. of
Course Total No. of
Course Title Periods/ Marks for FA Marks for SA
code periods
Weeks

Cryptography and
CCN-405 4 60 20 80
Network Security

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction to Network Security 10 CO1,CO2

ClassicalEncryption
2. 14 CO2
Techniques

3. Cryptographic integritytechniques. 12 CO3

4. Systemsecurity 12 CO4

Firewalls and
5. 12 CO4,CO5
EthicalIssues

Total Periods 60

Course Objectives i) To study the concepts of System security and various Encryption
Techniques.

ii) Able to design Public key and Private key with the knowledge of
message authentication

iii) to Familiarize with Firewalls and security laws with Internet

Governance.

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the concepts of Cryptography and Network

CO1 CCN-405.1
Security

CO2 CCN-405.2 Apply encryption algorithms and ciphers.

Course Analyze cryptographic integrity techniques using public,
CO3 CCN-405.3
Outcomes private keys and digital signatures.

Analyze the ways of Securing system from intrusions,

CO4 CCN-405.4
viruses, malwares and worms.

289
 Describe the Configuration of firewalls to reduce the
CO5 CCN-405.5
effect of cyber crimes and ethical hacking.

CO-PO/PSO Matrix
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-405.1 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 1

CCN-405.2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 1

CCN-405.3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 1

CCN-405.4 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 2

CCN-405.5 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2

Average 2 2.8 3 2.6 2.6 2.4 3 1.4 2.6 1.4

3=stronglymapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. IntroductiontoNetworksecurity

1.1. Definesecurityand networksecurity.

1.2. Describe OSIsecurityarchitecture.
1.3. Discuss aboutdifferentsecuritygoals.
1.4. Definecryptography.
1.5. Discuss aboutcrypto system.
1.6. Discussaboutauthentication,Confidentiality,integrityw.r.tdata.
1.7. Differentiatepassiveand activesecuritythreats.
1.8. List and explaincategoriesofpassiveandactivesecurityattacks.
1.9. List and explaincategoriesof securityservices.
1.10. List and explain categoriesof securitymechanisms.
1.11. Explain the Model fornetworksecurityand with block diagram.

2. Classical Encryption Techniques

2.1. Define the term encryption

2.2. Define the term Decryption
2.3.Listtheessential ingredientsof a symmetric cipher.

290
 2.4. Describetwobasicfunctions used inencryptionalgorithms.
2.5. Listkeys requiredfor twopeopletocommunicateviaacipher.
2.6. Describethegeneralapproaches toattackacipher.
2.7. Describe theCaesar cipher.
2.8. Discussthemono-alphabeticcipher.
2.9. DescribePlayfair cipher.andHill ciphers.
2.10. DiscussOne-Time-Pad.
2.11. Differentiatemono andpoly-alphabeticciphers.
2.12. Discuss the problems withtheone-time pad.
2.13. Explain atranspositioncipher.
2.14. Explain steganography.
2.15. Illustrate thecipherswith examples.

3. Cryptographicintegritytechniques
3.1 Listtheprincipal elementsofapublic-keycryptosystem.
3.2 Listtherolesofthepublicand private keys.
3.3 Discuss about messageauthentication.
3.4 List andexplainmessageauthenticationrequirements.
3.5 Explain messageauthenticationfunctions.
3.6 Discussabout themessageauthentication code.
3.7. Definedigitalsignature.
3.8. Listtheproperties ofa digitalsignature.
3.9. Listthedigitalsignaturerequirements.
3.10. give the step by step procedure of getting digital signature approval.
3.11.Differentiatebetweenhashfunction andcryptographyHashfunction.
3.12. Listtheapplications of cryptographichashfunctions.

4.Systemsecurity

4..1Discussabout Intruders
4.1.1. Explain intrusiondetection
4.1.2. Explain passwordmanagement
4.2. Discuss the following threats
4.2.1 Describe malicious softwares
4.2.2. Describe Backdoor
4.2.3. Describe Logic Bomb
4.2.4. Explain Trojan Horses
4.2.5. Define MobileCode
4.2.6. Describe Multiple-ThreatMalware
4.3. Define terms virus andwarm.
4.4. Discuss about Virus Nature and its Classification
4.4.1. Define Macro Viruses and VirusKits,
4.4.2. Define the term E-MailViruses
4.5.Discuss about Virus Counter measures:
4.5.1 Define Antivirus Approaches
4.5.2. Describe AdvancedAntivirusTechniques
4.6. Discuss about Morries worm,
4.6.1 Define worm attacks
4.7.Explain worm technologies
4.8.Define and explain mobile phoneworms
4.9. Describehowa worm propagates.

291
 4.10. Discuss about worm countermeasures.
5. Firewalls and Ethical Issues
5.1 DefineFirewall.
5.2 Listtypesoffirewalls.
5.3 Discussaboutfirewallcharacteristics
5.4 Analyzetheimportanceoffirewall
5.5 Discuss about cybercrime and computercrime,
5.6 Discussthe
classificationofcomputercrimebasedontherolethattheco
mputerplaysinthecriminalactivity
5.6.1 Study of IT Act . Study of Cyber Laws..
5.7 Explaindigitalrightsmanagement
5.8 Listthebasic conditions thatmustbefulfilledto claim a copyright.
5.9
Describetheprincipalcategoriesofusersofdigitalrightsmanagementsystems.

COURSECONTENTS

1. Introduction to Network security: Security, Need ofNetwork

security,securitygoals,cryptography,Attacks,MechanismsandServices,T
heOSISecurityArchitecture:SecurityServices,AvailabilityServices,Securit
yMechanismsandSecurity Attacks,Amodel forNetworkSecurity.
2. ClassicalEncryptionTechniques:SymmetricCipherModel,SubstitutionTe
chniques : Caesar Cipher, Monoalphabetic Cipher, Playfair Cipher, Hill
Cipher,Monoalphabeticcipher,One-
TimePad,TranspositionTechniques,Steganography.
3. Cryptographic integritytechniques :Principles of Public Key
Cryptosystems,AuthenticationRequirements,AuthenticationFunctions,
MessageAuthenticationCodes,DiscussledgeonHashFunctionsand
DigitalSignatures.
4. System security: Intruders, Intrusion Detection, Password
Management, Backdoor,Logic Bomb, Trojan Horses, Mobile Code, and
Multiple-Threat Malware.Viruses:The Nature ofViruses, Viruses
Classification, Virus Kits, Macro Viruses, E-
MailViruses.VirusCountermeasures:AntivirusApproaches,AdvancedAnt
ivirusTechniques. Worms: Difference between virus and worm.The
Morris Worm,
WormPropagationModel,RecentWormAttacks,StateofWormTechnolog
y,MobilePhoneWorms,WormCountermeasures,back-
upanddatarecovery.
5. Firewalls andEthical Issues :The Need for Firewalls, Firewall
Characteristics,Types of Firewalls and their advantages. Legal and
Ethical issues: Cybercrime andComputer Crime, Study of IT Act. Study
of Cyber LawsEthical IssuesRelatedtoComputersand
InformationSystems

292
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practices,-
William Stallings - PearsonEducation.
2. CryptographyandNetworkSecurity–AtulKahate:McGrawHill
3. Network Security Essentials (Applications and Standards)-
William Stallings, PearsonEducation.
4. Cryptographyand NetworkSecurity:2ndEdition-Behrouza.Forouzan.
5. computernetworkinga top-downapproach-JamesF.
kurose&KeithW.Ross,PearsonEducation.
ModelBlue Print:

S.No. Chapter/Unit title No.of Weightage Marks Wise Question wise CO’s
perio Allocated Distribution of Distribution of Mappe
ds Weightage Weightage d

R U A An R U A A
p p n

1 Introduction to
10 11 3 8 1 1 CO1
Network Security

2 ClassicalE
ncryption 14 17 6 3 8 * 2 1 1 * CO2
Techniques

3 Cryptographic 1
12 14 3 1 2 CO3
integritytechniques 1

4 System security 12 14 6 8 * 2 1 * C04

5 Firewall and 1
12 14 3 * 1 2 * CO5
EthicalIssues 1

Total 1 3 10
60 70+10* 16 5 7 3 1
5 9 *

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.5
Unit test-2 From 3.6 to 5.14

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER

293
 CRIPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-405
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.

1. a) Stenography follows the concept of security through obscurity(YES/NO) (CO1)

b) --------------------is the method of protecting information through use of codes. (CO2)

c) Which of the following is a cipher technique? [ ] (CO2)

I) Caesar II) Public III) Private IV) Backdoor

d) Which security mechanism is used for data security [ ] (CO1)

I) data integrity II0) digital signature III) authentication exchange IV)all

2. Define the terms encryption & decryption? (CO1)

3. explain transposition cipher. (CO2)

4. List different types of keys required to communicate via cipher between two people. (CO3)

5.list message authentication (CO3)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2)Each question carries 8 Marks
3)Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain OSI Security architecture. . (CO1)

Or

b) Explain about Authentication, confidentiality Integrity w.r.t data? (CO1)

7. a) Describe two basic functions used in encryption algorithms.

(CO2)
Or
b) Explain Caesar cipher and Monoalphabetic cipher with an exaple. (CO2)
8. a) Explain about the Message authentication requirements and its functions. (CO3)
Or
b) Describe Digital Signature and list its properties. (CO3)

Board Diploma Examination

294
 Model Question paper-End Exam
DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
Cryptography and Network Security
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-405
MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS

Part-A

Answer All Questions each carries three marks 10X3=30

11. Define Network Security and Security. CO1

12. List the essential ingredients of a symmetric cipher. CO2
13. Define transposition cipher. CO2
14. List any 3 problems of one-time pad? CO2
15. What are the role of Private key and public key CO3
16. What are the requirements of Digital Signature. CO3
17. Define virus and worm. CO4
18. What are the anti-virus approaches. CO4
19. List the types of Firewalls CO5
20. Distinguish between Cyber Crime and Computer Crime CO5

Part-B

Answer All Questions carries eight marks 5X8=40

11.(a ) Describe the OSI Security Architecture CO1

(or)

(b) List and Explain categories of Security mechanisms. CO1

12. (a) Explain Playfair and Hill cipher techniques with example CO2

(or)

(b) Describe two basic functions used in Encryption Algorithm. CO2

13. (a) Explain Message Authentication Functions CO3

295
 (or)

(b) . What is Digital Signature and Explain its Properties CO3

14. (a) Explain the terms Backdoor, Logic Bomb, Mobile Threat Malware CO4

(or)

(b) Explain in detail of Cyber law. CO4

15.(a)Explain Digital Rights Management CO5

(or)

(b)Explain Firewall characteristics CO5

Part-C

Answer the following Question 10

16. A Message of text(ex-:Hello World) passed to a student to apply a technique of RSA Public key
Encryption and need to find Public key and Private key to Decrypt the Message in a Network. (C03)

Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

Course Title
code Periods/Weeks periods FA SA

296
CCN- 406 Web Technologies 6 90 40 60
Lab

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. 30
Exercises on HTML, CSS&XML CO1
2. Exercises on Java Script, AJAX, jQuery 30
CO2
and Angular JS
3. Exercises on PHP web applications and 30
CO3,CO4
Database Applications
Total Periods 90

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

CO1 CCN-406.1 Design interactive web page(s) using HTML, CSS and
JavaScript.
CO2 CCN-406.2 Demonstrate the Usage of AJAX, jQuery and Angular JS
Course CO3 CCN-406.3 Design Dynamic web site using server side PHP
Outcomes Programming
CO4 CCN-406.4 Design a simple web application with database
connectivity using PHP.
CO5 CCN-406.5 Develop real world application with different web
designing tools.
i)Understand the principles of creating an effective web page

ii) To Know the working with HTML, CSS

iii) acquire knowledge and skills for creation of web site considering
Course Objectives both client and server side

iv) familiarize the various Technologies like Java Script AJAX, JQuery,
PHP.

V) understand Database connectivity Using PHP

297
 CO-PO/PSO Matrix

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-406.1 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 2

CCN-406.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 3

CCN-406.3 2 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 3

CCN-406.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3

CCN-406.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3

Average 1.75 2.2 3 2.6 1.5 2.8 1.4 2.4 3 2.8

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Exercises on basic HTML tags.

2. Design a HTML page using suitable table tags and attributes.
3. Design a HTML page with a form containing various controls.
4. Design a HTML page on iframes.
5. Exercises on CSS.
6. Exercises on designing a XML document.
7. Exercises on JavaScript functions.
8. Exercises on JavaScript arrays.
9. Write a JavaScript program using Ajax, to send the request to server and receive the
response from server with example program.
10. Write a program on mouse events using JQuery.
11. Design a webpage to apply the Effects of JQuery to HTML elements.
12. Exercises on changing background color using css() function in JQuery.
13. Write a JavaScript program using DatePicker JQuery UI plugin-(download from
https://jqueryui.com/datepicker/)
14. Write a Java Script program using Responsive Slides Jquery plugin-(download from
responsiveslides.com)
15. Exercises on Angular JS Directives.
16. Install the following on local machine:
 Apache Web server
 MySQL
 PHP and configure it to work with Apache Web server and MySQL.
17. Exercises on PHP arrays.
18. Design a form and access the elements of form using PHP.
19. Write PHP program to perform various operations on a database table using functions.
20. Write a PHP program to set a cookie.

Mini Project: Student has to develop a Mini project applying the skills acquired from the learning
outcomes of this course.

298
 OBJECTIVES AND KEY COMPETENCIES:

Exp. Name of the

Objectives
No. experiment Key Competencies

Exercises on basic Create the HTML page 1) Use any editor for writing HTML
HTML tags with a title, heading, 2) Add the tags with relevant content
formatting and list tags 3) Save the file
1 in the body. 4) Open the file in a browser
5) Test the results
Design a HTML page using Create the HTML page 1) Identify the tags for creating the table
suitable table tags and with a table and that table 2) Add header, body and footer to the
attributes should have a header, table.
3) Put some content in each section of
body and footer.
table
2 4) Save the file
5) Open the file in a browser
6) Test the results
Design a HTML page Create the HTML page with
1) Identify the tags to add a form and
with a form containing a form and add some controls
various controls controls like textbox, label 2) Add the form and put some controls in it.
3 to the form. 3) Save the file
4) Open the file in a browser
5) Test the results
Design a HTML page Create the HTML page 1) Identify the tags for creating multiple
on frames with multiple frames so frames
that content in each 2) Add some content to the frames and
use different formats, colors for each
frame will have different
frame.
4 format and colors. 3) Save the file
4) Open the file in a browser
5) Test the results
Create a style sheet which 1)Identify the editor required for creating
Design a style sheet to
contains selectors to set CSS
set the background 2)Add selectors to set the background
the background color,
color, position and color, position and dimensions of an
position and dimensions
dimensions of a HTML element.
of a HTML element. 3)Save the CSS file
element
5 4)Link the CSS file to a valid HTML page.
5)Save the HTML page
6)Open the HTML page in a browser
7)Test the results
Exercises on designing a XML Create a XML Document on 1) Identify the editor required for creating
document Student data XML
2) Add required elements for student
6 data
3) Save the XML file as .xml extension
4) Open the XML document in browser
5)Test the results

299
Exp. Name of the
Objectives
No. experiment Key Competencies

Exercises on JavaScript Write a JavaScript program 1) Create a HTML file

functions using function which 2) Write a JavaScript function which adds two
performs sum of two numbers.
numbers and function 3) Add HTML button tag and assign a
should call when button is function to on click attribute.
7 clicked. 4) Save the HTML file.
5) Open the HTML page in a browser
6) Test the results Resolve the errors if any
through debugging
Exercises on JavaScript arrays Write JavaScript code to 1) Create a HTML file
implement sorting like 2) Add elements to read array and to sort.
reading an array of ‗n‘ 3) Write the logic for sorting using iterative
numbers and sorting them and conditional statements.
in ascending order. 4) Save the HTML file.
8 5) Open the HTML page in a browser
6) Test the results
Resolve the errors if any through
debugging
Write a JavaScript program Write JavaScript program 1) Create a HTML file
using Ajax, to send the which sends a request to 2) Create a function which sends a request to
request to server and receive server using ajax, receives “https://www.w3schools.com/xml/ajax_info
the response from server information and display it. .txt” and receive the information and display
with example program in the body.
3) Create a button.
4) Call JavaScript function when button click.
9 5) Save the HTML file.
6) Open the HTML page in a browser
7) Test the results. Resolve the errors if
any through debugging
8) Observe that when button click that is
displayed without reloading the page.
Write a program on mouse Write a JavaScript 1) Create a HTML file
events using JQuery program using JQuery 2) Add a div tag with some content and border.
3) Write a JQuery functions which displays
which displays different
different messages when mouse enters in
messages for mouse div tag, mouse leaves div tag and clicks on
events like mouse enter, div tag.
mouse leave, click, 4) Save the HTML file.
10 5) Open the HTML page in a browser
dblclick
6) Test the results by moving moues over the
div tag.
7) Resolve the errors if any through
debugging

300
Exp. Name of the
Objectives
No. experiment Key Competencies

Design a webpage to apply Write a JavaScript 1) Create a HTML file

the Effects of JQuery program using JQuery 2) Add a div tag with some content and border.
3) Add some buttons
which performs effects
4) Write a JQuery functions which performs
like hide, show, some effect when click on respective button.
slideupfadeIn,fadeout,slid 5) Save the HTML file.
11 6) Open the HTML page in a browser
eDown, SlideUp
7) Test the results by click on the button.
Resolve the errors if any through
debugging
Exercises on changing Write a JavaScript 1) Create a HTML file
background color using CSS program using JQuery 2) Add a div tag with some content
properties in JQuery 3) Add some buttons
which changes css
4) Write a JQuery functions which changes CSS
properties like color, properties like color, border when click on
background-color, border respective button.
12 5) Save the HTML file.
etc.
6) Open the HTML page in a browser
7) Test the results by click on the button.
Resolve the errors if any through
debugging
Write a JavaScript program Write a JavaScript 1) Create a HTML file
using Date Picker JQuery UI program using JQuery 2) Add JQuery script tag.
plugin(download from 3) Add JQueryUI, which can be downloaded
which displays datepicker. from https://jqueryui.com
https://jqueryui.com/datepic
4) Add JQuery UI css file
ker/)
5) Add a textbox
6) Write JQuery code for display date picker
13 7) Save the HTML file.
8) Open the HTML page in a browser
9) Test the results by click on the button.
Resolve the errors if any through
debugging
Write a JavaScript program Write a JavaScript 1) Create a HTML file
using Responsive program using JQuery 2) Add JQuery script tag.
3) Add slider plugin, which can be downloaded
SlidesJquery which displays date from http://responsiveslides.com
plugin(download from picker. 4) Add plugins file
responsiveslides.com) 5) Add images
6) Write JQuery code for display slideshow of
14 images
7) Save the HTML file.
8) Open the HTML page in a browser
9) Test the results by click on the button.
Resolve the errors if any through
debugging

301
Exp. Name of the
Objectives
No. experiment Key Competencies

Exercises On Angular JS Exercise On Angular JS 1) Create a HTML file

Directives Directives 2) Add
https://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/angula
rjs/1.3.14/angular.min.js file in Script tag of
src.
15 3) Save the HTML file.
4) Open the HTML page in a browser
5) Test the results by click on the button.
Resolve the errors if any through debugging
Install the following on local Install a web server which 1) Identify version compatible to system
machine: supports PHP 2) Download the software(XAMP)
 Apache Web server 3) Install the server software(XAMP)
 MySQL 4) Configure the server
5) Write simple PHP program
16  PHP and configure it to
6) Test the result
work with Apache Web
server and MySQL.
Exercise on PHP arrays Write PHP program to
1) Create a PHP file.
implement searching like 2) Add elements to read array and to find
reading an array of ‗' n' the smallest number.
numbers and finding 3) Write the logic for sorting using iterative
17 smallest among them. and conditional statements.
4) Save and Run the page.
Test the result
Design a form and access the Write a php program 1) Create a HTML file
elements of form using PHP which displays sum of two 2) Add form with two textboxes for enter
numbers submitted by two numbers
3) Write a PHP program, which adds two
the form
numbers submitted by form and
display the sum.
18
4) Place the files in server
5) Open the HTML file in browser
6) Test the results
Write PHP code to Write PHP code to 1) Understand the process of connecting to
perform various perform retrieval, database and execute commands.
operations on a insertion, modification 2) Create a PHP file.
3) Add required elements to the page.
database table using and deletion of data in a
4) Write the logic to retrieve, insert, update
19 functions. database table using and delete data in the table using
functions functions.
5) Save and Run the page.
6) Test the result
Write a PHP program to Write PHP code to create a 1) Understand the significance of cookies.
set a cookie. cookie and put some 2) Create a PHP file.
information in it. 3) Write the logic to create and set a
20
cookie
4) Save and Run the page.
5) Test the result.

302
Course Course Title No. of Total No. Marks for Marks
code Periods/Weeks of periods FA for SA

CCN-407 Java Programming Lab 6 90 40 60

with mini-Project

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Basics of java and overloading 12 CO1

2. Concepts of inheritance, overriding, 10 CO2

Interfaces and Packages

3. I/O Streams and Collections. 14 CO3

4. Exception handling and Multi 14 CO4

threaded programming.

5. Applets, AWT and Event Handling 10 CO5

Total Periods 60

i)Design object oriented programming paradigm

ii)Able to develop multi tasking application with the knowledge of multi
Course Objectives threading.
iii) Familiarized to develop graphical user interface with event handling
mechanism.

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Perform object oriented programming concepts in problem
CO1 CCN-407.1
solving, syntax and semantics of object oriented paradigm.
Design applications with reusability features like inheritance and
CO2 CCN-407.2
polymorphism.
Course Develop modular programs for real time applications by using
CO3 CCN-407.3
Outcomes streams and collections.
CO4 CCN-407.4 Develop programs using threads and multithreading concepts
Design effective dynamic user interface for any front end
CO5 CCN-407.5 applications using Applets and events.

303
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-407.1 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 3

CCN-407.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3

CCN-407.3 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 3

CCN-407.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3

CCN-407.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3

Average 1.6 2 3 2.4 1.75 2.8 1.6 2 3 3

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes
1. Exercise programs using Java built-in data types.
2. Exercise programs on conditional statements and loop statements.
3. Exercise programs on I/O Streams
i) Reading data through Keyboard
ii) Reading and writing Primitive data types using DataInputStream and
DataOutputStream.
iii) Perform Reading and Writing operations on files using File Streams.
4. Exercise programs on Strings.
5. Exercise program to create class and objects and adding methods.
6. Exercise programs using constructors and construction over loading.
7. Exercise programs on command line arguments.
i) Input as command line arguments and perform operation on that data.
ii) Input as command line arguments and update manipulated data in Files.
8. Exercise programs using concept of overloading methods.
9. Exercise programs on inheritance.
10. Write a program using the concept of method overriding.
11. Exercise on packages.
i) Creation of packages
ii) Design module to importing packages from other packages.
12. Exercise programs on interfaces.

304
 13. Exercise programs on Collections.
i) Write a java program to search a student mark percentage based on pin number
using Array list.
ii) Write a java program to create linked list to perform delete, insert, and update data
in linked list with any application.
iii) Write a java program to search an element from hash table.
iv) Write a java program to sorting employee details using hash map.

14. Exercise on exception handling.

i) Programs on try, catch and finally.
ii) Programs on multiple catch statements
iii) Programs on nested try statements.

15. Exercise on multithreading

i) Programs on creation of single and multiple threads.
ii) Programs on adding priorities to multiple threads.
iii) Programs on Inter thread communication.
16. Exercise on applets
i) Programs on Graphics and colors.
ii) Simple animations using threads and graphics.
17. Exercise on AWT controls
i) Program to handle mouse events.
ii) Program to handle keyboard events.
iii) Programs to illustrate Text Fields and Button control.
iv) Programs to illustrate Check Box and List control.
v) Write an application program to illustrate multiple controls.

Mini Project: Student has to develop a Mini project applying the skills acquired from the learning
outcomes of this course by integrating Web technologies, DBMs and Python.

305
KEY COMPETENCIES

Exp. Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

No. experiment
1 Exercise programs (a) Write programs using the (a) Identify the data types.
using Java built-in data primitive data types. (b) Use println() method.
types. (b) Display the data. (c) Compile the program.
(d) Rectify the errors.
(e) Observe the output.
2 Exercise programs on (a) Write program using if (a) Know the usage of IF and switch
conditional statements statement and switch statements.
and loop statements. (b) Write program using while, (b) Compile the program and rectify the
do and for constructs. errors.
(c) Observe the output.
3 Exercise programs on (a) Write a program to give (a) Use different data types.
I/O Streams values to variables (b) Use readLine() method.
interactively through the (c) Use println() method.
keyboard. (d) Use DataInputStream and
(b) Write program to read and DataOutputStream.
write primitive data types. (e)use File Streams
(c) Write programs to handle Observe the output.
Files.
4 Exercise programs on (a) Write a programs to (a) Create String objects
Strings. manipulate Strings (b) Use string class methods
(b) Write a programs to (c) Observe the output.
arrange array of
strings in ascending
order
5 Exercise program to (a) Write a program to create (a) Create class.
create class and objects a class and create objects. (b) Declare methods.
and adding methods. (b) Write a program to create (c) Create objects.
class adding methods and (d) Write main method.
access class members. (e) Access class members.
6 Exercise programs (a) Write a program using (a) Declare and define constructor.
using constructors and default constructor. (b) Call default constructor.
construction over (b) Write a program using (c) Call parameterized constructor.
loading. parameterized constructor. (d) observe constructor overloading.

7 Exercise programs on (a)Write a program to (a) Use command line arguments.

command line illustrate usage of command (b) Run the program.
arguments. line arguments. (c) Understand usage of Files.
(c) Observe the output.
(b)Write a program to read
data as command line
arguments and update it into
Files.

8 Exercise programs (a) Write a program to (a) Observe method overloading.

using concept of illustrate method overloading. (b) Overload constructor methods.
overloading methods. (b) Write a program to

306
 illustrate method overloading
using constructors.

9 Exercise on (a)Write a program to (a) Create base class.

inheritance. illustrate single inheritance. (b) Write base class constructor.
(b)Write a program to (c) Create derived class.
illustrate multiple inheritance. (d) Use extends keyword.
(e) Use super keyword.
(f) Write derived class constructor.
10 Write a program using Write a program using the (a) Use method overriding.
the concept of method concept of method overriding. (b) Use this keyword.
overriding. (c) use super keyword
11 Exercise on importing Write a program to create and (a) Create package.
packages. importing package. (b) Use of access specifiers.
(b) Use package.
(c) Use import keyword.

12 Exercise on interfaces. Write a program to illustrate (a) Define interface.

multiple inheritance using (b) Use extends keyword.
interfaces. (c) Use implements keyword.
(d) Access interface variables.
13 Exercise programs on (a) Write a java program to (a) Define collection classes
Collections. search a student mark (b) use ArrayList, LinkedList
percentage based on pin (c) use Hash Map, Hash Table
number using Array list. (d) apply List and Iterator Interface
(b)Write a java program to (e) use Enum Set, and Enum Map
create linked list to perform
delete, insert, and update
data in linked list with any
application.
(c)Write a java program to
search an element from hash
table.
(d)Write a java program to
sorting employee details using
hash map.
14 Exercise on exception (a) Write a program to (a) Use try – catch.
handling illustrate exception handling. (b) Use multiple catch blocks.
(b) Write a program to (c) Use finally statement.
illustrate exception handling (d) use Nested try
using multiple catch
statements.
(c) Write a program to
illustrate exception handling
using nested try.
15 Exercise on (a) Write a program to create (a) Use extends, new.
multithreading single a thread by extending (b) Use run() and start() methods.
the thread class. (c) Observe thread execution.
(b) Write a program to create (d) Use implements runnable interface.
a single thread by (e) Use setPriority() and getPriority()
implementing the runnable methods.

307
 interface. (f) use wait(),notify() methods
(c) Write a program to create
multiple threads.
(d) Write a program to
illustrate thread priorities.
(e) Write a program to
illustrate inter thread
communication.

16 Exercise on applets. Write a program to create (a) Use <applet>…</applet> tag.

simple applet to display (b) Add applet to html file.
different shapes with colors. (c) Run the applet.
Write an applet program to (d) use graphics methods
design simple animation. (e) use threads and graphics.
17 Exercise on AWT (a) Write an applet (a) Use keyboard event methods
controls program to handle key (b) Use mouse event methods
events. (c) Use Text Field class methods
(b) Write an applet (d) Use button class methods
program to handle (e) Use Check box and List class
mouse events. methods
(c) Write an applet
program to illustrate
Text Field and button
control.
(d) Write an applet
program to illustrate
Check box and List
control.
(e) Write an applet
program to illustrate
multiple controls.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Identify different works to be carried out in the Project

2. Collect data relevant to the project work
3. Carryout need surveyand identify the problem(project)
4. Select the most efficient software life cycle from the available choices based on preliminary
investigation
5. Estimate the cost of project, technological need, computer skills, materials and other
equipment
6. Prepare the plan and schedule of starting time and sequence of operations to be carried out
at various stages of the project work in detail
7. Prepare SRS document
8. Design the required elements of the project work as per standard models such as UML
9. Develop the working software modules required for the project work
10. Prepare critical activities at various stages of the project work
11. Test ,Debug, verify and validate the project
12. Record the results

308
13. Preparation of project report (and user manual if necessary) to enable the client to maintain
the project

Key competencies (Guide lines)

THE PROJECT CAN BE CHOSEN FROM THE FOLLOWING DOMAINS:

1. SOFTWARE PROJECTS
a. Web site designing
b. Banking
c. Income tax calculation package
d. Examinations cell.
e. Student database management
f. Library management
g. Stores Management
h. Staff data management
i. Payrolls
j. Inventory Control
k. Hostel management
l. Tourism package
m. Institution management software
n. Anti-Virus software development.
o. Folder-locking.
p. Terminate stay resident systems.

2. HARDWARE and NETWORKING PROJECTS

a. QLAN establishing
b. Using interfacing devices
c. Voice synthesizer
d. Voice recognizer
e. Printer sharer
f. ADD ON cards or any relevant

3. SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE PROJECTS

a. Using interfaces, microcontrollers. Microprocessors and PCs
b. Inter-cum
c. Assembling computer along with peripherals.
d. Traffic light controller
e. Stepper motor related
f. Lift controllers
g. Level controllers
h. Temperature controllers

4. To develop above projects and deploy in cloud platform

5. To develop IOT based applications

6. To maintain the software products based on the ever changing needs of and quality
measures required by the clients

309
 Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for
Code Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
Common Communication
408 Skills 3 45 40 60

No of Periods COs Mapped

S. No. Unit Title

1 Listening Skills 6 CO1

2 Introducing Oneself 3 CO1, CO2, CO3
3 Short Presentation (JAM) 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
4 Group Discussion 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
5 Preparing Resume with Cover Letter 3 CO3
6 Interview Skills 9 CO1, CO2, CO3
7 Presentation Skills 9 CO1, CO2
8 Work place Etiquette 3 CO1, CO2
Total Periods 45

To comprehend the features of communication needed for professional

success and display the use of these competently

Course Objectives To present ideas, opinions in group discussions and presentations on

topics of general and technical interest

To prepare for job selection processes

CO No. Course Outcomes

Interacts in academic and social situations by comprehending what is listened to when

CO1
others speak.
Demonstrates effective English communication skills while presenting ideas, opinions
CO2
in group discussions and presentations on topics of general and technical interest
Exhibits workplace etiquette relevant in classroom situations for easy adaptation in
CO3
professional setting in the future

310
CO-PO Matrix

Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 45

Common-408 Number of Course Outcomes: 3

POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks

with CO No. Column 1 Mapping

Number Percentage % (1,2,3)

PO1 Not directly applicable for Communication Skills Course however

interactive activities that use content from science and technology
PO2 relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited
PO3 for communication in the Course.

PO4

PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3

CO3

PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 60% 16 -59%: Level 2

CO3

PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 15%

Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7

CO 1   

CO 2   

CO3   

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters of
communication in the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource (Vocabulary)
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy

311
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Good/ Competent / Fair /Poor' for Communication

Fluency and Coherence Lexical Resource Grammatical Range

LEVEL OF
(Vocabulary) and Accuracy
COMPETENCE
Speaks at length without
noticeable effort or loss of
coherence. May demonstrate Uses vocabulary
language-related hesitation at resources flexibly Uses a range of complex
times, or some repetition during discussion. Uses structures with some
GOOD and/or self-correction. paraphrase effectively. flexibility.
(9-10*) Uses a range of connectives
and discourse markers with Uses some less
some flexibility. Articulates common vocabulary
and adapts to near and shows some Mostly produces error-
naturalization. awareness of style and free sentences.
collocation
Is willing to speak at length, Has enough vocabulary
though may lose coherence at to discuss topics and
times due to occasional make meaning clear in Uses a mix of simple and
repetition, self-correction or spite of complex structures, but
COMPETENT
hesitation. inappropriacies. with limited flexibility.
(6-8)
Uses a range of connectives Generally paraphrases May make mistakes with
and discourse markers but not successfully complex structures
always appropriately. though these rarely cause
comprehension problems.
Manages to talk about
Tries to maintain a flow of familiar and unfamiliar
speech but t uses repetition, topics but uses Produces only basic
self correction and/or slow vocabulary with limited sentence forms, however,
speech to keep going. flexibility. errors persist.
FAIR Uses a limited range of
(3-5) more complex structures,
but these usually contain
Produces simple speech Attempts to use errors and may cause
fluently, but more complex paraphrase but with some comprehension
communication causes fluency mixed success. problems
problems.
Attempts basic sentence
Speaks with long pauses. Uses simple vocabulary forms but with limited
Pauses lengthy before most to convey personal success, or relies on
words. Merely imitates information apparently memorized
utterances
POOR
Has insufficient Makes numerous errors
(0 *-2)
Has limited ability to link vocabulary for less except in memorized
simple sentences familiar topics expressions
Gives only simple responses Only produces isolated
and is frequently unable to words or memorized Struggles to produce
convey basic message utterances basic sentence forms

312
 s*10 marks to be awarded only if competence level shows flawless expertise in English.
*0 marks to be awarded when student shows incoherence and gives irrelevant responses.

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.

Periods Marks allotment for each Student in Mapping

Marks Wise of COs
Questions based on Allocate the Rubric*
S. Distribution
Course Outcomes d for Poor Fair Competent Good
No. of
practica 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
Weightage
l work
1 Describe the given CO 2
6 10
object in a minute
CO1, CO 2
Exchange ideas/
views in a group
discussion on
2 6 10
________ issue
(academic, technical
or social )

Present your ideas CO1, CO2,

/opinions on the CO 3
3 given issue/ topic 9 10
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1, CO2,
4 imaginary work- 6 10 CO 3
place situation
Individual CO1, CO2,
interaction with the CO 3
Examiner duly
submitting Resume (
5 12 10
Facing the Interview)
– Introducing
oneself and
answering questions
*Listen to and CO1, CO2,
comprehend any CO 3
6 audio 6 10
communication/
content
TOTAL 45 60

*Listen to and comprehend the given audio content: Giving the Students time to read the questions
(Fill in the Blanks, Select from Alternatives, True or False, Table fill, etc.) in chunks before listening to
audio inputs also played in chunks.

313
 Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for Formative Assessment:
Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters in the
rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy

Periods Marks allotment for each Student Mapping

Marks Wise
Questions based on Allocated in the Rubric* of COs
S. Distribution
Course Outcomes for Poor Fair Competent Good
No. of
practical 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
Weightage
work
Formative Assessment - 1
Describe the given 10
1 3
object in a minute CO 2
Exchange ideas/ views
2 in a group discussion CO1, CO 2
on ________ issue 6 10
(academic, technical
or social )
Present your ideas
3 /opinions on the given CO1, CO2,
6 10 CO 3
issue/ topic (individual
to an audience)
4
*Listen to and
CO1, CO2,
comprehend any
3 10 CO 3
audio communication/
content

Total 18 40

Formative Assessment -2
Present your ideas
1
/opinions on the given
10
issue/ topic (individual 3
to an audience)
2 Role play an imaginary CO1, CO2,
6 10
work-place situation CO 3
Individual interaction
with the Examiner
duly submitting CO1, CO2,
3 Resume ( Facing the CO 3
15 10
Interview)
– Introducing oneself
and answering
questions

314
 *Listen to and
comprehend any CO1, CO2,
4 10
audio communication/ 3 CO 3
content
TOTAL 27 40

Learning Outcomes
1. Listening Skills:
1.1 Listen to audio content (dialogues, interactions, speeches, short presentations) and
answer questions based on them
1.2 Infer meanings of words / phrases / sentences / after listening to audio content as
mentioned above
2. Introducing Oneself:
2.1 Prepare a grid different aspects for presentation about a person / oneself
2.2 Present a 1 or 2 minute introduction of oneself for an audience
3. Short Presentation:
3.1 Define an object
3.2 Describe an object, phenomenon, event, people
3.3 Speak on a topic randomly chosen
4. Group Discussion:
4.1 Practice Group Discussion. Techniques
4.2 Participate in group discussions
5. Resume Writing and Cover Letter:
5.1 Prepare resumes of different sorts – one’s own and others.
5.2 Write an effective cover letter that goes with a resume
6. Interview Skills:
6.1 Prepare a good Curriculum Vitae
6.2 Exhibit acceptable (Greeting, Thanking, Answering questions with confidence)
7. Presentation Skills:
7.1 Prepare Posters, Charts, PPT’s on issue of general and technical interest
7.2 Present one’s ideas before an audience with confidence using audio visual aids and
answer questions that are raised.
8. Workplace Etiquette:
8.1 Show positive attitude & adaptability / appropriate body language to suit the work
place
8.2 Display basic of etiquette like politeness, good manners.

315
 No of
Course Total no of Marks Marks
Course title periods/
Code periods for FA for SA
week

Computer Networks and

CCN-409 04 60 40 60
Security Lab

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods
BASICS CONCEPTS OF ENCRYPTION
1. TECHNIQUES 8 CO1

SYMMETRIC KEY ENCRYPTION

2. TECHNIQUES 24 CO2

ASYMMETRIC KEY ENCRYPTION

3. TECHNIQUES 20 CO3

CREATION AND DETECTION OF

4 04 C04
TROJANS
5 SECURITY WITH ANTI VIRUS 04 C05
Total 60

COURSE 1.To learn Different Cipher Techniques

2.To Implement the Symmetric key Algorithms
OBJECTIVES 3. To Implement the Asymmetric key Algorithms
4.To use the network security tools and vulnerability assessment tools

At the end of the course the student will be able to

CO1 CCN-409.1 Develop the ciphertechniques for encryption

CO2 CCN-409.2 Implement symmetric key Algorithms

Course
Outcomes
CO3 CCN-409.3 Demonstrate Asymmetric key Algorithm

CO4 CCN-409.4 Secure the computer systems from Trojans

CO5 CCN-409.5 Use Antivirus Software’s to secure the system

316
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-409.1 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 3 3

CCN-409.2 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 3 3

CCN-409.3 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 3 3

CCN-409.4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1

CCN-409.5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1

Average 2 2.2 2.8 2.4 1.6 1 1 2.6 2.2 2.2

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

BASIC CONCEPTS OF ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUE

1. Performs X-OR Operation on String content and ‘0’

2. perform X-OR Operation on String content and ‘127’

SYMMETRIC KEY ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES

3. perform encryption and decryption by using CaesarCipher technique
4. Exercise encryption and decryption by using PlayfairCipher technique
5. Exercise encryption and decryption by using HillCipher technique
6. perform encryption and decryption by using VigenereCipher
7. Exercise encryption and decryption by using Blowfish encryption technique
8. perform encryption and decryption by using Rijandael Encryption Technique
9. Exercise encryption and decryption by using SHA-1 hashing encryption technique
ASYMMETRIC KEY ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES

10. Perform encryption and decryption using RSA public and private key.

11. To perform the validation of the digital document using Digital signature standard encryption
and decryption

12. To perform the procedure of installation process of antivirus to detect threats.

13. To ensure security basic firewalls can be enabled in the system.

14. To perform security in application self creation and detection of Trojans in the system.

15. To perform security to the system basic antivirus can be installed and threat founds

317
 pings a message.

The Competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Name of the experiment Objectives Key Competencies

o.

1 To implement C Program Learn to basic X-  Select a string as an input and perform

Which performs X-OR OR operation with basic on X-OR operation with ‘0’ which
Operation on String content a string produce the same String
and ‘0’

2 To implement C Program Learn to basic  Select a string as an input and perform

Which performs X-OR AND and X-OR basic on AND and X-OR operation with
Operation on String content operation with a ‘127’ which produce the same String
and ‘127’ string with ‘127’
3 To implement Learn to  Compile program
Transportation and implement the  Input key value
Substitution using Caesar Caesar Cipher  Input text to be encrypted
 Rectify the syntax errors
Cipher Technique Transportation
 We will get Encrypted text as output
Technique on Check the output for correctness
information

4 To implement Learn to  Compile program

Transportation and implement the  Input key value
Substitution using Playfair Playfair Cipher  Input text to be encrypted
 Rectify the syntax errors
Cipher Technique Transportation
 We will get Encrypted text as output
Technique on  Check the output for correctness
information

5 To implement Learn to  Input the plain text and key from the user.
Transportation and implement the Hill  Split the plain text into groups of length
Cipher three.
Substitution using Hill
 Arrange the keyword in a 3*3 matrix.
Cipher Technique Transportation
 the two matrices to obtain the cipher text of
Technique on lengththree.
information  Combine all these groups to get the
complete cipher text.
6 To implement Vigenere Learn to  Arrange the alphabets in row and column of
Cipher Technique implement the a 26*26 matrix.
Vigenere Cipher  Circulate the alphabets in each row to
position left such that the first letter is
Technique on
attached to last.
information  Repeat this process for all 26 rows and
construct the final key matrix.
 The keyword and the plain text is read from
the user.
 The characters in the keyword are
repeated sequentially so as to match with

318
 that of the plaintext.
Pick the first letter of the plain text and that
of the keyword as the row indices and
column indicesrespectively.
 The junction character where these two
meet forms the cipher character.
 Repeat the above steps to generate the
entire cipher text.
9 Learn to
Implement the
Implementation of Blowfish Blowfish  Choose the symmetric key to
Encryption Technique encrypt and decrypt the message
Encryption
 Rectify the syntax errors
Technique on data  See the validity of cipher Decryption
to secure.

10
 Choose the symmetric key to
Implementation of Rijandael Learn to encrypt and decrypt the message
Encryption Technique Implement the  Rectify the syntax errors
Rijandael  See the validity of Decrypted
Encryption message
Technique on data
to secure.

9 To implement the SHA-I Study the  Alice and Bob are investigating a forgery
hashing technique using C Implementation of case of x and y.
Program Hashing  X had document signed by him but he says
he did not sign that document digitally.
Techniques, and
 Alice reads the two prime numbers p and a.
its importance in  chooses a random co-primes alpha and beta
Encription and the x’s original signature x
 With these values, he applies it to the
12elliptic curve cryptographic equation to
obtain y.
 this ‘y’ with actual y’s document, Alice
concludes that y is a foregray.
10 To implement Encryption Learn to  By using RSA Public Key & Private key for
and Decryptions using RSA implement the Encryption and Decryption of the message
algorithm RSA Public Key  By using Public key message will be
ciphered
Encryption
 By using Private key message will be
Algorithm deciphered
 Both the keys are Asymmetric
11 Implementation of Digital Learn the Digital  Read the 256-bit key values.
Signature Standard signature  Divide into five equal-sized blocks named A,
Implementation B, C, D and E.
 The blocks B, C and D are passed to the
and its usage
function F.

319
  The resultant value is permuted with block
E.
 The block A is shifted right by ‘s’ times and
permuted with the result of step-4.
 Then it is permuted with a weight value and
then with some other key pair and taken as
the firstblock.
 Block A is taken as the second block and the
block B is shifted by ‘s’ times and taken as
the thirdblock.
 blocks C and D are taken as the block D and
E for the final output.
12 Study of any Antivirus Learn to install the  Choose the Appropriate Antivirus Software
Installation & Configurations Antivirus Software to install in the Computer System
Study/Demo  Do the Appropriate settings to configure the
in Computer
Antivirus software in the System.
Study of Standard System and know  Observing System Performance While using
Vulnerabilities. the configuration the Antivirus software
Setting  Observe the Viruses/Threats when attacked
to Computer System

13 Setting firewall with Study the  Choose The Appropriate System

Windows OS, its importance implementation of settings to implement Firewall
 Observe the System performance while
and Problems. firewall Settings in
having firewall
Computer system
and learn how it
manage the
System

14 To Build a Trojan and it’s the Self creation and  Create a Trojan using Bath file
harm in a computer system Detection of  When Trojan code executes, it will
open MS-Paint application.
Trojans ,if found
 Restart the Computer to stop the
halts the execution of Trojan
Application

15 To install Rootkit hunter to To Detect  Install the Rootkit Software

find malware in a computer malwares in the  Configure the Rootkit Application
 It detects the malware in a system
system.
and displays the warning message if
found

 Linux /Windows Operating system

Software requirements  C compiler
 Java Compiler

320
V SEMESTER

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING

ENGINEERING

321
 SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2020
(V Semester)
Instruction
Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week Total
Sub Code Name of the Subject Periods Per End
Semester Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY SUBJECTS
Industrial Management
CCN-501 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
and Entrepreneurship

CCN-502 Wireless Networks 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

CCN-503 Software Engineering 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

CCN-504 Internet Of Things 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

CCN-505 High Speed Networks 5 75 3 20 80 100

-

PRACTICAL SUBJECTS

CCN-506 Wireless Networks Lab - 4 60 3 40 60 100

Advanced Computer
CCN-507 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Networks Lab
CCN-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

CCN-509 Project work - 6 90 3 40 60 100

Total 25 17 630 - 260 640 900

CCN-501 common with DCME,DIT,DAIE,DAME,DCBDE,DWDE

CCN-503 common with DCME,DIT,DAME,DCBDE
CCN-504 common with DCME,DIT,DAIE,DAME,DCBDE,DWDE
CCN-508 common with all branches

Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

322
code Periods/ periods FA SA
Weeks

CCN-
Industrial Management and 5 75 20 80
501 Entrepreneurship

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

Principles and functions of Industrial

1. 08 CO1
Management

Organisation structure &

2. 16 CO2
Organisational behaviour

3. Production Management 12 CO3

Materials Management, Maintenance

4. 19 CO4
management & Industrial Safety

Entrepreneurship Development &

5. 20 CO5
Quality management.

Total Periods 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Understand the principles and functions of industrial management,

Course Objectives organization structure and organisational behaviour.
2. Understand the production management, materials management,
maintenance management and industrial safety.
3. Understand the entrepreneurship development and trends in
management.

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain various principles and functions of industrial
CO1 CCN-501.1
management.

Course CO2 CCN-501.2 Explain organisation structure and organisational behaviour.

Outcomes CO3 CCN-501.3 Apply CPM and PERT techniques in production management.
Apply materials management techniques, maintenance
CO4 CCN-501.4
management and industrial safety.
Describe Entrepreneurship Development and Quality
CO5 CCN-501.5
management aspects.

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

323
 CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-501.1 2 2 2 2

CCN-501.2 2 2 2 2 2

CCN-501.3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3

CCN-501.4 2 2 2 2 2 2

CCN-501.5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2

Average 2 3 2 2 2 2.2 3 2 3 2.3

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning outcomes:

Principles and functions of Industrial Management

1.1 Define industry, commerce (Trade) and business.

1.2 Know the need for management.
1.3 Understand the evolution of management
1.4 Understand functions of Management.
1.5 Explain the principles of scientific management.
1.6 Explain the principles of management.
1.7 Differentiate between management and administration.
1.8 Understand the nature of management as a profession
1.9 Differentiate between supervisory, middle and Top level management
1.10 Explain the importance of managerial skills (Technical, Human, Conceptual)

2.0 Organisation Structure & organisational behaviour

2.1 Explain the philosophy and need of organisation structure of an industry.
2.2 Discuss the line, staff and Functional organisations
2.3 Explain the Authority and Responsibility Relationships
2.4 List the differences between Delegation and decentralization
2.5 Explain the factors of effective organisation
2.6 Outline the communication process
2.7 State motivational theories.
2.8 State Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs.
2.9 List different leadership models.
2.10 Explain the trait theory of leadership
2.11 Explain behavioural theory of Leadership
2.12 Explain the process of decision making.
2.13 Assessing Human resource requirements
2.14 Describe the concept of Job analysis, Job description and specifications
2.15 Explain the process of recruitment, selection, training and development
2.16 List and explain types of business ownerships
2.17 Differentiate between the business ownerships

324
 2.18 State the objectives of Employee participation
2.19 Give the meaning and definition social responsibilities
2.20 Explain corporate social responsibilities

3.0 Production management

3.1 Identify the factors of Plant Location
3.2 List the objectives of plant Layout
3.3 State the principles of plant Layouts
3.4 Explain the types of plant Layouts
3.5 Relate the production department with other departments.
3.6 State the need for planning and it‘s advantages.
3.7 State different types of production.
3.8 Explain the stages of Production, planning and control.
3.9 List the basic methods forecasting
3.10 Explain routing methods.
3.11 Explain scheduling methods.
3.12 Explain dispatching.
3.13 Explain Break Even Analysis
3.14 Define supply chain Management, competitive strategy, Supply chain strategy
3.15 Explain project scheduling.
3.16 Draw CPM and PERT networks.
3.17 Identify the critical path.
3.18 Simple numerical problems on CPM and PERT.

4.0 Materials Management, Maintenance management & Industrial Safety

4.1 Explain the importance and functions of materials management in Industry.
4.2 State an expression for inventory control.
4.3 Explain ABC analysis.
4.4 Define safety stock and reorder level
4.5 State an expression for economic ordering quantity.
4.6 State the functions of Stores Management,
4.7 Explain types of store layouts.
4.8 List out stores equipment and stores records.
4.9 Explain general purchasing procedures
4.10 Explain tendering, E-tendering and E-procurement procedures
4.11 List purchase records.
4.12 Explain the Bin card.
4.13 Describe Cardex method.
4.14 List the applications of RFIDin material management
4.15 Explain Objectives and activities of maintenance management
4.16 Explain the importance of maintenance management in Industry.
4.17 Explain the importance of Preventive maintenance
4.18 State the need for scheduled maintenance
4.19 Differentiate between scheduled and preventive maintenance
4.20 Know the principles of 5 s for good housekeeping
4.21 Explain the importance of safety at Work place.
4.22 List the important provisions related to safety.
4.23 Explain hazard and accident.
4.24 List any six different hazards in the Industry.
4.25 Explain any six causes of accidents.

325
 4.26 Explain the direct and indirect causes of accidents.
4.27 Explain the types of emission from process Industries, their effects
environment and control
4.28 Describe the principles of solid waste management

5.0 Entrepreneurship Development & Quality management.

5.1 Define the word entrepreneur.
5.2 Explain the requirements of an entrepreneur.
5.3 Determine the role of entrepreneurs in promoting Small Scale Industries.
5.4 Describe the details of self-employment schemes.
5.5 Characteristic of successful entrepreneurs
5.6 Explain the method of site selection.
5.7 List the financial assistance programmes.
5.8 List out the organisations that help an entrepreneur
5.9 Know the use of EDP Programmes
5.10 Understand the concept of make in India, Zero defect and zero effect
5.11 Understand the importance for startups
5.12 Explain the conduct of demand surveys
5.13 Explain the conduct of a market survey
5.14 Evaluate Economic and Technical factors.
5.15 Prepare feasibility report study
5.16 Explain the concept of quality.
5.17 List the quality systems and elements of quality systems.
5.18 State the principles of quality Assurance.
5.19 Explain management information system (MIS)
5.20 Explain the basic concepts of TQM
5.21 State the Pillars of TQM
5.22 List the evolution of ISO standards.
5.23 Explain ISO standards and ISO 9000 series of quality systems.
5.24 List the beneficiaries of ISO 9000.
5.25 Explain the concepts of ISO 14000
5.26 Give the overview of PDCA cycle
5.27 State Kaizen strategy.

Course Content
1. Principles and functions of Industrial Management
Introduction: Industry, Commerce and Business; Definition of management; Functions of
management - Principles of scientific management byF.W.Taylor, Principles of Management
by Henry Fayol; Administration and management; levels of management; managerial skills;

2. Organisation Structure & organisational behaviour

Organizing - Process of Organizing; Line, Staff and functional Organizations, Decentralization
and Delegation, Communication, Motivational Theories; Leadership Models; Human
resources development; recruitment selection training and development, Forms of Business
ownerships: Types – Sole proprietorship, Partnership, Joint Stock Companies, Cooperative
Organization; objectives of employee participation, Corporate Social responsibility;

3. Production management

326
 Definition and importance; objectives and principles of plant layout, Plant location and types
of layout; Types of production -job, batch and mass; production Planning and Control: basic
methods of forecasting, routing, scheduling, dispatching and follow up; Break even analysis;
Project scheduling; Application of CPM and PERT techniques; simple numerical problems;

4. Materials Management, Maintenance management & Industrial Safety

Materials in industry, Importance and functions of materials management, Basic inventory
control model, ABC Analysis, Safety stock, re-order level, Economic ordering quantity, Stores
Management: Stores layout, stores equipment, Stores records, purchasing procedures,
tendering, e-tendering, e-procurement; purchase records, Bin card, Cardex, RFID Applications
in materials management, Objectives and importance of maintenance management, Different
types of maintenance, Schedules of preventive maintenance, scheduled maintenance
Advantages of preventive maintenance, Advantages of scheduled maintenance, Importance of
Safety at work places; industrial hazards; Causes of accidents.5S Principles

5. Entrepreneurship Development& Quality Management.

Definition of Entrepreneur; Requirements of entrepreneur, Role of Entrepreneur;
Entrepreneurial Development, Details of self-employment scheme, financial assistant
programmes, organisations that help entrepreneurs (SSI, MSME, DIC, Banks) Concept of
Make In India, ZERO defect, Zero Effect, Concept of Start-up Company, Demand survey and
Market survey; Preparation of Feasibility study reports
Concept of quality, quality systems and its terms, principles of quality assurance,
Introduction to Management Information System (MIS); Total Quality Management (TQM),
ISO 9000 series , ISO-14000, Deming's PDCA Cycle (Plan, Do, Check and Action). Kaizen
Strategy (continuous improvement)

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Industrial Engineering and Management -by O.P Khanna

2. Production Management- by Buffa.
3. Engineering Economics and Management Science - by Banga &Sharma.
4. Personnel Management by Flippo.
5. Production and Operations Management –S.N. Chary
6. Converging_Technologies_for_Smart_Environments_and_Integ
rated_Ecosystems_IERC_Book_ Open_Access_2013pages-54-
76
7. Supply Chain Management –Sunil Chopra and Meindl, PHIpublishers
8 5 S made easy by David Visco

MODEL BLUE PRINT

327
 Marks Wise Question wise
Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage CO’s
S.No. Distribution of Distribution of
title periods Allocated Mapped
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Principles and
functions of
1 08 11 3 8 1 1 CO1
Industrial
Management

Organisation
structure &
2 16 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO2
Organisational
behaviour

Production
3 12 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO3
Management

Materials
Management,
4 Maintenance 19 14 6 8 * 2 1 * CO4
management &
Industrial Safety

Entrepreneurship
Development &
5 20 17 9 8 * 3 1 * CO5
Quality
management.

Total * 75 70 +10* 24 46 10* 8 7 1

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.18
Unit test-2 From 4.1 to 5.27

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship

328
 UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-501
MAX MARKS: 40 TIME: 90 MINUTES
PART-A 16 Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.
1. a) Management and Administration are synonyms (True/False) (CO1)

b) Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs states …………………………………………. (CO2)

c) CPM stands for………………………………….. (CO3)

d) Which one the following is not a managerial skill [ ] (CO3)

i) Technical II)Commercial III)Human IV) Conceptual

2) Define supervisory management. (CO1)

3) Differentiate delegation and decentralization. (CO2)
4) List the objectives of plant Layout. (CO3)
5) Define project scheduling. (CO3)

PART-B 3 X 8=24Marks
Instructions: 1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
6.A. Explain the principles of management. (CO1)
(Or)
B.Explain the nature of management as a profession. (CO1)

7.A.Describe line, staff and functional organizations. (CO2)

(Or)
B.Explain the Concept of Job Analysis, Job Description & specification. (CO2)

8. A. Explain Break-Even Analysis. (CO3)

(Or)
B.In the table below a list of activities are there and their duration is given: (CO3)

Activity 1-2 2-3 4-3 1-4 2-5 3-5 4-5

Duration 2 1 3 3 3 2 4

(a) Prepare the network.

(b) Identify critical path.
(c) Calculate the project completion.

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

329
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER –END EXAMINATION
Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-501

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS

PART - A
Answer all the Questions. Each Question Carries 3 marks

1. Define industry, commerce and business. (CO1)

2. Write the advantages of line and staff organization. (CO2)
3. What are the types of leadership? (CO2)
4. Define the terms Routing and Scheduling. (CO3)
5. State the importance of materials management (CO3)
6. Differentiate between bincard and cardex methods. (CO4)
7. List any three important provisions related to safety (CO4)
8. Define the term Entrepreneur. (CO5)
9. List the financial assistance programs. (CO5)
10. State the benefits of ISO 9000 series. (CO5)

PART – B
Answer all the Questions. Each Question Carries 8 marks

11.A. Explain the principles of scientific management. (CO1)

OR
B. Explain the importance of managerial skills (CO1)

12.A.Define motivation. Explain Maslow’s need hierarchy theory. (CO2)

or
B. Explain the types of business ownerships. (CO2)

13. A. Explain the stages of production, planning and control (CO3)

Or
B.In the table below a list of activities are there and their duration is given : ( CO3)

Activity 1-2 1-3 2-4 2-5 2-3 4-7 5-7 3-6 6-7 7-8

Optimistic time 4 1 2 3 2 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1

Most likely time 5 1.5 3 4 3 2 3 3.5 2 2

Permissible 11 2.5 7.5

12 5 4 4 4.5 2.5 3
time

330
 (d) Prepare the network.
(e) Identify critical path.
(f) Calculate the project completion.

14. A. Explain ABC analysis with the help of neat sketch. (CO4)
Or
B. Explain the importance of maintenance management in industry. (CO4)

15. A. Explain the details of self-employment schemes. (CO5)

Or
B. Explain the role of entrepreneurs in promoting small scale industries. (CO5)

PART – C 1X10=10Marks

1. Among PERT and CPM which one is suitable for unpredictable activities justify? (CO4)

331
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/We periods
eks

CCN-502 Wireless Networks 5 75 20 80

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction to Wireless Networks 10 CO1

2. Wireless Network Architectures 20 CO1,CO2

3. Wireless Communications 15 CO1,CO3

4. Wireless LAN & PAN 20 CO4

5. Advanced Wireless Technologies 10 CO1,CO5

Total Periods 75

Course Objectives

i)To Understand concepts and principles of wireless networking

ii)To familiarize Design of wireless LAN &PAN

iii) To know Advanced wireless technologies

At the end of course student able to learn the following:

CCN-502.1 CO1 Describe the features and applications of wireless

communication networks and wireless devices.
Course
Outcomes CCN-502.2 CO2 Explain Wireless Physical and Logical Architectures

CCN-502.3 CO3 Explain the usage of choosing proper wireless

communication in real world applications.

CCN-502.4 CO4 Analyse Wireless LAN & PAN standards

CCN-502.5 CO5 Apply Advanced Wireless Technologies

332
 CO-PO/PSO Matrix

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-502.1 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 1 1

CCN-502.2 2 1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 1

CCN-502.3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3

CCN-502.4 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3

CCN-502.5 3 1 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2

Average 2.4 1.6 2.8 2.8 3 1.6 2.8 2.8 2.2 2

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. Introduction To Wireless Networks

1.1. Evolution of wireless Communication
1.2. Define wireless networking
1.3. State the need of wireless Networks
1.4. List and explain types of wireless networks
1.5. Describe Wireless networking standards
1.6. List Advantages and Disadvantages of Wireless Networks
1.7. List Applications of Wireless Networks
1.8. Differentiate between wireless networks and wired network
1.9. What is WI-FI wireless network.
1.10. List the benefits of a Wi-Fi wireless network
1.11. How does WI-FI wireless network is used
1.12. Explain how to deploy a wireless network
1.13. List and explain various Wireless communication networks
1.14. Define Wireless Access point(WAP)
1.15. Why we use a WAP to set up a wireless network?
1.16. List and explain Common types of access point configurations
1.17. History Bluetooth Technologies
1.18. List and explain Steps to connect Bluetooth devices
1.19. List applications of Bluetooth devices
1.20. Differentiate between Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
1.21. Explain How to Set Up a Small Wireless Network for an organisation

333
2. Wireless Network Architectures
2.1. Wireless Network Logical Architecture
2.1.1. State the need of OSI Network Model
2.1.2. List and explain OSI Network Model
2.1.3. Network Layer Technologies
2.1.3.1. Describe IP addressing
2.1.3.2. State the importance of Private IP Address
2.1.3.3. Describe IPV6 addressing
2.1.3.4. State the use of Address Resolution Protocol
2.1.3.5. State the importance of Routing
2.1.3.6. Describe how to Build Router tables
2.1.3.7. Explain the need of Network Address Translation(NAT)
2.1.3.8. Illustrate how Network Address Translation is performed
2.1.3.9. Define Static NAT
2.1.3.10. Define Dynamic NAT
2.1.3.11. State the need of Port Address Translation
2.1.3.12. Illustrate Port Address Translation
2.1.4. Data Link Layer Technologies
2.1.4.1. State the need of Logical Link Control
2.1.4.2. State the need of Media Access control
2.1.4.3. Define MAC Addressing
2.1.4.4. Describe the use of Media Access Control in Wired Networks
2.1.4.5. Explain Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD)
2.1.4.6. What are the Other Wired Network MAC Methods
2.1.4.7. Describe Media Access Control in Wireless Networks
2.1.5. Explain Physical Layer Technologies
2.1.5.1. Physical Layer Technologies — Wired Networks
2.1.5.1.1. Describe Ethernet (IEEE 802.3)
2.1.5.1.2. Describe 100 Base-T Ethernet Data Encoding Scheme
2.1.5.1.3. Describe Ethernet MPE and Fast Ethernet MLT-3
Encoding
2.1.5.2. Explain ISDN
2.1.5.3. Explain FireWire
2.1.5.4. Explain Universal Serial Bus
2.1.5.5. State the importance of Physical Layer Technologies — Wireless
Networks
2.1.5.6. Describe Various Challenges of PHYS and Data Link Layer
Wireless Technologies

2.2. Wireless Network Physical Architecture

2.2.1. List and explain various Wireless Network Topologies
2.2.2. Wireless PAN Devices
2.2.2.1. Explain Wireless PAN Hardware Devices

334
 2.2.2.1.1. Bluetooth Devices features
2.2.2.1.2. ZigBee Devices features
2.2.2.1.3. Wireless PAN antennas
2.2.2.1.4. Wireless MAN Devices features
2.2.2.1.5. Fixed Wireless MAN Devices
2.2.2.1.6. Fixed Wireless MAN Antennas
2.2.2.1.7. Mobile Wireless MAN Devices
2.2.3. Wireless LAN Devices
2.2.3.1. List Wireless LAN devices
2.2.3.2. Describe Access Points
2.2.3.3. List Optional Access Point Functionality
2.2.3.4. Describe Optional Access Point Functionality
2.2.3.5. Wireless LAN Switches or Controllers
2.2.3.6. List “Thin Access Point” Advantages
2.2.3.7. Lightweight Access Point Protocol
2.2.3.8. List and explain Wireless LAN Switch Features
2.2.3.9. LWAPP protocol
2.2.3.9.1. State the need of LWAPP protocol
2.2.3.9.2. List functions of LWAPP protocol
2.2.3.10. Miscellaneous Wireless LAN Hardware
2.2.3.10.1. Describe Wireless Network Bridging
2.2.3.10.2. State the need of Wireless Printer Servers
2.2.3.10.3. Describe Wireless LAN Antennas
3. Wireless Communications
3.1. Radio Communication Basics
3.1.1. The RF Spectrum
3.1.1.1. What is the use of Radio Frequency(RF)
3.1.1.2. State the importance of RF spectrum
3.1.1.3. Describe concept of Subdivision of the Radio Frequency
Spectrum
3.1.1.4. List Radio Frequency Bands in Use for Wireless Networking
3.1.1.5. Describe Radio Transmission as a Network Medium
3.1.1.6. List various Radio Frequency Networking Challenge
3.1.2. Spread Spectrum Transmission
3.1.2.1. List Types of Spread Spectrum Transmission
3.1.2.2. State the need of Spread Spectrum Transmission
3.1.2.3. Describe Complementary Code Keying
3.1.2.4. Describe Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum
3.1.2.5. Describe Time Hopping Spread Spectrum
3.1.3. Wireless Multiplexing and Multiple Access Techniques
3.1.3.1. List Wireless Multiplexing and Multiple Access Techniques
3.1.3.2. Define Time Division Multiple Access
3.1.3.3. Explain Time Division Multiple Access
3.1.3.4. Define Frequency Division Multiple Access
3.1.3.5. Explain Frequency Division Multiple Access

335
 3.1.4. Digital Modulation Technique
3.1.4.1. List various Digital Modulation techniques
3.1.4.2. Define Modulation
3.1.4.3. Describe how the of selection Modulation techniques was made
3.1.4.4. Define Phase shift keying
3.1.4.5. Explain phase Shift keying
3.1.4.6. List various methods of phase shift keying
3.1.4.7. Define Frequency Shift keying
3.1.4.8. Explain Frequency Shift keying
3.1.5. RF Signal Propagation and Reception
3.1.5.1. Define Transmitter Power
3.1.5.2. Define Antenna Gain
3.1.5.3. Define Receiver Sensitivity
3.1.5.4. Define Bit Rate error
3.1.5.5. Define Receiver Noise Floor
3.1.6. MIMO Radio
3.1.6.1. State the need of MIMO Radio
3.1.6.2. Describe MIMO Radio
3.1.7. Near Field Communications
3.1.7.1. State the need of Near Field Communication
3.1.7.2. Define Near field Communication
3.1.7.3. Define Far Field Communication
3.1.7.4. Describe about Inductive coupling
3.2. Infrared Communication Basics
3.2.1. The IR Spectrum
3.2.1.1. State the importance of IR spectrum
3.2.2. Infrared Propagation and Reception
3.2.2.1. Subdivision of the Infrared Spectrum
3.2.2.2. Describe Emitter Beam Pattern
3.2.2.3. Define Inverse Square Loss
3.2.2.4. Describe Ir Detector Sensitivity
3.2.2.5. Describe Ir Link Distance

4. Wireless PAN & LAN

4.1. Wireless PAN
4.1.1. Define PAN
4.1.2. List various wireless PAN standards
4.1.3. Bluetooth
4.1.3.1. List versions of Bluetooth
4.1.3.2. State the importance of Bluetooth
4.1.3.3. Explain Bluetooth Protocol stack
4.1.3.4. Describe Bluetooth connection states
4.1.3.5. Explain Wireless USB
4.1.4. ZigBee
4.1.4.1. State the importance of zigbee
4.1.4.2. Explain ZigBee Super frame Structure in detail
4.1.5. Implementation of Wireless PAN
4.1.5.1. Compare Technical Attribute of PAN Technologies
4.1.5.2. Explain how to choose Wireless PAN Technology

336
 4.2. Wireless LAN
4.2.1. Wireless LAN Standards
4.2.1.1. List and explain WLAN standards
4.2.1.2. Explain WLAN operations
4.2.1.3. List and explain 802.11 Network Components
4.2.2. The 802.11 MAC Layer
4.2.2.1. Wireless media access
4.2.2.2. 802.11 CSMA/CA
4.2.2.3. List and explain 802.11 station services
4.2.2.4. List 802.11 distribution system services
4.2.3. The 802.11 PHY Layer
4.2.3.1. Describe 802.11a PHY Layer
4.2.3.2. List RF Band channels used in 802.11a OFDM PHY
4.2.3.3. List modulation methods used in 802.11a OFDM PHY
4.2.3.4. List modulation methods used in 802.11b DSSS PHY
4.2.3.5. Explain 802.11b/g Mixed Mode Interoperability Mechanisms
4.2.3.6. List Data rates at PHY layer
4.2.3.7. List Data rates at MAC layer
4.2.4. Other WLAN Standards
4.2.4.1. List other WLAN Standards
4.2.4.2. List the features of 802.11r standard
4.2.4.3. List the features of 802.11n standard
4.2.4.4. List the reasons for Roaming
4.2.5. Implementing WLAN
4.2.5.1. List and explain Key steps in the planning and implementation of
a wireless LAN
4.2.5.2. List Requirements to implement WLAN
4.2.5.3. List Factors Affecting WLAN Operating Range
4.2.5.4. Explain Planning and Designing of Wireless LAN
4.2.5.5. List and Explain WLAN Implementation Steps
4.2.5.6. List and explain Access Point Configuration Parameters
4.2.5.7. Explain steps in Wireless NIC Configuration
4.2.6. WLAN Security
4.2.6.1. What is Hacking Threat
4.2.6.2. List and explain Wireless LAN Security Threats
4.2.6.3. List various Wireless LAN Security Measures
4.2.6.4. Explain Wired Equivalent Privacy Encryption
4.2.6.5. Explain Wi-Fi Protected Access
5. Advanced Wireless Technologies
5.1. Introduction to 4G
5.1.1. List 4G Features,
5.1.2. List Challenges in 4G
5.1.3. List Applications in 4G
5.1.4. Explain Multicarrier Modulation in 4G.
5.1.5. List and explain Smart antenna techniques
5.1.6. The Specifications required for IMT-Advanced Standard (4G)
5.1.7. List the features of 3GPP LTE Advanced
5.1.8. Describe IEEE WiMAX
5.1.9. Explain comparison of the current and proposed 4G systems along with
other related systems
5.2. Introduction to 5G

337
 5.2.1. State the need of 5G.
5.2.2. List Underlying technologies makeup 5G
5.2.3. List features of 5G.
5.2.4. List application areas of 5G.
5.2.5. Give the 5G Road map.
5.2.6. Explain the 5G communications systems architecture.
5.2.7. List the explain security issues and challenges in 5G communication systems.
5.3. Light Fidelity(Li-Fi)
5.3.1. What is Light Fidelity (Li-Fi)
5.3.2. History of Li-Fi.
5.3.3. List standards in Li-Fi.
5.3.4. List applications of Li-Fi
5.3.5. Describe Li-Fi Technology details
5.3.6. Differentiate between WiFi (Wireless Fidelity) and LiFi (Light Fidelity)

COURSE CONTENT

1. Introduction To Wireless Networks: Evolution of wireless Communication - wireless networking-

need of wireless Networks-Usage of wireless network -Types of wireless networks-Wireless
networking standards-Advantages and Disadvantages of Wireless Networks-Applications of Wireless
Networks-Wireless networks vs wired network-benefits of a Wi-Fi wireless network-deployment a
wireless network-Various Wireless communication networks-Wireless Access point-History of
Bluetooth Technologies-connecting Bluetooth devices.

2.Wireless Network Architectures:

Wireless Network Logical Architecture: Need of OSI Network Model - Layers of OSI Network Model -
Network Layer Technologies - Data Link Layer Technologies -Explain Physical Layer Technologies

Wireless Network Physical Architecture : List and explain various Wireless Network Topologies -
Wireless PAN Devices - Wireless LAN Devices

3.Wireless Communications :

Radio Communication Basics-The RF Spectrum - Spread Spectrum Transmission - Wireless

Multiplexing and Multiple Access Techniques - Walsh codes - Digital Modulation Technique - RF
Signal Propagation and Reception - MIMO Radio - Near Field Communications - Infrared
Communication Basics- Infrared Propagation and Reception

4.Wireless LAN & PAN:

Wireless PAN: ZigBee - Implementation of Wireless PAN
Wireless LAN: Wireless LAN Standards - The 802.11 MAC Layer - The 802.11 PHY Layer
- Other WLAN Standards - Implementing WLAN - WLAN Security
5.Advanced Wireless Technologies: Introduction to 4G - Introduction to 5G - State the purpose of Li-
Fi - Optical communication: Li-Fi.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1) Wireless Networking Technology From Principles to Successful implementation by Steve
Rackley, Elsevier,Linacre House,Newnes publications,Great Britain (Unit 1,2,3&4 units from
this book)

338
 2) Fundemenetals 5G Mobile Networks Jonathan Rodriguez,Wiley Publications ( unit 5 from
this book)
3) WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS SECOND EDITION Williant Stallings Person
Prentice Hall publishers
4) Advanced wireless Networks 4G, Savo G Glisic,Wiley Publications
5) https://www.4gon.co.uk/solutions/introduction_to_4g.php (Unit 5:comparisions of 4G
Systems,specifications)

Model Blue Print:

S.No. Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage Marks Wise Question wise CO’s Mapped
title periods Allocated Distribution of Distribution of
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

1 Introduction of 10 14 1 1 1 CO1
Wireless
Networks

2 Wireless 20 14 1 1 1 CO1,CO2
Network
Architectures

3 Wireless 15 14 1 1 1 CO1,CO3
Communications

4 Wireless LAN & 20 14 1 1 * 1 * CO4

PAN

5 Advanced 10 14 1 1 1 CO1,CO5
Wireless
Technologies

75 70+ 10* 1 5 4 * 1 2 2 *

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.1.4.8
Unit test-2 From 3.1.5 to 5.3.6

339
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGG
MODEL PAPER
Wireless Networks
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-502
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90Minutes

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions:1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4marks, and each question of remaining carry 3marks
1. a) IPV6 is 128 bit (True/False) (CO2)

b) IEEE………. Is standard of Ethernet (CO2)

c) ---------------------,------------------------are two Data Link Layer Technologies (CO2)

d) Wireless Access point used for ………………. [] (CO1)

i) Allows wireless-capable devices to connect to a wired network ii) Allow wired device to connect to
wired network iii) Allow wireless devices to disconnect from wired network iv) Not allow any
connection

2) What is wireless networking? (CO1)

3) List any three features of Zigbee protocol (CO2)
4) State the importance of Bluetooth Device (CO2)
5) What are the subdivisions of Radio Frequency Spectrum? (CO3)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks
Instructions: 1) Answer all questions
2)Each question carries 8 Marks
3)Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer

6. a) Explain deployment of a wireless network (CO1)

Or

b) List and Explain the Steps to connect Bluetooth devices (CO1)

7. a) Explain any three concepts in Network Layer technologies (CO2)

Or

b) List and explain Wireless LAN devices. (CO2)

8. a) Explain the importance of RF spectrum (CO3)

Or

b) Explain Frequency Division Multiplexing in detail. (CO3)

340
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGG
MODEL PAPER –END EXAMINATION
Wireless Networks

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-502

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3HOURS
PART-A 10X3=30Marks

Note: Answer all questions

1. List the benefits of Wireless Networks. (CO1)

2. Define Wireless Access Point. (CO1)
3. State the importance of Routing. (CO2)
4. List any three functions of LWAPP protocol. (CO2)
5. State the importance of Radio Frequency. (CO3)
6. Define Modulation. (CO3)
7. List any three standards of WLAN. (CO4)
8. What is the need of Roaming in WLAN? (CO4)
9. List any three features of 4G. (CO5)
10.List any three applications of Li-Fi? (CO5)
PART-B 5x8=40Marks

Note: Answer all questions

11.A. Differentiate between wireless networks and wired network (CO1)

OR

11.B. List and explain types of wireless networks (CO1)

12.A. Explain i)ISDN ii)FireWire (CO2)

OR

12.B. List and explain Wireless LAN Switch Features. (CO2)

13.A. Explain about Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (CO3)

OR

13.B. Explain about RF Signal Propagation and Reception (CO3)

14.A. List and explain WLAN standards. (CO4)

OR

14.B. Explain Wired Equivalent Privacy Encryption (CO4)

15.A. Explain Multi Carrier Modulation in 4G (CO5)

OR

15.B. Explain the Li-Fi technology in detail. (CO5)

341
 PART-C 1X10=10Marks

16. How do you Establish Wireless LAN to an organisation to connect 100 devices with respective
protocols, devices, technologies with security measures? (CO4)

342
Course Course Title No. of Total No. Marks for Marks for SA
code Periods/Week of periods FA
s

CCN-503 Software Engineering 5 75 20 80

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Basics of Software Engineering 10 CO1

Designs & Life Cycle Models

2. Software Project Management 18 CO2

3. Requirement Analysis & Specifications 10 CO1,CO3

4. Software Design, Coding 22 CO1,CO3,CO5

5. Software testing,Debugging, 15 CO4,CO5

Reliability, Quality Management &
Maintenance

Total Periods 75

Course Objectives i)To know the fundamentals of software engineering life cycle modes

ii)To familiarize project managements

iii)To design software projects with the help of software engineering

principles and UML models

At the end of the course the student able to :

CO1 CCN-503.1 Explain Software life cycle models and basics of software
engineering.
Course
Outcomes CO2 CCN-503.2 Describe Software Project Management

CO3 CCN-503.3 Prepare SRS document

CO4 CCN-503.4 Apply Design ,coding& testing techniques.

CO5 CCN-503.5 Apply quality and reliability metrics

343
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-503.1 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 2

CCN-503.2 3 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 3

CCN-503.3 3 3 1 3 1 2 2 3

CCN-503.4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3

CCN-503.5 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3

Average 3 2.6 2.6 2.2 2 2 1.8 2 2.2 2.8

3=stronglymapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Basics of Software Engineering Designs & Life Cycle Models

1.1 Study the Evolution and Impact of the Software Engineering

1.1.1 Evolution of an Art to an Engineering Discipline

1.1.2 Explain Solution to the Software Crisis?

1.2 Write the difference between Programs and Software Products

1.3 Explain the following

1.3.1 Early Computer Programming

1.3.2 High Level Language Programming

1.3.3 Control Flow-Based Design

1.3.4 Data Structure-Oriented Design

1.3.5 Data Flow-Oriented Design

1.3.6 Object Oriented Design

1.3.7 Other Developments

1.4 Explain the Software Life Cycle Models

1.4.1 Classical Waterfall Model

1.4.2 Iterative Water fall Model

1.4.3 Prototyping Model

344
 1.4.4 Evolutionary Model

1.4.5 Spiral Model

1.4.6 Comparison of Different Life Cycle Models

2.0 Software Project Management

2.1 Explain the Responsibilities of a Software Project Manager

2.1.1 Job Responsibilities of a Software Project Manager

2.1.2 Skills Necessary for Software Project Management

2.2 Know about Software Project Planning

2.3 Explain SPMP Document.

2.4 State the Metrics for Project Size Estimation: Lines of Code, Function Point Metric

2.5 Explain the three Project Estimation Techniques

2.5.1 Empirical Estimation Technique

2.5.2 Heuristic Technique

2.5.3 Analytical Estimation Technique

2.6. Explain the two different works of Staffing Level Estimations

2.6.1 Norden’s Work

2.6.2 Putnam’s Work

2.7 Explain four ways of Scheduling

2.7.1 Work Break Down Structure

2.7.2 Activity Networks and Critical Path Method

2.7.3 Gantt Charts

2.7.4 PERT Charts

2.8 Describe how to do Staffing – “ Who is a Good Software Engineer?”

2.9 Explain Risk Management

2.9.1 Risk Identification

2.9.2 Risk Assessment

2.9.3 Risk Containment

345
3.0 Requirement Analysis & Specifications

3.1 Explain Requirements Gathering and Analysis.

3.2 Explain Software Requirement Specifications (SRS).

3.2.1Contents of the SRS Document

3.2.2 Functional Requirements

3.2.3 How to identify the Functional Requirements

3.3. Documenting the Functional Requirements

3.4 Explain requirements Traceability.

3.5. List Characteristics of a Good SRS Document

3.6. Give Examples of Bad SRS Document

3.7. Explain Organization of the SRS Document

4.0 Software Design, Coding & Testing

4.1 What is a good Software Design?

4.2 Define and Classify Cohesion and Coupling

4.2.1 Classification of Cohesiveness

4.2.2 Classification of Coupling

4.3 Approaches of Software Design

4.3.1 Explain Function-Oriented Design

4.3.2 Explain Object-Oriented Design

4.3.3 Function-Oriented vs Object-Oriented Design

4.4. User Interface Design

4.4.1 List the Characteristics of a good User Interface.

4.4.2 Explain the Basic Concepts - User Guidance and Online Help - Mode Based vs
Modeless Interface -Graphical User Interface (GUI) vs Text-Based User Interface.

4.4.3 List the two types of User Interfaces - Command Language Based Interface -
Menu Based Interface - Direct Manipulation Interfaces.

4.4.4 Explain Component Based GUI Development Window System and Types of
Widgets.

4.5. Unified Modeling Language

346
 4.5.1. List the goals of UML
4.5.2. State the role of UML in Object oriented Design
4.5.3.List the building blocks of UML : Things, Relationships, and Diagrams
4.5.4. Explain the UML building blocks
4.5.5.List the different symbols used in UML notation
4.5.6. Classify and list standard UML diagrams
4.6. State the purpose of Class diagram and draw simple class diagrams.

4.7. Usecase diagram

4.7.1. Define the term Usecase
4.7.2. Know the purposes of Usecase diagram
4.7.3. Explain to draw the Usecase diagram
4.8. Interaction diagram
4.8.1. State the purposes of Interaction diagram
4.8.2. List the types of interaction diagrams: Sequence diagram
and Collaboration diagram

4.8.3. Illustrate drawing the Interaction diagrams

5.0 Testing, Debugging, Reliability, Quality Management & Maintenance

5.1. Explain the following Concepts of Software Coding and Testing.

5.1.1. Coding Standards and Guidelines - Code Review- Code Walk-Throughs - Code

Inspection.

5.1.2 Clean Room Testing - Software Documentation- Software Testing

5.1.3 What is testing?

5.1.4 Differentiate Verification and Validation.

5.1.5 List 3 Designs of Test Cases.

5.1.6 Differentiate Testing in the Large vs Testing in the Small.

5.1.7 Explain Unit Testing - Driver and Stub Modules.

5.1.8 Explain about Black box Testing and White Box Testing.

5.1.9 Explain Open source software testing tools – Selenium, Bugzilla

5.2 Concepts of Debugging

5.2.1 Explain the Debugging Approaches.

347
 5.2.2 List the Debugging Guidelines.

5.3 List and Explain Program Analysis Tools (Static Analysis Tools, Dynamic Analysis Tools)

5.4 List and Explain types of Integration Testing.

5.5 Explain System Testing.

5.6 Explain Performance Testing.

5.7. Understand the concept of Software Reliability

5.7.1 Differentiate Hardware Reliability and Software Reliability

5.7.2 List the different Reliability Metrics

5.7.3 Understand the Reliability Growth Modeling

5.8. Define Statistical Testing

5.9. Define Software Quality

5.10. Explain Software Quality Management System

5.11 Explain the Evolution of Quality Systems.

5.12. Define SEI Capability Maturity Model

COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction to Software Engineering- Life Cycle Models.

2. Software Project Management- Responsibilities of a Software Project Manager- Project planning –

Metrics-Project Estimation Techniques- Staffing Level Estimation - Scheduling – Risk Management

3. Requirement Analysis and Specification: Requirement Gathering and Analysis - SRS document

4. Software Design , Coding and Testing: Good software design, Cohesion and Coupling, Software
Design Approaches, User interface Design, Software Coding and Goals of UML - Role of UML in
Object oriented Design - Building blocks of UML : Things, Relationships, and Diagrams - Symbols used
in UML notation - Classify and list standard UML diagrams - Class diagram, purposes of class
diagram, draw the class diagram - Use case diagram, define the term Use case, purposes of Use case
diagram, draw the Use case diagram - Interaction diagram, purposes of Interaction diagram, the
types of interaction diagrams : Sequence diagram and Collaboration diagram, draw the Interaction
diagrams.

5. Software Testing, Debugging, Reliability, Quality Management and maintenance – Testing,

Debugging software Reliability- Statistical Testing, Software Quality, Software Quality Management
System, SEI capability Maturity Model

REFERENCE BOOKS

348
1. Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Rajib Mall ( PHI)Second Edition.

2. Software Engineering – Jawadekar (TMH)

3. Software Engineering Concepts – Fairley (TMH)

4. Pankaj Jalote international approach to software engineering “:2nd edition

Narosal publishing house 1997

5. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
6. The Unified Modelling Language User guide…Grady Booch
MODEL BLUE PRINT

Marks Wise Question wise

Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage
S.No. Distribution of Distribution of CO’s Mapped
title periods Allocated
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Basics of
Software
Engineering
1 10 11 3 8 1 1 C01
Designs &
Life Cycle
Models

Software
2 Project 18 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO2
Management

Requirement
3 Analysis & 10 11 3 8 * 1 1 * CO1,C03
Specifications

Software
4 Design, 22 17 6 11 * 2 2 * CO1,CO3,CO5
Coding

Software
testing,
Debugging,
Reliability,
5 15 17 6 11 2 2 CO4,CO5
Quality
Management
&
Maintenance

349
 Total 75 70+10* 21 41 8 10* 7 7 1 1*

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit test-2 From 4.1 to 5.12

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-
503
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES

PART-A 16 Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.
1. a) Water fountain model is not a software life cycle model (True/False) (CO1)

b) Set of instructions is ……………………………………………………………. (CO1)

c) SPMP stands for --------------------- (CO2)

d) Which one the following is not an external interface requirement [ ] (CO3)

i) User Interface II) Hardware Interface III) personal interface IV) Software interface

2) What is software crisis and how do you solve it? (CO1)

3) List any three job responsibilities of software project manager. (CO2)
4) Describe Lines of code? (CO2)
5) What is the purpose of Requirements Traceabililty? (CO3)

PART-B 3 X 8=24Marks
Instructions: 1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer
6. a) Explain Classical water fall model in detail. (CO1)
Or
b) Explain spiral model in detail (CO1)

7. a) Explain the two different works of Staffing Level Estimations. (CO2)

Or
b) Explain Risk Management. (CO2)
8. a) Explain functional requirements in detail. (CO3)
Or

350
 b) Explain Requirement gathering and analysis (CO3)

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER-END EXAMINATION
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-503

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS

PART-A 10X3=30Marks

Note: Answer all questions

1. Define the term High Level Language Programming (CO1)

2. State the Responsibilities of a Software Project Manager (CO2)

3. State the Metrics for Project Size Estimation (CO2)

4. What is Requirement analysis (CO3)

5. Define Cohesion and Coupling (CO4)

6. List the Characteristics of a good User Interface (CO4)

7. Define the term usecase. (CO4)

8.List any three Debugging Guidelines (CO5)

9. Define Software Quality (CO5)

10. List the different Reliability Metrics (CO5)

PART-B 5x8=40Marks

Note: Answer all questions

11.A. Explain any two Software Life Cycle Models? (CO1)

OR

11.B Differentiate Data Structure-Oriented Design and Data Flow-Oriented Design (CO1)

12.A. Explain three Project Estimation Techniques? (CO2)

OR

12.B Explain different works of Staffing Level Estimations? (CO2)

351
13.A. Explain about Organization of the SRS Document? (CO3)

OR

13.B Explain in detail about Software Requirement Specifications ? (CO3)

14.A. Explain the two approaches of Software Design? (CO4)

OR

14.B Explain any two types of user interfaces. (CO5)

15.A. Explain the concept of Software Reliability? (CO5)

OR

15.B Explain in detail about Software Quality Management System? (CO5)

PART-C 1X10=10Marks

16. Assume that you had given a task of implementing ATM operations for that design a SRS
document? (CO4)

352
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/W periods
eeks

CCN-504 Internet of Things 5 75 20 80

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction of IOT 10 CO1

2. Data Protocols 15 CO1,CO2

3. Communication Technologies 18 CO1,CO3

4. Wireless Sensor Networks 22 CO4

5. Cloud Computing 10 CO1,CO5

Total Periods 75

Course Objectives i)To assess the vision of IoT.

ii)To classify Real World IoT applications in various Domains.

iii)To understand design methodology for IoT platforms.

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

CO1 CCN-504.1 Explain the basic concepts like usage of sensors

,components and frequently used technologies of IoT from
Course
a global context
Outcomes
CO2 CCN-504.2 Apply Data protocols of IoT

CO3 CCN-504.3 Describe various communication technologies of IOT

CO4 CCN-504.4 Illustrate the use of sensor networks in applications of

various domains

CO5 CCN-504.5 Explain Integrating IOT with cloud computing

353
 CO-PO/PSO Matrix

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-504.1 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 2

CCN-504.2 2 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3

CCN-504.3 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 3 3

CCN-504.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3

CCN-504.5 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 2 3

Average 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.3 3 2.2 2.6 2.8

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1: Introduction of IOT

1.1. INTRODUCTION:
1.1.1.Define IOT and list its Features
1.1.2. List the components of IoT : hardware, software, technology and protocols
1.1.3.List Applications ,various Technologies of IOT
1.1.4.List advantages and disadvantages of IoT
1.1.5.Describe various connecting technologies
1.1.6.Sensors
1.1.6.1. Need of sensor
1.1.6.2. Features of Sensors
1.1.6.3. Classify Sensors based on output, on data types
1.1.7.Define actuator and list its types
1.1.8.List and explain functional Components of IOT
1.1.9.Explain service oriented architecture of IOT
1.1.10. List IOT challenges

1.2 Various Connectivity Technologies in IOT:

1.2.1 6LoWPANs Technologies
1.2.1.1 Features
1.2.1.2 Addressing
1.2.1.3 List and explain different packet formats
1.2.1.4 Explain 6LoWPAN protocol stack architecture
1.2.2 List and Explain Routing protocols(LOADng, RPL)
1.2.3 RFID Technologies
1.2.3.1 State the purpose of RFID
1.2.3.2 List the features
1.2.3.3 Explain Working principle
1.2.3.4 Applications

354
2. DATA PROTOCOLS
2.1. Message Queue Telemetry Transport(MQTT)
2.1.1.Define and explain MQTT
2.1.2.List components,Methods,Applications
2.1.3.Define and explain Secure MQTT
2.2. Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP)
2.2.1.Explain CoAP
2.2.2.Explain CoAP message types
2.3. Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol(XMPP)
2.3.1. List Features of XMPP
2.3.2.Explain XMPP
2.3.3.Describe core XMPP Technologies
2.3.4.List applications of XMPP
2.4. Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP)
2.4.1.List Features of AMQP
2.4.2.Explain AMQP in detail
2.4.3.List applications of XMPP
3. Communication Technologies

3.1. IEEE 802.15.4

3.1.1.List features of IEEE 802.15.4
3.1.2.Explain IEEE 802.15.4
3.1.3.List IEEE 802.15.4 Variants
3.1.4.List and explainIEEE 802.15.4 Types

3.2. ZIGBEE
3.2.1.What is ZIGBEE
3.2.2.List features,components,differenttopologies,types, applications of ZIGBEE
3.2.3.Explain different topologies of ZIGBEE
3.2.4.Explain ZIGBEE types

3.3. Near field communication(NFC)

3.3.1.What is NFC
3.3.2.List types and applications of NFC
3.3.3.Explain working principle of NFC
3.3.4.Describe modes of operation of NFC

3.4. Bluetooth
3.4.1.What is the purpose of Bluetooth
3.4.2.List features,functions,applicationsof Bluetooth
3.4.3.Explain Bluetooth technology in detail
3.4.4.Describe Pico Net

355
 4. Wireless Sensor Networks
4.1. What is Wireless Sensor Network and list its Applications

4.2. Explain types of Sensor networks: Single Source Single Object Detection, Single Source
Multiple Object Detection, Multiple Source Single Object Detection, Multiple Source
Multiple Object Detection
4.3. What are the Challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks
4.4. Explain node Behaviour in WSNs
4.5. Explain Information theoretic self‐management in WSN
4.6. Applications of WSN
4.7. Explain Wireless Multimedia Sensor Networks(WMSN)
4.8. Explain Stationary Wireless Sensor Networks
4.9. Explain Mobile Wireless Sensor Networks
4.10. What is Machine to Machine Communications(M 2 M)
4.11. Lists applications ,features of M2M
4.12. List and explain M2M sensor nodes
4.13. Explain Role of IOT in automation of the following applications
4.13.1. Health care applications
4.13.2. Smart Home,
4.13.3. Smart Cities,
4.13.4. Smart class rooms
4.13.5. Smart Energy
4.13.6. Smart Transportation and Mobility
4.13.7. Smart Factory
5. Cloud Computing

5.1. What is cloud computing ,state its importance and Recent Trends in Computing
5.2. Evolution of cloud computing
5.3. Draw and explain NIST Visual Model of Cloud Computing
5.4. List features of Cloud computing
5.5. Explain components of cloud computing
5.6. Describe different service models in cloud computing
5.7. Compare different service models
5.8. Explain different deployment models or types of clouds
5.9. Differentiate between private cloud and public cloud
5.10. Compare traditional data centre and Cloud storage
5.11. Describe how data is managed in cloud(DBaaS)
5.12. Explain security concepts in cloud
5.13. What is cloud simulator and List different types

COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction of IOT
INTRODUCTION to IOT – Definition – Applications – Technologies – Sensor features –Types –
Actuator list – Components – Challenges Connectivity technologies - 6LoWPAN –Features –
Addressing –Routing -RFID – features – working principle – Applications
2.DATA PROTOCOLS
MQTT – Definition – features – components – applications – MQTT – SMQTT
CoAP- Definition – message types
XMPP – features – core technologies – applications
AMQP- Features-applications
3.Communication Technologies

356
IEEE 802.15.4 – features – variants – types
ZIGBEE –features – components – technologies – types – applications
NFC – types –modes – applications
Bluetooth - purpose –features - Technologies- applications
4.Wireless Sensor Networks

Wireless Sensor Networks- Applications -Types-Challenges-node Behaviour-Information theoretic

self‐management-Applications-WMSN-.
Stationary Wireless Sensor Networks-Mobile Wireless Sensor Networks-M 2 M-applications -
features-sensor nodes- Role of IOT in automation of applications - Health care -Smart Home-Smart
Cities

5.Cloud Computing

Cloud Computing-Evolution-NIST Visual Model-features -components - service models-Compare

different service models-deployment models -Differentiate between private cloud - Compare
traditional data centre and Cloud storage-DBaaS -security concepts - cloud simulators- applications

REFERENCE BOOKS

1)https://onlinecourses-archive.nptel.ac.in/

2) “Internet of Things: A Hands-On Approach”, Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, Orient Blackswan
Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.

3) "Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks: Theory and Practice", Waltenegus Dargie, Christian
Poellabauer, A John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., Publication, 2010.

4) “Internet of Things”, Jeeva Jose, (ISBN: 978-93-86173-591) KBP House,1st edition,2018.

5) Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next Internet, Jean-Philippe Vasseur, Adam Dunkels,
Morgan Kuffmann
6) Designing the Internet of Things , Adrian McEwen (Author), Hakim Cassimally
7) Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and Integrated Ecosystems,
Dr.OvidiuVermesan, Dr. Peter Friess, River Publishers
8) Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach) , Vijay Madisetti , ArshdeepBahga
9) 6LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet, Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, Wiley
10) Building the internet of things with ipv6 and mipv6, The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, Daniel Minoli John Wiley & Sons
11) Recent research/white papers

357
 MODEL BLUE PRINT

Marks Wise Question wise

Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage CO’s
S.No. Distribution of Distribution of
title periods Allocated Mapped
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Introduction of
1 10 14 3 11 1 2 CO1
IOT

DATA
2 15 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO1,CO2
PROTOCOLS

Communication
3 20 14 14 * 3 * CO1,CO3
Technologies

Wireless Sensor
4 20 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO4
Networks

Cloud
5 10 14 3 11 1 2 CO1,CO5
Computing

Total * 75 70 +10* 12 58 10* 4 11 1*

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to3.2
Unit test-2 From 3.3 to 5.13

358
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER
Internet of Things
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-504
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 Minutes

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.

1. a) Sensors are not used in IOT (True/False) (CO1)

b) IOT technology used in Fast Tag is----------------------- (CO1)

c) ---------------------,------------------------are two of CoAp message types (CO2)

d) Which one of the following is Communication Technology of IOT (CO1)

i) ZIGBEE II) XMPP III) AMQP IV) HTML

2) List any three IOT challenges (CO1)

3) List any three features of XMPP. (CO2)
4) Define Secure MQTT (CO2)
5) What is IEEE 802.15.4 (CO3)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks
Instructions: 1) Answer all questions
2) Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer

6. a) Explain service oriented architecture of IOT (CO1)

Or

b) List and explain Routing protocols. (CO1)

7. a) Explain XMPP in detail (CO2)

Or

b) Explain AMQP in detail (CO2)

8. a) List and Explain IEEEE 802.15.4 types in detail (CO3)

Or

b) Explain different topologies of ZIGBEE. (CO3)

359
 BOAR DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

MODEL PAPER –END EXAMINATION
Internet of Things

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-504

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS
PART-A 10X3=30Marks

Note: Answer all questions

1. What is the need of Sensor? (CO1)

2. List any three applications of RFID. (CO1)

3. Define MQTT. (CO2)

4. List any three features of AMQP. (CO2)

5. List IEEE 802.15.4 types. (CO3)

6. List applications of Bluetooth. (CO3)

7. What is Wireless Sensor Network? (CO4)

8. List M2M features. (CO4)

9 List features of Cloud computing (CO5)

10 State the purpose of cloud simulator? (CO5)

PART-B 5x8=40Marks

Note: Answer all questions

11.A List and explain functional Components of IOT (CO1)

OR

11.B Explain 6LoWPAN protocol stack architecture (CO1)

12.A. List and explain CoAP message types (CO2)

OR

12.B Explain core XMPP Technologies. (CO2)

13.A. List and explain ZIGBEE types. (CO3)

OR

360
13.B Explain working principle of NFC. (CO3)

14.A. Explain Information theoretic self‐management in WSN. (CO4)

OR

14.B Explain Wireless Multimedia Sensor Networks. (CO4)

15.A. List and explain components of cloud computing (CO5)

OR

15.B Explain security concepts in cloud. (CO5)

PART-C 1X10=10Marks

16. Justify the role of IoT in Health care applications in detail by choosing appropriate case study.
(CO4)

361
 No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course code Course Title
Periods/Weeks periods FA SA

High Speed
CCN-505 5 75 20 80
Networks

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction to High Speed Networks 16 CO1

Congestion control and traffic

2. 16 CO2
management

3. QOS in IP Networks 15 CO3

4. Optical Networks. 14 CO4

Logical Network design in High speed

5. 14 CO5
networking

Total Periods 75

Course Objectives i) To know the basic concepts, the architectures, the protocols, the
advantages and limitations, and the recent development of various high-
speed networking technologies.

ii) Design TCP and ATM Congestion Control for High speed networks
with respect to some protocol design issues

iii) Evaluate the QOS related performance measurements of High speed

networks

iv) know the significance of optical networks

v) Familiarize with logical network design

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Describe fundamental concepts of protocols and architecture

CO1 CCN-505.1
used for high speed networks.
Course
Analyse Congestion control and traffic management
Outcomes CO2 CCN-505.2
techniques

362
 CO3 CCN-505.3 Apply the techniques of QOS in IP networks to ensure quality

CO4 CCN-505.4 Explain features of Optical networks

CO5 CCN-505.5 Use various techniques of logical network design

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-505.1 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2

CCN-505.2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2

CCN-505.3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 3

CCN-505.4 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2

CCN-505.5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3

Average 2.5 2.4 2.8 2.4 2.4 2 2.8 2.2 2.2 2.4

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. INTRODUCTION TO HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

1.1. Introduction to frame relay network.

1.1.1.Define frame relay network.

1.1.2.Give the header format of frame relay network.

1.1.3.Explain congestion control mechanisms in Frame relay network

1.2. State the importance of x.25

1.3. Explain X.25 network

1.4. Distinguish between Frame relay and X.25.

1.5. Explain Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) technology.

1.5.1.Define ATM

1.5.2.State the need of ATM technology.

1.5.3.Cell structure format of ATM

1.5.3.1. Explain Generic flow control

363
 1.5.3.2. ExplainHeader error control

1.5.3.3. ExplainEffect of error in cell header

1.6. Describe ATM protocol architecture.

1.7. Explain ATM logical connection in networks.

1.7.1.State the importance of VPS (Virtual Private Service)

1.7.2.Call establishment using VPS (Virtual Private Service)

1.8. Explain ATM service categories.

1.8.1.Real time services

1.8.2.Non-real time services

1.9. Explain different types of High speed LAN’s

1.9.1.Fast Ethernet

1.9.2.Gigabit Ethernet

1.9.3.Fiber channel

1.10. Explain various services of IEEE 802.11

1.10.1. WI-FI and Bluetooth

1.10.2. Wireless LAN’s

1.10.3. MANET-Mobile Ad-hoc networking

1.10.4. LI-FI

1.11. State the purpose of IEEE 802.16 (WiMax-Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave
Access)

1.12. Comparison between Wi-Fi and WiMax

2.0 CONGESTION CONTROL AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

2.1. Define Congestion and its impact in networks.

2.2. Explain various Congestion control mechanisms in high speed networks.

2.2.1.Implicit and Explicit congestion signalling

2.2.2.Frame relay discard eligibility using DE bit(Discard Eligibility bit)

2.2.3.Frame relay error checking using CRC

2.3. Explain congestion control techniques in packet switching networks

364
 2.3.1. Open loop congestion control policies (Retransmission,window,discarding and
acknowledgement)

2.3.2.Closed loop congestion control (Backpressure,Choke packet,Implicit signalling ,Explicit

signalling)

2.4. Explain the following concepts in TCP

2.4.1.TCP Traffic

2.4.2.TCP load balancing

2.5. Explain the following TCP/IP internal gateway routing protocols

2.5.1. RIP (Routing Information Protocol)

2.5.2.OSPF (Open Shortest Path First)

2.5.3.IGRP (Internal Gateway Routing Protocol)

2.5.4.EIGRP (Extended Internal Gateway Routing Protocol)

2.6. Explain the following TCP/IP exterior gateway routing protocols

2.6.1. BGP (Border Gateway Routing Protocol)

2.6.2.EGP (Exterior Gateway Routing Protocol)

3.0 QUALITY OF SERVICE IN IP NETWORKS

3.1. Explain Integrated service Architecture(ISA) in IP networks

3.1.1.ISA implementation in router

3.1.2.ISA functions

3.2. Explain the following ISA components

3.2.1.Explain ISA components Background functions

3.2.1.1. RSVP (Resource Reservation Protocol)

3.2.1.2. Admission Protocol

3.2.1.3. Management agent

3.2.1.4. Routing protocol

3.2.2.Explain ISA components Forward functions

3.2.2.1. Classifier and route selection

3.2.2.2. Packet Scheduler

365
 3.3. Explain ISA services

3.3.1.Guarantees service

3.3.2.Controlled load

3.3.3.Best effort

3.4. Explain the following Queuing discipline techniques to ensure QOS in IP

3.4.1.FIFO (First In First Out)

3.4.2.FQ (Fair Queuing)

3.4.3.BRFQ (Bit Round Fair Queuing)

3.5. Comparison of FIFO,FQ and BRFQ

3.6. Explain weighted fair queuing technique to ensure QOS in IP

3.7. Distinguish FIFO and WFQ

3.8. Explain the RED (Random Early Detection) algorithm

3.9. List Goals of RED

3.10. Explain RSVP ( Resource Reservation Protocol) for QOS support

3.11. Explain MPLS ( Multi Protocol Label Switching) for QOS support

OPTICAL NETWORKS

3.12. Introduction to Optical networks

3.12.1. Define Optical Network

3.12.2. State the Role of optical network

3.12.3. Describe Structure of optical networks

3.12.4. List various optical networks

3.13. Explain Optical network components

3.13.1. Couplers

3.13.2. Isolators

3.13.3. Circulators

3.13.4. Multiplexers & Filters

3.13.5. Optical amplifiers

366
 3.13.6. Switches

3.13.7. Wavelength converters

3.14. Explain SONET (Synchronous Optical network) architecture

3.15. List the applications of SONET

3.16. Optical multiplexing techniques

3.16.1. Define Multiplexing

3.16.2. State the usage of Multiplexing in optical networks

3.16.3. Explain OTDM(Optical Time Division Multiplexing)

3.16.4. Describe WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexing)

3.17. Explain the following optical network switching technologies

3.17.1. Optical Burst Switching (OBS)

3.17.2. Optical Packet Switching (OPS)

3.17.3. Optical Circuit Switching (OCS)

3.18. List the applications of optical networks

4.0 LOGICAL NETWORK DESIGN IN HIGH SPEED NETWORKING

4.1. State the need of logical network design

4.2. Explain the following logical network design topologies

4.2.1.Hierarchical Network Design

4.2.2.Redundant Network Design Topologies

4.2.3.Modular Network Design

4.2.4.Designing a Campus Network Design Topology

4.2.5.Designing the Enterprise Edge Topology

4.2.6.Secure Network Design Topologies

4.3. What are the guidelines for assigning network layer addresses?

4.4. Explain Hierarchical Model for Assigning the Addresses

4.5. List the guidelines for designing a Model for Naming

4.6. Switching and routing protocols

367
 4.6.1.Define switching and routing

4.6.2.State the need of switching and routing in high speed networks

4.7. Explain Spanning Tree protocol in high speed network switching

4.8. Explain the following Routing protocols

4.8.1.IP Routing

4.8.2.Novell NetWare Routing

COURSE CONTENTS

HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

1.INTRODUCTION TO HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

Introduction-frame relay networks –ATM protocol architecture-ATM logical connection –ATM cells-
ATM service categories -AAL- high speed LANS: The emergence of high speed LANS-Ethernets-fiber
channel-wireless LANS, Local broad band and Ad hoc networks. Wireless LANS-IEEE 802.11

2.CONGESTION CONTROL AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

Congestion control in data networks and internets- Congestion control mechanisms- congestion
control techniques in packet switching networks - TCP traffic - TCP load balancing- TCP/IP internal
gateway routing protocols - TCP/IP exterior gateway routing protocols - Interior routing protocols.

3.QOS IN IP NETWORKS

Integrated service architecture- ISA components - ISA services - Queuing discipline techniques to
ensure QOS in IP - random early detection – RSVP ( Resource Reservation Protocol) - MPLS ( Multi
Protocol Label Switching)

4.OPTICAL NETWORKS

Optical networks - Role of optical network - Structure of optical networks - Optical network
components – SONET (Synchronous Optical network) - Optical multiplexing techniques - optical
network switching technologies - applications of optical networks.

5.LOGICAL NETWORK DESIGN IN HIGH SPEED NETWORKING

Designing Network Design: Hierarchical Network Design, Redundant Network Design Topologies,
Modular Network Design, Designing a Campus Network Design Topology, Designing the Enterprise
Edge Topology, Secure Network Design Topologies

Designing Models for Addressing and Naming: Guidelines for Assigning Network Layer Addresses,
Using a Hierarchical Model for Assigning Addresses, Designing a Model for Naming.

Selecting Switching and Routing Protocols

Selecting Bridging & Switching Protocols, Spanning Tree Protocol Enhancements –

368
Selecting Routing Protocols: Characterizing Routing protocols, IP Routing, Novell NetWare Routing,

Text Books:

1. William Stallings, “HIGH SPEED NETWORKS AND INTERNET”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2002.

2. “Data Communication and Networking” by Behrouz A Forouzan

3. “Data and Computer Communication” by William Stallings
References:

1. Kaven Pahlavan And Prashant Krishnamoorthy, “Principles Of Wireless Network”, Prentice

Hall Of India
2. Adrian Farrel,” The Internet And Its Protocols”, Elsevier Publications, 2011 Download
3. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S.Davie, ”Computer Networks”, Third edition, Elsevier
Publications, 2003
Model Blue Print:

S.No. Chapter/Unit No.of Weightage Marks Wise Question wise CO’s

title periods Allocated Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Weightage Weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

1 High Speed
16 14 3 11 1 2 CO1
Networks

2 Congestion
control and
16 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO2
traffic
management

3 QOS in IP
15 14 3 3 8 * 1 1 1 * CO3
networks

4 Optical
14 14 3 11 * 1 2 * C04
Networks

5 Logical design
14 14 3 11 * 1 2 * CO5
networks

Total 75 70+10* 15 47 8 10* 5 9 1 1

Note: Part-C: 10 marks single analytical question may be chosen from chapters marked with *.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.5
Unit test-2 From 3.6 to 5.8

369
 DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING ENGINEERING
MODEL PAPER
JAVA PROGRAMMING
UNIT TEST-1
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:CCN-505
MAX MARKS:40 TIME: 90 MINUTES

PART-A 16Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2) First question carries 4 marks and remaining carries 3 marks each.

1.

a) ATM uses asynchronous time division multiplexing (True/False) (CO1)

b) Discarding policy is mainly done by _______. (CO2)

c) Retransmission of packet must not be done when _____________. [ ] (CO2)

I) packet is lost II) packet is corrupted

III) packet is needed IV) packet is error free

d) Name any one category of congestion control (CO2)

2. Distinguish between frame relay network and X.25? (CO1)

3. List different types High speed LAN’s. (CO1)

4. Define congestion. (CO2)

5. List any three ISA services? (CO3)

PART-B 3X8=24Marks

Instructions: 1) Answer all questions

2)Each question carries 8 Marks
3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer

6. a) Explain ATM protocol Architecture with neat diagram (CO1)

Or

b) Explain the various ATM service categories in detail. (CO1)

7. a) Explain congestion control techniques in packet switching networks (CO2)

Or
b) Explain the terms Traffic and Load balancing in TCP. (CO2)

370
8. a) Explain Queuing discipline techniques to ensure QOS in IP (CO3)

Or
b) Explain ATM logical connection in networks (CO3)

Board Diploma Examination

Model Question paper-End Exam

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING ENGINEERING

High speed Networking

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: CCN-505

MAX MARKS:80 TIME: 3 HOURS

Part-A

Answer All Questions each carries three marks 10X3=30

1. State the need of ATM technology (CO1)

2. Define frame relay network. (CO1)
3. Mention the congestion control techniques used in packet switching networks. (CO2)
4. Why congestion occurs in the networks? (CO2)
5. List any three ISA services. (CO3)
6. What is the purpose of queuing? (CO3)
7. List any three differences between WDM and TWDM. (CO4)
8. What is the role of optical networks? (CO4)
9. State the need of logical network design. (CO5)
10. List the guidelines for assigning network layer addresses. (CO5)

Part-B

Answer All Questions carries eight marks 5X8=40

11.(a )Explain Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) technology (CO1)

(or)

(b) Explain the Cell structure format of ATM. (CO1)

371
 12. (a) Congestion control mechanisms in high speed networks. (CO2)

(or)

(b) Explain TCP/IP internal gateway routing protocols (CO2)

13. a) Explain Queuing discipline techniques to ensure QOS in IP. (CO3)

(or)

(b) Explain RSVP (Resource Reservation Protocol) for QOS support (CO3)

14. (a) Explain Optical network components. (CO4)

(or)

(b) Explain Optical multiplexing techniques. (CO4)

15. (a) Explain the following logical network design topologies. (CO5)

(or)

(b) Explain Spanning Tree protocol in high speed network switching. (CO5)

Part-C

Answer the following Question

16. Consider a LAN with four nodes S1, S2, S3 and S4. Time is divided into fixed-size slots, and a
node can begin its transmission only at the beginning of a slot. A collision is said to have occurred if
more than one node transmit in the same slot. The probability of generation of a frame in a time slot
by S1, S2, S3 and S4 are 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 and 0.4, respectively. Find the probability of sending a frame in
the first slot without any collision by any of these four stations
(CO2)

372
 No of Total no
Course Marks Marks
Course title periods/wee of
Code for FA for SA
k periods

CCN-506 Wireless Networks Lab 4 60 40 60

Guidelines:
1. Number of periods allotted per week is 4 periods.
2. Out of 4 Periods one period is allotted for explaining syntax and usage of commands and
three periods are for practicing.
3. In theoretical part of each week the syntax of tcl commands, usage of tools, and prerequisite
theory for respective exercise is to be taught to the students.
4. All of the exercises of this course are to be run on simulators.
5. The simulators like NS2/NS3/Packet Tracer/GNS3 or any relevant simulators can be used.
6. The lecturer/Instructor has to demonstrate the respective exercise during the theoretical
part.
7. Windows/Linux Operating system can be used.

Software Requirements:
Operating System: Windows 7 or above/Ubuntu/Linux
Simulator: NS2/NS3/GNS3/Packet Tracer/ ANY RELEVANT SIMULATOR
Hardware requirements:
Processor: P-IV or above
RAM: 2GB
HDD: 512GB
Note: All the experiments can be done in the physical networking infrastructure.

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

1. 16 CO1
WLAN
2. 16 CO2
Wifi, Bluetooth and ZigBee
3. 28 CO3
4G and 5G
Total 60

373
 1. Introduce the concept of wireless networks simulation to the students
COURSE 2. Involve students in analytical studies of Computer Networks through
network simulation
OBJECTIVES 3. Configuration and use of Wireless technologies using simulators

At the end of the course the student will be able to

CO1 CCN-506.1 Practice the establishment and configuration of standard protocols

of WLAN to test the data transfer parameters.
Course CO2 CCN-506.2 Use standard protocols of Short Range Wireless Networks to test
Outcomes the data transfer parameters.
CO3 CCN-506.3 Demonstrate the configuration of standard protocols of Mobile
Wireless Network Technologies to test the data transfer
parameters.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-506.1 2 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1

CCN-506.2 2 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 1 1

CCN-506.3 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 1 1

Average 2 3 2.6 3 1 2 1.3 2.6 1 1

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

Wireless LAN
1. Create WLAN and configure

2. Simulate CSMA/CA protocol on WLAN

3. Configuration of wireless networks using CISCO AP

4. Simulate ICMP and DHCP on WLAN

5. Create public and private networks simultaneously usingGateway

Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and ZigBee

6. Perform data transfer using BluetoothTechnology
7. Simulate Bluetooth Network and draw the Bluetooth parameter values
8. Simulate ZigBee network and draw the ZigBee parameter values

374
 9. Create Wi-Fi Network and perform data exchange using RTC/CTS
10. Perform data transfer using RFID
11. Simulate ZigBee with Energy Model and find the rxPower and txPower
Mobile 4G and 5G Technologies
12. Perform data transfer using GPRS MobileHandset on Wireless Network

13. Perform data transfer using UMTS MobileHandset on Wireless Network

14. Calculate SINR including Beam Tilt for Downlink and Uplink on Wireless
Network
15. Find theFrequency Reuse for Co-Channel cells and Cell Cluster
16. Simulate MIMO technology in wireless networks
17. Simulate 4G LTE Network
18. Simulate 5G Network

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment

1 Exercise on  Identificationand  Installation of simulator

creation of WLAN familiarization of  Identify devices, cables, ports and
and configuration. various components of connection types in the simulator
Simulator  Practice connecting devices in the WLAN
 Know WLAN design with different connection types and ports
and configuration care.
 Configure all PCs, Devices and Ports with
suitable IPs
 Check proper connections established or
not
and connectivity

2 Exercise on  WLAN design and Practice connecting devices in the WLAN

simulation of configuration with different connection types and ports.
CDMA/CA on  Simulation of  Configure all PCs, Devices and Ports with
CDMA/CA suitable IPs
WLAN
 Check proper connections established or
not
and connectivity
 Simulation of CDMA/CA
 Calculate Throughput of the WLAN
3 Exercise on  WLAN design and  Practice connecting devices in the WLAN
configuration of configuration with different connection types and ports.
 CISCO AP configuration  Configure all PCs, Devices and Ports with
Wireless Network
in the WLAN suitable IPs
using CISCO AP  Check proper connections established or
not

375
 and connectivity
 Connecting CISCO AP in to the WLAN
 Configuration of CISCO AP
 Check communication between CISCO AP
and WLAN devices
4 Exercise on  WLAN design and  Practice connecting devices in the WLAN
simulate ICMP and configuration with different connection types and ports
DHCP on WLAN  Configure DHCP in care.
WLAN  Check proper connections established or
not
and connectivity
 DHCP configuration and run
 Check IP addresses of the WLAN devices
 Check ICMP packets transmission between
devices
5 Exercise on  WLAN design and  Practice connecting devices in the WLAN
creating public and configuration with different connection types and ports
private networks  Configure Private, care.
Public network and  Check proper connections established or
simultaneously
Gateway not and connectivity
with gateway  Configuration of Private Network
 Configuration of Public Network
 Configuration of Gateway
 Check Connectivity between Public and
private using Gateway
6 Exercise on  WLAN design and  WLAN Design and configuration
perform data configuration  Adding Bluetooth in the WLAN
transfer using  Configure Bluetooth  Configure Bluetooth in the WLAN
and perform data  Practice data transfer from master to slave
Bluetooth
transfer and vice versa
7 Exercise on  WPAN design and  WPAN design and configuration
simulate configuration  Practice data transfer from master to slave
Bluetooth network  Perform data transfer and vice versa
and draw and know the  Know the simulation Bluetooth parameters
parameter values throughput of the  Draw the Bluetooth parameters
network  Know / calculate the throughput of the
data transfer
8 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure WPAN with ZigBee
simulate ZigBee WPAN with ZigBee  Practice data transfer from source to
network and draw  Perform data transfer destination
and know the  Know the simulation ZigBee parameters
parameter values
throughput of the  Draw the ZigBee Parameter
network  Know / calculate the throughput of the
data transfer
9 Exercise on create  Design and configure  Design and Configure Wi-Fi Network
Wi-Fi network and Wi-Fi network  Practice data exchange using RTC/CTS
perform data  Perform data exchange  Know the simulation Wi-Fi parameters
using RTC/CTS  Draw the Wi-Fi parameters
exchange using
 Know/ calculate the throughput of the data
RTC/CTS transfer

376
10 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and Configure Wireless Network
perform data Wireless network with  Add RFID card/tag and RFID reader
RFID  Practice data transfer from RFID reader to
transfer using RFID
 Perform data transfer RFID card/tag
using RFID technology  Draw the RFID parameters
 Know / calculate the throughput of the
data transfer
11 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure WPAN with ZigBee
Simulate ZigBee WPAN with ZigBee  Add Energy Model to ZigBee
with Energy  Perform data transfer  Practice data transfer from source to
Model and find and know the destination
the rxPower and throughput of the  Know the simulation ZigBee parameters
network  Draw the rxPower and txPower Parameter
txPower
values
 Know / calculate the throughput of the
data transfer
12 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure Wireless Network
Perform data Wireless Network  Add GPRS Mobile Handset
transfer using GPRS  Perform data transfer  Practice Data Transfer using GPRS mobile
using GPRS Mobile handset
MobileHandset on
Handset  Know the simulation parameters of GPRS
Wireless Network mobile data transfer
 Know/ calculate the throughput of the data
transfer
13 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure Wireless Network
perform data Wireless Network  Add UMTS Mobile Handset
 Perform data transfer  Practice Data Transfer using UMTS mobile
transfer using
using UMTS Mobile handset
UMTS mobile
Handset  Know the simulation parameters of UMTS
handset on mobile data transfer
Wireless Network  Know / calculate the throughput of the
data transfer
14 Exercise on  Use predefined  Use the predefined network
calculating SINR for wireless network  Add mobile in the wireless network
 Calculate SINR for  Practice downlink operation
Downlink and
downlink and uplink  Practice uplink operation
uplink in the  Draw parameter values
wireless network  Calculate SINR for downlink
 Calculate SINR for uplink
15 Exercise to find the  Use predefined  Use the predefined network/design new
frequency reused wireless cellular wireless cellular network suitable for
for co-channel cells network scenario
 Find the frequency  Select cells in the cellular network
and cell clusters
reused for co-channel  Practice with different cells in the cellular
cells and cell clusters network
 Identify the co-channel cells
 Identify the cell clusters
16 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure Wireless network
simulate MIMO wireless network  Configure MIMO technology
 Configure MIMO  Practice data transfer using MIMO
technology in
technology technology

377
 Wireless network  Know / calculate the throughput of the
wireless network
17 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure Wireless network
simulate 4G mobile wireless mobile  Configure 4G technology
Network network  Practice data transfer using 4G technology
 Know / calculate the throughput of the
wireless network
18 Exercise on  Design and configure  Design and configure Wireless network
simulate 5G mobile wireless mobile  Configure 5G technology
Network network  Practice data transfer using 5G technology
 Know / calculate the throughput of the
wireless network

References:

 Introduction to Network Simulator NS2, 2nd Edition; Teerawat Issariyakul , Ekram Hossain
 Manual of NS3
https://www.nsnam.org/docs/manual/ns-3-manual.pdf
 Tutorials of NS3
https://www.nsnam.org/docs/tutorial/ns-3-tutorial.pdf
 Advanced Network Technologies Virtual Lab
http://vlabs.iitkgp.ernet.in › ant
 Follow the steps to configure ns2 simulator
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=D3A2ZNZIQ1Q
 Packet tracer experiments
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=frUQMHXhnvs
 Fading Channels and Mobile Communications Virtual Laboratory
http://vlabs.iitkgp.ac.in/fcmc/index.html

Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks

code Periods/Weeks periods for FA for SA

CCN-507 Advanced Computer 4 60 40 60

Networks Lab

Guide Lines:

1. Number of periods allotted per week is 4 periods.

2. Out of 4 Periods one period is allotted for explaining syntax and usage of commands and
three periods are for practicing.
3. In theoretical part of each week the syntax of tcl commands, usage of tools, and prerequisite
theory for respective exercise is to be taught to the students.
4. Most of the exercises of this course are to be run on simulators (using respective
commands) and very few are to be developed through programming language.

378
 5. The simulators like NS2/NS3/Packet Tracer/GNS3 or any other open-source simulators can
be used.
6. The lecturer/Instructor has to demonstrate the respective exercise during the theoretical
part.
7. Windows/Linux Operating system can be used.
8. For certain programming exercises Java/C/Python can be used.

NOTE:If full-fledged physical networking infrastructure is available then utilize it instead of

simulators.

Sl.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of Periods CO’s Mapped

1 Basics of Local area networks 16 C01
2 Concepts of Flow Control protocols 16 C02
3 Concepts of Access Control 8 C03
4 Concepts of Routing Algorithms 8 C04
5 Concepts of client server, wireless
12 C05
Networks
Total number of periods 60

Course Objectives  Introduce the concept of network simulation to the students

 Involve students in analytical studies of Computer Networks through
network simulation
 To understand client server model

At the end of the course the student able to :

C01 CCN-507.1 Demonstrate LAN topologies bus, ring, star
C02 CCN-507.2 Perform Flow control protocols over noiseless channel and noisy
channel
Course
C03 CCN-507.3 Use Access control like CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA
outcomes
C04 CCN-507.4 Practice Routing algorithms used in TCP (distance vector) and UDP
(link state routing)
C05 CCN-507.5 Implement Client server networking model, wireless networks like
wireless sensor network and MANET
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CCN-507.1 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 1
CCN-507.2 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1
CCN-507.3 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 2
CCN-507.4 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 1
CCN-507.5 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 1 1
Average 2.2 1.6 1.6 2.2 2.6 1.2 2.6 1.6 1.2

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. Exercise on Knowing installation of NS2/NS3/Packet Tracer/GNS3

2. Exercise on Bus topology
3. Exercise on Ring topology

379
 4. Exercise on Star topology
5. Exercise on Stop and Wait sliding window protocol
6. Exercise on Go back N protocol
7. Exercise on selective repeat protocols
8. Exercise on high level data link control protocol
9. Exercise on performance analysis of CSMA/CD
10. Exercise on performance analysis of CSMA/CA
11. Exercise on Distance vector routing algorithm
12. Exercise on Link state routing algorithm
13. Exercise on socket programming
14. Exercise on implementing a wireless sensor network
15. Exercise on implementing a mobile adhoc network

Key Competencies

Sl.No. Name of Experiment Objectives Key Competencies

1 Exercise on Knowing  Learn the basic concepts  Observe the NS2/NS-3
installation of about open-source network simulator running
NS2/NS3/ Packet simulator NS-2/NS-3,  Initialize and terminate
Tracer/GNS3  Learn to download, install aspects of network
and work with NS-2/NS-3 simulator object
 Identifying and solving typical  Define the network
errors encountered during topology: nodes, links,
installation of NS-2/NS-3 queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set “trace” for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
2 Exercise on Bus  Learn about Local Area  Observe the NS2/NS-3
topology Network (LAN); Bus topology simulator running
and protocols uses in LAN  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a LAN aspects of network
using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, lan if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
3 Exercise on Ring  Learn about Local Area  Observe the NS2/NS-3
topology Network (LAN); Ring simulator running
topology and protocols uses  Initialize and terminate
in LAN aspects of network

380
  Practice simulating a LAN simulator object
using ns2/NS-3  Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes,lan if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
4 Exercise on Star  Learn about Local Area  Observe the NS2/NS-3
topology Network (LAN); Star topology simulator running
and protocols uses in LAN  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a LAN aspects of network
using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes,lan if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
[optional]
 Trace
5 Exercise on Stop and  Learn about flow control  Observe the NS2/NS-3
Wait sliding window protocols for noiseless simulator running
protocol channel; Stop and Wait  Initialize and terminate
protocol aspects of network
 Practice simulating a flow simulator object
control using ns2/NS-3  Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
6 Exercise on Go back N  Learn about flow control  Observe the NS2/NS-3
protocol protocols for noisy channel; simulator running
Go back N protocol  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a flow aspects of network
control using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of

381
 nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
7 Exercise on selective  Learn about flow control  Observe the NS2/NS-3
repeat protocols protocols for noisy channel; simulator running
selective repeat protocols  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a flow aspects of network
control using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
[optional]
 Trace
8 Exercise on study of  Learn about data link layer  Observe the NS2/NS-3
high level data link protocol; high level data link simulator running
control protocol control protocol  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a flow aspects of network
control using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
9 Exercise on  Learn about Access control  Observe the NS2/NS-3
performance analysis protocol; CSMA/CD simulator running
of CSMA/CD  Practice simulating a access  Initialize and terminate
control using ns2/NS-3 aspects of network
simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications

382
  Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
[optional]
 Trace
10 Exercise on  Learn about Access control  Observe the NS2/NS-3
performance analysis protocol; CSMA/CA simulator running
of CSMA/CA  Practice simulating a access  Initialize and terminate
control using ns2/NS-3 aspects of network
simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
11 Exercise on Distance  Learn about routing  Observe the NS2/NS-3
vector routing algorithms; Distance vector simulator running
algorithm routing algorithm  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a routing aspects of network
algorithm using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
12 Exercise on Link state  Learn about routing  Observe the NS2/NS-3
routing algorithm algorithms; Link state routing simulator running
algorithm; Dijkstra algorithm.  Initialize and terminate
 Practice simulating a routing aspects of network
algorithm using ns2/NS-3 simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
[optional]
 Trace

383
13 Exercise on socket  Understand basics of .net  Practice Communication
programming package in java or any through sockets in client
respective package server model in simplex,
depending language used half duplex, full duplex
 Develop socket programming modes
in client server model
14 Exercise on  Understand basic concepts of  Observe the NS2/NS-3
implementing a Wireless Sensor Networks simulator running
wireless sensor (WSNs), types, applications  Initialize and terminate
network of WSN aspects of network
simulator object
 Define the network
topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace
15 Exercise on  Understand about the basics  Observe the NS2/NS-3
implementing a of Mobile Ad-hoc Networks simulator running
mobile adhoc network (MANETs) and different  Initialize and terminate
routing protocols aspects of network
 Setup a network with simulator object
wireless nodes using ns2/NS-  Define the network
3 topology: nodes, links,
queues, mobility of
nodes, if any
 Define the network
traffic: creating agents
and their applications
 Set trace for Network
Animator (NAM)
 Trace

Software requirements  NS2/NS3 Simulator in Linux /Windows Operating system

 Sample configuration steps for Windows 10 64 bit
Operating System
 Ubuntu app for windows
 Xming server for Windows

References:

 Introduction to Network Simulator NS2, 2nd Edition; Teerawat Issariyakul , Ekram Hossain

 Advanced Network Technologies Virtual Lab http://vlabs.iitkgp.ernet.in › ant

384
 Follow the steps to configure ns2 simulator https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=D3A2ZNZIQ1Q

Mark
s
Course Course No. of Total No. of for Marks for
Code Title Periods/Week Periods FA SA
Common
508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60

No of Periods COs Mapped

S. No. Unit Title

Attitude 4
1 CO1
Adaptability 4
2 CO1, CO2
Goal Setting 4
3 CO1, CO2, CO3
Motivation 4
4 CO1, CO2, CO3
Time Management 4
5 CO2
Critical thinking 4
6 CO3
Creativity 4
7 CO3
Problem Solving 5
8 CO3
Team Work 4
9 CO4
Leadership 4
10 CO4
Stress Management 4
11 CO4

Total Periods 45

385
 To understand the importance of Life skills for acceptable,
sustainable and ethical behaviour in academic, professional and
social settings

To exhibit language competence appropriate to acceptable social

and professional behaviour.

CO No.
Course Outcomes

CO1 Demonstrates positive attitude and be able to adapt to people and events
Course Objectives

CO2 Fixes personal and professional goals and manages time to meet targets

CO3 Exhibits critical and lateral thinking skills for problem solving.

To demonstrate time management, stress management, team

skills, problem solving ability to manage oneself in academic,
professional and social settings.

386
 Shows aptitude for working in teams in a stress free manner and sometimes/
CO4
very often/ mostly display leadership traits.

CO-PO Matrix

Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 45

Common-508 Number of Course Outcomes: 4

POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks

with CO Column 1 Mapping
No.
Number Percentage % (1,2,3)

PO1 Not directly applicable for Life Skills Course. However activities
that use content and situations from academic, professional and
PO2
social settings relevant to the Programme shall be exploited for
PO3 triggering thought and interaction in the Course.

PO4

PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3

CO3, CO 4

PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 45% 16 -59%: Level 2

CO3, CO4

387
 PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 30%
CO3, CO4
Up to 15%: Level 1

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7

CO 1   

CO 2   

CO3   

CO4   

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Activity based Question that focuses on COs and responses as exhibited
through communication has to be given marks for the following parameters

 Clarity of Thinking as Exhibited through Content

 Features of Etiquette

*Rubric Descriptors ‘Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good/ Satisfactory/ Poor’ levels of

Competence

Level of Parameters of Assessment

Competence
Clarity of thinking as exhibited through content Features of etiquette
Thinking is extremely logical and suggested course
of action is feasibile
Exhibits courtesy to all
Shows creativity and uniqueness
Outstanding most appropriately with
10 Exhibits expert use of expression (organizational
confidence
devices and discourse markers) that denote clarity
in thought.

388
 Thinking is clear and logical
Suggested course of action is feasible
Shows traces of creativity Exhibits courtesy to all to
Very Good
8/9 Exhibits good expression (organizational devices a considerable level.
and discourse markers) that denote clarity in
thought.
Thinking is clear and logical most of the time. Lacks Exhibits courtesy /
Good creativity or out of the box thinking as expressed politeness to an
6/7
through content. acceptable level.
Thinking is logical; However expressing content is Has courtesy but often
Satisfactory
4/5 disjointed and disorganized. fumbles with language.
Thoughts as expressed through content are Fails to show courtesy to
Poor
3 or less than 3 incoherent.Language skills are very limited. others.

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.

Periods
Allocated Satisfactor Very
S Questions based on Max Poor Good Outstanding
for y Good
No Course Outcomes Marks >3 6/7 10
practical 4 /5 8/9
work
1 Short presentation on GOALS
with Timeline and Action 12 10
Plan
2 State what you will do in the
given situation (Assesses
adaptability and critical 12 10
thinking skills, leadership,
team skills )
3 In how many different and
creative way can you use
8 10
_____ (Object) other than its
primary use
4 What solutions can you think
13 10
of for _____ problem.

Total 45 60

389
Note: The marks that are awarded for the student for 40 to be increased proportionally
for 60.

Learning Outcomes

1. Attitude Matters :
9.1 Understand the importance of positive attitude and the consequences of
negative attitude.
1.2 Demonstrate positive attitude in dealing with work-related issues and in
personal life.
2. Adaptability….makes life easy :
10.1 Understand the significance of adaptability.
2.2 Show adaptability whenever needed, both at place of work and on personal
front.
3. Goal Setting … life without a Goal is a rudderless boat!
3.2 Understand the SMART features of goal-setting.
3.3 State one’s short-term and long-term goals and spell out plans to achieve
them.
4. Motivation … triggers success!
4.2 Comprehend the need for motivation in order to achieve success in life.
4.3 State how one is motivated in life.
4.4 Show the impact of motivation on one’s life
5. Time Management… the need of the Hour!
5.2 Understand the value of time management and prioritizing in life
5.3 Demonstrate the effect of time management on one’s professional work.
6. Critical Thinking … logic is the key!
6.1 Distinguish between facts and assumptions
6.2 Use logical thinking in dealing with professional matters
7. Creativity … the essential you!
7.2 Understand the importance of thinking out of the box in dealing with critical
issues
7.3 Solve problems using creativity / imagination
8. Problem Solving … there is always a way out!

390
 8.2 Understand the need for and importance of problem solving.
8.3 Use logic or creativity to solve a problem at workplace or home.
9. Team Work… together we are better!
9.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
9.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
10. Leadership… the meaning of a leading!
10.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
10.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
11. Stress Management… live life to the full!
11.1 Understand what causes stress and how to cope with stress at workplace.
11.2 Demonstrate how stress can be overcome in a healthy way.

Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for
code Periods/Weeks periods SA

CCN-509 PROJECT WORK 6 90 40 60

Course i)To inculcate team spirit among students

Objectives ii)To apply software life cycle models
iii)To design,develop,test and deploy project
iv)To Incorporate communication and computer networking environment in
designing the applications to make them multi user and concurrent

At the end of course student able to

CO1 CCN-509.1 Identify the hardware, software and networking related

problems and their feasibility
Course
Outcomes CO2 CCN-509.2 Prepare SRS document based on gathered and analysed
requirements

391
 CO3 CCN-509.3 Design the plan document based on SRS and networking
requirements

CO4 CCN-509.4 Code and test and install the software based on the design
document on the Network

CO5 CCN-509.5 Practice project maintenance skills , maintaining quality and

reliability

CO6 CCN-509.6 Calculate software metrics like cost, loc, scheduling,

manpower , networking communication costs and other
resources

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-509.1 3 2 1 3 1 2 3

CCN-509.2 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2

CCN-509.3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2

CCN-509.4 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 2

CCN-509.5 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 2

CCN-509.6 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 2

Average 3 2 2.4 2 2.2 1.8 3 2 3 2

3=stronglymapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Identify different works to be carried out in the Project

2. Collect data relevant to the project work
3. Carryout need surveyand identify the problem(project)
4. Select the most efficient software life cycle from the available choices based on preliminary
investigation
5. Estimate the cost of project, technological need, computer skills, communication and
networking materials and other equipment
6. Prepare the plan and schedule of starting time and sequence of operations to be carried out
at various stages of the project work in detail
7. Prepare SRS document
8. Design the required elements of the project work as per standard models such as UML
9. Develop the working software and hardware modules required for the project work
10. Prepare critical activities at various stages of the project work

392
11. Test ,Debug, verify ,install and validate the project after establishing the required
communication network
12. Record the results
13. Preparation of project report (and user manual if necessary) to enable the client to maintain
the project

Key competencies (Guide lines)

THE PROJECT CAN BE CHOSEN FROM THE FOLLOWING DOMAINS:

1. SOFTWARE PROJECTS
a. Web site designing
b. Banking
c. Income tax calculation package
d. Examinations cell.
e. Student database management
f. Library management
g. Stores Management
h. Staff data management
i. Payrolls
j. Inventory Control
k. Hostel management
l. Tourism package
m. Institution management software
n. Anti-Virus software development.
o. Folder-locking.
p. Terminate stay resident systems.
q. Network management software systems
r. Firewall based security management software solutions
s. Networking simulators

2. HARDWARE and NETWORKING PROJECTS

a. Wireless LAN
b. Wireless PAN
c. High speed networks
d. FTP Server
e. Chat Server
f. Chat Application
g. Mobile based LAN Monitoring
h. Using Rasberry –Pi
i. Online Resume builder
j. Communication Hardware systems
k. QLAN establishing
b. Using interfacing devices
c. Voice synthesizer
d. Voice recognizer
e. Printer sharer
f. ADD ON cards or any relevant

3. Projects related to wireless Communication

393
 a. Bluetooth Controlled Electronic Home Appliances
b. Wireless Electronic Notice Board using GSM
c. Restaurant Management System Project
d. RFID based Attendance System

4. SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE PROJECTS

a. Using interfaces, microcontrollers. Microprocessors and PCs
b. Inter-cum
c. Assembling computer along with peripherals.
d. Traffic light controller
e. Stepper motor related
f. Lift controllers
g. Level controllers
h. Temperature controllers

5. To develop above projects and deploy in cloud platform

6. To develop IOT based applications

7. To maintain the software products based on the everchanging needs of and quality
measures required by the clients

Evaluation Scheme for the Project Work

Max. Marks Allotted for each task

Tasks INTERNAL /EXTERNAL ( 40+60=100)
S. No.

1. Feasibility study of the problem 4/6

2. Requirement Analysis of the problem, SRS 4/8

document preparation along with networking
requirements

3. Designing the problem including 6/10

software,communication and networking aspects

4. Implementation 8/10

394
5. Establishment of communication network,Testing 10 /16
and verification

6. Project report preparation and presentation 8/10

Total: 40/60 (100)

395
 VI SEMESTER

DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKING ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION

CURRICULUM-2020

(VI Semester)

CCN-601 Industrial Training

No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title Duration
periods/week for FA for SA

CCN-601 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING 42 6 months 240 60

(In-house/Industry)

396
 S No Unit Title Duration COs Mapped

1 Application of Knowledge acquired. 1 month CO1

2 Skill Acquirement. 2 months CO2

3 Participate in product development. 2 months CO3

4 Preform onsite service. 1 month CO4

Total 6 months

1.Expose to real time working environment

2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution
Course Objectives 3. Acquire the required skills in SDLC phases.
4. Instil the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self-
confidence.

At the end of course student able to:

CO1 CCN-601.1 Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.
Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and development, testing,
Course CO2 CCN-601.2 verification and validation, deployment and distribution of the product
Outcomes on the required communication network.
Involve in product design, development, quality testing and
CO3 CCN-601.3 maintenance,fabrication of required hardware Networking products by
exhibiting the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
Prepare product document, gain the skills in deploying product on
CO4 CCN-601.4 communication network at customer site, training the end user,
maintaining the system.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CCN-601.1 3 3 3 3

CCN-601.2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3

CCN-601.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CCN-601.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Average 3 3 3 2.7 3 3 3 3 3 3

397
 3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES (In-house training):

No. OF
TRAINING
TOPIC LEARNING OUTCOMES (In-house training) PERIOD
MODULE NO.
S
Module1 Planning 1. Define the problem
2. Identify the scope of any existing systems.
3. Determine the objectives for the proposed
new software/communication networking
system.
4. Developing an effective outline for the
90
upcoming development cycle.
5. Catch problems.
6. Identify funding and resources.
7. Set the project schedule at various time
frames

Module 2 1. Define prototype system requirements

2. Evaluate alternatives to existing
Analysis
prototypes
3. Perform research and analysis to
determine the needs of end-users 110
4. Prepare Requirement specification
document.
5. Specify the software, hardware, and
communication network requirements.
Module 3 1. Design overall system architecture.
2. User interfaces
Design
3. System interfaces
4. Network requirements
5. Databases 1r0
6. Communication device equipment
requirements
7. Prepare design document.

Module 4 Development 1. Practice production guidelines in

developing hardware/Networking parts
of project.
2. Practice coding guidelines.
3. Code and build the application as per the 200
design using modular programming.
4. Compilation and execution.
5. Establish and configure communication
networks with proper security

398
 enforcement.
Model 5 Testing 1. Perform troubleshooting on established
communication network to identify and
resolve the failures if any.
2. Perform debugging.
3. Perform Modular and integrated testing. 60
4. Verify and validate the system.
5. Prepare the testing document and/or
user document.

Module 6 Product 1. Site preparation for deploying product

installation 2. Install a product system at site.
and 3. Train the end user to operate the system.
maintenance 4. Provide security enforcement.
5. Provide maintenance to the system after 60
installation.
6. Explain customer relationship importance
7. Follow the standard ethics of
communication networking systems.
TOTAL NUMBER OF PERIODS 630

LEARNING OUTCOMES (In Industry): The student shall be able to display the following skill sets

1. Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.

2. Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and development, testing, verification and
validation.
3. Acquire skills of deployment and distribution of the product on the required communication
network
4. Involve in product design, development, quality testing and maintenance production by
exhibiting the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
5. Prepare product documents like user manual and installation guide and operational
manuals.
6. Perform the activities of deploying product on communication network at customer site and
training the end user.
7. Maintaining the system at user site (Post product services)

Scheme of evaluation

SI. Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks
1 Industrial 6 months 1.First Assessment of 120

399
 Training Assessment at learning
Industry (After outcomes by
12 Weeks) both the
faculty and
training
mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the
the Industry 120
faculty and
(After 22
training
weeks))
mentor of the
industry
Final Training
20
Summative Report
assessment at Demonstration
institution level of any one of
30
the skills listed
in learning
outcomes

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes during first and second
assessment

Max Marks Allotted Max Marks Allotted

Sl.No Learning Outcome
For first assessment For second assessment
Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in
1 50 10
the institution.
Acquire the required skills of analysis,
2 design and development , testing, 40 20
verification and validation.
Acquire the required skills of deployment
3 and distribution of the product on the 30 10
required communication network
Involve in product design, development,
quality testing and maintenance
4 - 25
production by exhibiting the strength,
teamwork spirit and self-confidence
Prepare product documents like user
manual and installation guide and
5 - 15
operational manuals.

400
 Perform the activities of deploying
product on communication network at
6 25
customer site and training the end user.

Maintaining the system at user site (Post

7 product services) 15

Total 120 120

During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which
the student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In
case the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be
raised to 120 marks for the given assessment i.e. either assessment 1 or 2. However the
performance of the student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than
three skill sets.

Illustration for First assessment.

If the student has undergone training in only in 2 skill sets ( namely 1  for 50 marks, and
2 for 40 marks ) out of 3 ( namely 1  for 50 marks, 2 for 40 marks and 3  for 30 marks) in
First assessment and marks awarded during assessment is 60 out of 90 marks, then the marks of 60
shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (60/90)*120=80.

Illustration for second assessment .

If the student has undergone training in only in 5 skill sets ( namely 1  for 10 marks, 2
for 20 marks , 3 - for 10 marks, 4 for 25 marks, 5 For 15 marks ) out of 7 ( namely 1  for 10
marks, 2 for 20 marks , 3  For 10 marks, 4 for 25 marks, 5 For 15 marks, 6  for 25 marks
and 7 for 15 marks ) in Second assessment and marks awarded during assessment is 65 out of
80 marks, then the marks of 65 shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (65/80)*120=97.5 =
rounded to 98.

GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER

NETWORKING ENGINEERING PROGRAMME

1. Duration of the training: 6 months.

2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students can be trained in either in In-house/Industry in the areas of
4. Application Software Development / system software Development / firmware development
/ Mobile application development/ Database applications / Web development/ IoT
application development / smart technologies / Hardware interfacing/ Networking .
5. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
6. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training.
7. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the
concerned section in the institution.
8. The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at
industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level
put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.

401
 9. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level,
the student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.
10. Final summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including1. Head of
the section ( of concerned discipline ONLY), 2.External examiner from an industry and 3.
Faculty member who assessed the student during Industrial Training as members.

Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students
performance during industrial training:

1. Shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.

2. Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the industry during the
training period, and shall check it scrupulously.
3. Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the assessment.
4. Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions for
improvement.
5. Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per stipulated schedules.
6. Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
7. Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill set during 1st
and 2nd assessments
8. Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials like
photographs, articles, videos etc.
9. Shall act as co-examiner along with other examiners in the final assessment at institution.
10. Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.
11. Shall maintain a diary indicating his observation with respect to the progress of students
learning in all three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and Affective).
Guidelines to the training mentor in the industry:

1. Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
2. Shall assess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the faculty member.
3. Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
4. Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training period.
5. Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development or any
misbehavior as the case may be.

402
 DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION
NAME OF THE INSTITUTION
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING FIRST ASSESSMENT
PIN:

NAME OF THE STUDENT:

Name of the Industry:

Skill Max Marks Allotted Marks obtained

Set
Sl.No SKILL SET For each parameter

Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the

1 50
institution.

403
 Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and
2 40
development , testing, verification and validation.

Acquire the required skills of deployment and

3 30
distribution of the product.

Total 120

(Marks in words: )

Signature of the Training In-charge (Mentor) Signature of the visiting staff

(Guide)

Name: Name:

Designation: Designation:

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

NAME OF THE INSTITUTION
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING SECOND ASSESSMENT

PIN:

NAME OF THE STUDENT:

Name of the Industry:

Skill Max Marks Allotted Marks obtained

Set
Sl.No SKILL SET For each parameter

Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the

1 10
institution.

Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and

2 20
development, testing, verification and validation.

404
 Acquire the required skills of deployment and
3 10
distribution of the product.

Involve in product design, development, quality

4 testing and maintenance production by exhibiting 25
the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence

Prepare product documents like user manual and

5 installation guide and operational manuals. 15

Perform the activities of deploying product at

6 customer site and training the end user. 25

Maintaining the system at user site (Post product

7 services) 15

120

(Marks in words: )

Signature of the Training In-charge (Mentor) Signature of the visiting staff

(Guide)

Name: Name:

Designation: Designation:

405